CA2279845A1 - A communication system architecture - Google Patents

Abstract

Telephone calls, data and other multimedia information is routed through a hybrid network which includes transfer of information across the internet. A
media order entry captures complete user profile information for a user. This profile information is utilized by the system throughout the media experience for routing, billing, monitoring, reporting and other media control functions.
Users can manage more aspects of a network than previously possible, and control network activities from a central site.

Description

DEMANDES OU BREVETS VOLUMiNEUX
1.A PRESENTS PART1E DE CETTE DEMANDS OU CE BREVET
COMPREND PLUS D'UN TOME.
CECI EST LE TOME ~ DE
NOTE: Pour les tomes additionels, veuiilez contacter !e Bureau canadien des brevets fr JUMBO APPI~ICATIONS/PATEI11TS I

THIS IS VOLUME .!i OF
NOTE. For additional volumes ~piease contact'the Canadian Patent OffPcE

wo ~r~oso rcT~smnm4 (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description protected VOOperator* m-pOperator A pointer to the logged in video operator VOCalIObjMgr* rn-pCallMgr Pointer to the call object manager VOScheduleWnd* m_pScheduleWnd A pointer to the schedule window s (ii) Constructors) VOVideoWatchVwQ;
(iii) Methods void OnDial(); dials the number in the destination edit box.
to void OnTransfer(); transfers the current call to a number. This will initially display a dialog box where the user enters the number top which the call is to be transferred.
void OnAnswer(); is called when the Answer buttan is clicked.
void OnForward(); is called when the forward button is clicked. All the call will be forwarded to the forwarding number provided.
void OnMute(); is called when the mute button is clicked. Turns the mute on/off.
void OnHangup(); is called when the hang-up button is clicked. Hangs up the current call.
void OnHold(); is called when the hold button is clicked. Puts the current call on hold.

void OnPickup(); is called when the pickup button is clicked. Picks up the call on hold.
void OnPrivacy(); is called when the privacy button is clicked. Turns the privacy on or off.
void OnPlayMovie(); is called when the Play button is clicked. This will display a dialog box with a list of movies to choose from. Once a movie is selected, the movie will be played.
void OnRecordCallQ; is called when the record button is clicked.
1 o void OnJoinToConferenceQ; is called when the Join Conf button is clicked.
This will display the list of active conferences and sites OR playback sessions. The operator will select the site corresponding to the current call and the call will be joined to the conference.
void WatchVideo(BOOL selection);
~5 Return Value: returns a non-zero value if successful. zero otherwise selection parameter: specifies what to watch.
selection = VDOWATCH CONFERENCE displays the video from the site/MCU selected for watching __ selection = VDOWATCH SELF displays the output of the video operator's camera 2o selection = VDOWATCH CALL displays video from the call selected from the listbox provided in the video watch window OR the video from the incoming call, if any.
Call the void WatchVideo function to select the video stream to watch.
25 void OnDisplayCallsWindow(); is called when the 'Calls' button is clicked.
void OnSelfViewQ; is called when the 'SelfView' check box is checked or unchecked.
When the self view is checked, the video operator's camera output is displayed in a separate small window.
void OnLocalVolume(); is called when the local volume slide bar position is changed. This will adjust the local volume.

WO ~ -- PGT/US97I~1174 void OnRemoteVolume(); is called when the remote volume slide bar position is changed.
This will adjust the remote volume signal.
b) Media Control Class Description ( 1 ) VOMediaControl Class VOMediaControl Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes -(a) Attribz~tes Access Level Type Name Description protected struct m-portInfo This structure is used to MtsLinkPortInfo communicate with the MCP
(b) Constr~uctor(s) VOMediaControl();
(c) Methoc~c public void SetVolume(short rightVolume, short leftVolume);
rightVolume parameter: an integer between 0 - 1000.
ieftVolume parameter: an integer between 0 - 1000.
' public void SetVolume sets the volume control.
public short GetVolume(short channel);
' 20 Return Value: returns the volume for the specified channel channel parameter: set channel = PORT CHANNEL RIGHT for the right volume setting, and set channel = PORT CHANNEL LEFT for the left volume setting.
public short GetVolume returns the current volume for the specified channel public void SetSelfView(long flags);
flags parameter: sets the properties of the self view. The valid flag values are:
SELFVIEW ON Displays the self view;
SELFVIEW OFF Hides the self view; and SELFVIEW MIRRORED Mirrors the self view.
public void SetSelfView sets the self view properties.
public long GetSeIfView();
Return Value: returns the self view settings The public long GetSelfView function returns the self view settings which can be used to find out if the self view is visible or hidden, or if it is mirrored.
2o public void SetSelfViewSize(short size);
size parameter: one of the predefined sizes for the self view public void SetSelfViewSize sets the size of the self view window. The valid values are FULL CIF, HALF CIF and QUARTER CIF.
public short GetSelfViewSize();
Return Value: returns Current self view size.
The public short GetSelfViewSize function returns the current self view window size. The 3o values will be one of the predef ned sized. See SetSelfViewSize for the description of the sizes.
public void SetAutoGain(BOOL autoGain = TRUE);

autoGain parameter: should be TRUE to enable auto gain, FALSE to disable The public void SetAutoGain function enables or disables the auto gain depending on the autoGain value.
public BOOL GetAutoGainQ;
Return Value: returns The current auto gain setting.
The public BOOL GetAutoGain function returns the current auto gain setting.
TRUE if auto i o gain is on, FALSE otherwise.
public void SetEchoCancellation (boot bCancel);
bCancel parameter: if bCancel is TRUE cancellatian is enabled; if FALSE
cancellation is disabled.
public void SetEchoCancellation enables or disables echo cancellation.
public BOOL GetEchoCancellation U;
Return Value: returns the current echo cancellation state.
--_ public BOOL GetEchoCancellation gets the current state of the current echo cancellation.
public short GetVideoMode(short mode = MODE RX);
Return Value: returns the video mode mode parameter: indicates receive or transmit mode.
public short GetVideoMode gets the audio mode for receive or transmit, depending on the value of mode. mode = MODE RX for receive mode and MODE TX for transmit.
3o public short GetAudioMode(short mode = MODE RX);
Return Value: returns the audio mode mode parameter: indicates receive or transmit mode.

public short GetAudioMode gets the audio mode for receive or transmit, depending on the value of mode. mode = MODE RX for receive mode and MODE TX for transmit.
public void SetVideoWnd(HWND hWnd);
hWnd parameter: pointer to the window where the video is to be dispiayed.
The public void SetVideoWnd function displays the video in the window identified by hWnd.
public HWND GetVideoWndQ;
Return Value: returns the window handle in which the video is being displayed.
If no window is set, NULL is returned.
The public HWND GetVideoWnd function is called to retrieve the window handle in which the video is being displayed. , public void MakeVideoWndResizeabie(BOOL bResize = TRUE);
bResize parameter: if bResize is TRUE, the video window is resizeable; if FALSE, it is not resizeable.
2o The public void MakeVideoWndResizeable function makes the video window resizable with bResize = TRUE. To make the window fixed size, make bResize FALSE.
public BOOL IsVideoWndResizeableQ;
Return Value: returns TRUE if the video window is resizeable, FALSE otherwise.
Call the public BOOL IsVideoWndResizeable function to determine if the video window is resizeable.
F. Video Operator Shared Database 1. Database Schema Figure 107 shows a database schema for the video operator shared database (see Figure 98). In one embodiment, the database contains the following tables.
CONFERENCE

41104 lists details about a scheduled conference, PARTICIPANT 41105 lists the participants of conferences, and CONF PARTICIPANT 41108 contains the keys from the CONFERENCE 41104 and PARTICIPANT 41105 tables, which are used to determine the participants in any given conference. MCU 41102 contains the characteristics of different MCU's from various suppliers, and MCUPORT 41106 contains the MCU
identification number from the MCU 41102 table as well as the ports of the MCU used by the participants to connect to a conference. VOPERATOR lists video operator attributes; VOTYPES
lists all the types (e.g., protocols, bandwidths) used to define a conference or participant; and VOTYPEVALUES 41107 lists the values for each of the defined types.
to Each video operator record in the VDO OPERATOR 41101 table contains a unique identification number in its ID field, which number may appear in the table's operatorID field, assigning each video operator to particular conferences profiled in the CONFERENCE 41104 table. Each conference record in the CONFERENCE 41104 table, in turn, contains a unique identification number in its ID field, which number may appear in the CONF_PARTICIPANT 41108 table's conflD field. Similarly; each participant record in the PARTICIPANT 41105 table contains a unique identification number in its ID
field, which number may appear in the CONF_PARTICIPANT 41108 table's participantID
field. Finally, each MCU record in the MCU 41102 table contains a unique identification 2o number in its ID field, which number may appear in the MCUPORT 41106 table's mcuID
field, identifying the set of MCU ports associated with the MCU. Each MCU port record in the MCUPORT 41106 table, in turn, contains a unique identification number in its ID field) which number may appear in the CONF PARTICIPANT 41108 table's mcuPortID field.
Within the CONF PARTICIPANT 41108 table, the conflD, participantID, and mcuPortID
values are used as cross-referencing keys to define a particular conference with a given conference profile, a set of participants, and an MCU port.
In addition, each VOType record in the VOTYPE 41103 table contains a unique identification number in its ID field, which number rnay appear in the VOTYPEVALUES
41107 table's typeID field, identifying a set of values associated with the VOType.

G. Video Operator Console Graphical User Interface Windows 1. Main Console Window Figure 108 shows one embodiment of the Main Console window 41201 as it would appear on a Video Operator Terminal [1 Figure 96], showing possible placements of a Schedule window 41202, a Conference window 41203, a Video Watch window 41204 and a Console Output window 41205. The Main Console window 41201 enables the video operator to manage video conferences.

2. Schedule Window 1o Figure 109 shows one embodiment of the Schedule window 41202, which displays all the conferences 41305 and playback sessions 41306 to be handled by the current video operator for the next 8 hours. In one embodiment, the list is updated upon application startup, at 15 minute intervals, and every time a conference ends.
The Schedule window will have two scrolled text areas - one area for conferences 41301, and the other for sites 41302 participating in the selected conference. If a conference name is double-clicked, the appropriate Conference Window [41203 Figures 108, 110]
will appear.

3. Conference Window 2o Figure 110 shows one embodiment of the Conference window 41203, which is displayed when the operator selects a conference or playback session in the Schedule window 41202.
The display of the Conference Window 41203 is dependent on whether a Conference or a Playback Session has been selected from the Schedule Window 41202. Only one conference window is displayed at a time. When a new conference window is opened, the existing one is hidden. While a Conference Window is hidden, the status of the conference and connections are still monitored. Figure 110 shows a Conference Session 41401. The Conference window 41203 displays the list of conference Participants 41415 and radio buttons to selectively operate on individual connections, including call setup, viewing, playback and recording.
Information about the conference such as the duration, start time, end time, playback and recording status, and conference type are displayed at the bottom of the window. If the operator double clicks inside the Conference Window 41203 where there is no action wo oso pc~rrtJS9~m ma associated with the clicking location, the Properties Box [41701 Figure 113]
is displayed with the conference settings.
A conference is ended by pressing the End Conference button. This will disconnect all calls associated with the conference.
The Conference Window 41203 displays the connections in the conference and their connection status 41417, including any free MCU Port slots reserved for a not yet joined connection 41421. Each Connection listing contains a radio button 41422, the participant site ~o name 41423 and status lights 41418-41420. The status of the two calls and the join are monitored and displayed with the site name in the Conference window 41203. The status squares 41418-41420 are colored boxes, with different colors representing different call statuses (e.g., no call, call in progress, active call, or active call that has been disconnected).
The Conference Window 41203 provides buttons to click 41417 that define the sequence in which a participant site gets connected to an MCU Port site, routed through the video operator. Other features available from this part of the window are watching the video input from a call, recording video input from either call, and making a normal video call to the participant site or to the MCU.
The color of the arrows 41424 represents the status of each call. The color of the arrows is also duplicated in the status lights 41418-41420 in the list of connections.
If there is a Playback Connection 41425 associated with the Conference, only one Call is necessary to an MCU Port site. The normal Participant Site call setup interface will be inaccessible, and the Join control 41405 will become the Start and Stop switch for playback.
Free MCU ports can be reached only when an MCU Port call for a defined Connection is inactive (or disconnected). This allows the operator to join a conference as if the operator were a participant. This is done by selecting the Connection with the free MCU
port call.
When connected, the operator can inform the rest of the participants that the operator is attempting to contact or restore a connection.

There are some functional limitations that the Conference Window 41203 will reflect. The Conference Window 41203 should not allow access to functions that cannot be performed, for example:
~ The video operator can only view one call at a time.
~ The video operator can record any call at any time with software unidirectional decoder.
~ Playback connection selection changes the call setup buttons appropriately.
~ The video operator can participate in a conference only when a MCU port call is inactive.
~ The video operator can talk to participant site only when the participant is disconnected.
To clarify, a simple connection setup using the Conference Window proceeds as follows. By pressing the Call button near the participant site box 41402, the operator calls Adam (or, alternatively, Adam may call the operator), and then the operator places the call on Hold 41407. By pressing the Call button near the MCU Port site box 41403, the operator calls the t 5 MCU and then places the call on Hold 41408. By pressing the Join button 41405, the two calls are joined. In another embodiment, this can be an automated rather than a manual process. Adam and the MCU are now connected as H.320 video call. All three arrows 41424 will be green.
20 4. Video Watch Window Figure 111 shows one embodiment of the Video Watch window 41204, which displays the H.320 input from a selected call of a conference connection or a separate incoming or outgoing call. The Video Watch window 41204 also has controls for making normal calls 41512 and media control such as audio control 41509-41510.
The Video Watch window is the display for the unidirectional H.320 decode of the video output of a selected call. By default, the MCU call of the first active site will be displayed.
To watch any other call, the appropriate View button must be pressed in the Conference Windows. The video and audio controls for this window such as volume control 41510, picture size 41511, etc., are managed from the Video Control Panel.

When the operator chooses to make a normal H.320 video call (point to point), to a site or an available slot in an active conference, the Video Watch window 41204 is used for viewing the video. A small self view video window should appear nearby when the operator selects the Self View button 41506.
5. Console Output Window Figure 112 shows one embodiment of the Console Output window 41205 which displays all error messages and alerts 41601 " The window is scrollable so that the video operator can see all errors that have occurred in the current session.
These messages to are also logged to a text file for future reference.
6. Properties Dialog Box Figure 113 shows a Properties dialog box 41701. Dialog boxes are windows that are transitional and only displayed temporarily. They are usually used for entering data or 1 s displaying information that requires immediate attention. This will be a modeless dialog box displaying the properties of a particular conference or site. There will be only one such window open at any time. If the user focuses on another Conference Window or Connection Window, the same dialog box is updated with the appropriate properties. Figure 113 pictures the properties associated with a particular site, including the site coordinator 41702, the site - 2o phone number 41703, the time 41704, connection type 41705 and terminal type 41706. A
Close button 41707 closes the Properties dialog box 41701.
XVII. WORLD WIDE WEB (WWW) BROWSER CAPABILITIES
A. User Interface 25 The graphical user interface is designed such that only a single IP
connection from the workstation to the server is required. This single IP connection supports both the Internet connection between the W W W Browser and the W W W Site, and the messaging connection between the PC Client and the universal inbox (i.e., Message Center). The PC
Client interface is integrated with the W W W Browser interface such that both components can exist on the 3o same workstation and share a single IP connection without causing conflicts between the two applications.

WO 98/23080 ' PCTIUS97/21174 WWW Browser access is supported from any of the commercially available WWW
Browser interfaces:
~ Microsoft Internet Explorer;
~ Netscape Navigator (1.2, 2.X); or ~ Spyglass Mosaic.
In addition, the WWW Browser interface is optimized to support Windows 95;
however, Windows 3.1 and Windows 3.11 are supported as well.
to The WWW Browser interface detects the display characteristics of the user's workstation (or terminal) and adapts the presentation to support the display settings of the workstation. The presentation optimized around a 640x480 pixel display but is also capable of taking advantage of enhanced resolution and display qualities of 800x600 (and greater) monitors.
To improve performance, the user is able to select between 'minimal graphics' or 'full graphics' presentation. The WWW browser will detect whether a user has selected 'minimal graphics' or 'full graphics' and send only the appropriate graphics files.
B. Performance 2o Response time for downloading of information from the W W W Site or the Personal Home Page to the user's workstation or terminal meets the following benchmarks.
Workstation Configuration:
~ Processor: 486DX - 33 MHz;
~ Memory: 12 MB;
~ Monitor: VGA, Super VGA, or XGA;
~ Access: Dialup; _ ~ Windows 95;
~ Presentation Option: Full Graphics; and ~ Peripherals: Audio Card, Audio Player Software, 14.4 Kbps Modem.

ALUE

etrieve and Personal Home0 sec 0 sec Pages.

ime is measured from when the . - ser selects the Bookmark until the Status Bar reads, "Document:
Done".

etrieve W W W screens 5 sec (text 15 sec (text other than only) only) ome Pages. Time is measured from r r hen the user selects the hypertext 15 sec (scheduling30 sec (scheduling ink or tab until the Status Bar reads, Green) screen) 'Document: Done".

hart playing a voicemail message.. Time 10 sec 15 sec s measured from when the users selects he voicemail message in the Message enter until the streaming audio file >tarts playing on the user's workstation.
After a screen or page has been downloaded from the W W W Site to the workstation, the cursor is pre-positioned onto the first required field or field that can be updated.
C. Personal Home Page The system provides subscribers the ability to establish a Personal Home Page which provides a vehicle for people to communicate with or schedule meetings with the subscriber.
A person accessing a subscriber's Personal Home Page is referred to as the guest and the user ~o that 'owns' the Personal Home Page is referred to as the subscriber.
' Guest-access to Personal Home Pages will support the following features:
' ~ Create and send a text-based pager message through networkMCI Paging;
~ Create and send an email message to the email (MCI Mail or internetMCI) account; and ~ Access the subscriber's calendar to schedule a meeting.
Messages generated through the subscriber's Personal Home Page are directed to the subscriber's networkMCI or SkyTel Pager, or MCI email account.
Email messages composed by guests will:
~ Present the subscriber's name, not the subscriber's email address, in the email header;
~ Provide a field in the email header for the:
-Sender's name (required field), -Sender's email address (optional field), and to -Subject (optional field).
Guests 'request' appointments on a subscriber's Personal Home Page.
~ Requested appointments on a subscriber's Personal Home Page will be prefaced with "(R)".
~ Approved appointments will be prefaced with "(A)".
Subscribers are responsible for routinely checking their calendars and approving "(A)" or deleting requested appointments, and initiating the necessary follow-up communications to the requesting party. Approved appointments will be prefaced by "(A)".
Security Requirements Calendar access from the Personal Home Page is designed to support two-levels of security:
~ No PIN Access:
-Times Only, or -Times & Events;
~ PIN Access:
-Times Only; or -Times & Events.

wo rc~rrtrs9~nm4 1. Storage Requirements The system stores and maintains past and future appointments in the following manner:
~ Current month plus past six months of historical calendar appointments ~ Current month plus next twelve months of future calendar appointments.
A subscriber is provided the option to download the contents of the months appointments that are scheduled to be overwritten in the database. The calendar information that will be ' downloaded to the subscriber is in a comma delimited or DBF format and capable of being imported into Microsoft Schedule+, ACT or Ascend.
l0 2. On Screen Help Text On screen help text provides guest and subscriber icon access to field specific "Help"
instructions to operate within the Personal Home Page. The Help Text must provide information describing:
~ How to Send the subscriber a text-based pager message from the Personal Home Page ~ 5 through networkMCI Paging;
~ How to Send the subscriber an email message from the Personal Home Page to an MCI
email account;
~ How to Access and update a subscriber's Calendar;
~ How to Locate a user's Personal Home Page; and 20 ~ How to Order your own Personal Home Page through MCI.
3. Personal Home Page Directary The provides the guest the ability to access to a Personal Home Page directory through the existing MCI Home Page. This directory allows the guest to search all established Personal 25 Home Page accounts for a specific Personal Home Page address, by specifying Last Name (required); First Name (optional), Organization (optional), State (optional) and/or Zip Code ' (optional). Results from the Personal Home Page directory search return the following information: Last Name, First Name, Middle Initial, Organization, City, State and Zip Code.
Although City is not requested in search criteria it is provided in search results.
Another means for a guest to locate a Personal Home Page is through the W W W
Browser.
Many WWW Browsers have built in search capabilities for 'Net Directory.' Users' Personal Home Pages are listed within the directories of Internet addresses presented by the WWW
Browser. The benefit to conducting your search from the MCI Home Page is that only Personal Home Pages are indexed (and searched). Conducting the search through the W W W
Browser menu option will not limit the search to Personal Home Pages and therefore will conduct a search through a larger list of URLs. In addition, guests have the capability to enter the specific URL (i.e., Open Location) for the Personal Home Page rather than performing a search. This is especially important for those subscribers that have their Personal Home Page "unlisted" in the directory.

4. Control Bar A Control Bar is presented at the bottom of the Personal Home Page. The Control Bar is presented after the guest has selected Personal Home Pages from the MCI Home Page. The Control Bar provides the guest access to the following features:
~ Help Text ~ MCI Home Page ~ Personal Home Page Directory ~ Feedback.

5. Home Page The Home Page is the point of entry for the subscriber to perform message retrieval and exercise profile management from a WWW Browser. The Home Page is designed to provide the user easy access to the Message Center or Profile Management.

_ W~ PCT/I1S97/Z1174 -6. Security Requirements Access to the Message Center or Profile Management is limited to authorized users. Users are prompted to enter their User ID and Password t>efore accessing the Message Center or Profile Management. After three unsuccessful attempts, the user is blocked from accessing the Message Center or Profile Management and a WARNING message advises the subscriber to contact the MCI Customer Support Group. The account is deactivated until an MCI
Customer Support representative restores the account. After the account is restored, the subscriber is required to update his or her Password.
1 o A successful logon to the Message Center enables the user to access Profile Management without being challenged for another (i.e., the same) User ID and Password.
The same is also true for users that successfully access Profile Management - they are allowed to access the Message Center without being challenged for another (i.e., the same) User ID
and Password.
Passwords are valid for one month. Users are prompted to update their password if it has expired. Updates to passwords require the user to enter the expired password, and the new password twice.

7. On Screen Help Text Provide the subscriber icon access to field specific "Help" instructions to operate within the 2o Home Page. The Heip Text provides information describing:
~ How to Access Message Center;
~ How to Access Profile Management;
~ How to Access the MCI Home Page;
~ How to Access Personal Home Pages; -~ How to Send (i.e. Create or Forward) Messages through Message Center;
~ How to File Messages through Message Center;
~ How to Update the directlineMCI Profile;
~ How to Update the Information Services Profile;

~ How to Update their Personal Home Page;
~ How to Provide Feedback on the Home Page; and ~ How to Order the User's Guide.
Control Bar A Control Bar is presented at the bottom of the Home Page. The Control Bar provides the guest access to the following features:
~ Help Text;
~ MCI Home Page;
~ Personal Home Page Directory; and t o ~ Feedback.

8. Prof le Management In addition to the On-Screen Help Text and Control Bar discussed above, the Profile Management screen presents a Title Bar. The Title Bar provides the subscriber easy access to the Profile Management components and quick access to the Message Center.
Access to the ~ 5 Profile Management components is provided through the use of tabs which will include:
~ directlineMCI;
~ Information Services;
~ Personal Home Page;
~ List Management; and 20 ~ Message Handling.
The directlineMCI tab includes additional tabs for the underlying components of directlineMCI which are:
~ Voicemail;
~ FAXmail;
25 ~ Paging.
The directlineMCI Profile Management system provides subscribers a Profile Management page from which account profile information can be manipulated to:

PCT1U$97/21174 ~ Create new directlineMCI profiles and assign names to the profile;
~ Update existing directlineMCI profiles;
~ Support the rules-based logic of creating and updating directlineMCI
profiles (e.g., selection ' of only one call routing option, like voicemail, invokes override routing to voicemail; and updates made in one screen ripple through all affected screens, like paging notification);
~ Enable a directlineMCI number;
~ Enable and define override routing number;
~ Enable and define FollowMe routing; and ~ Define RNA parameters for each number in the directlineMCI FollowMe routing sequence ~ o ~Enable and define final routing (formerly called alternate routing) to:
-Voicemail and pager, -Voicemail only, -Pager only, and -Final message;
t 5 ~ Invoke menu routing if two or more of the call routing options (FollowMe, voicemail, faxmail or pager) are enabled;
~ Enable voicemail;
~ Enable faxmail;
~ Enable paging;
20 ~ Define the default number for faxmail delivery;
~ Activate paging notification for voicemail;
~ Activate paging notification for faxmail;
~ Define schedules to activate/deactivate different directlineMCI profiles;
~ Provide guest option to classify voicemails for urgent delivery;
25 ~ Configure the time zone for all message types that will be used to identify the time a message is received;
- ~ Define call screening parameters for:

-Name and ANI, -ANI only, and -Name only; and ~ Enable or disabling park and page.
s 9. Information Services Profile Management Information Services Profile Management provides subscribers the ability to select the information source, delivery mechanism (voicemail, pager, email) and the delivery frequency depending upon the information source and content. Specifically, the subscriber has the to ability configure any of the following information sources:
~ Stock Quotes and Financial News; and ~ Headline News.
Stock Quotes and Financial News provides the subscriber the following:
~ Business News Headlines;
15 ~ Stock Quotes (delay less than or equal to 10 minutes);
~ Stock Market Reports (hourly, AM/PM or CQB);
~ Currency and Bond Reports (hourly, AM/PM or COB);
~ Precious Metal Reports (hourly, AM/PM or COB); and ~ Commodities Reports (hourly, AM/PM or COB).
Business News Headlines are delivered via email once per day. Reports (Stock Market, Currency and Bond, Precious Metal and Commodities) are delivered at the interval specified by the subscriber. Hourly reports require that email message is time stamped at 10 minutes after the hour. AM/PM reports require that one email message is transmitted in the morning (11:10 am ET) and one email message is transmitted in the evening (5:10 PM
ET), with COB
reports transmitted at 5:10 PM ET.

WO Pt'j'T/US97/21174 The content of the Stock Market Report contains:
~ Stock or mutual fund ticker symbol;
~ Stock or mutual fund opening price;
~ Stock or mutual fund closing price;
~ Last recorded bid price for the stock or mutual fund;
~ Last recorded ask price for the stock or mutual fund;
~ Stock or mutual fund's 52-week high; and ~ Stock or mutual fund 52-week low.
to Stock Quotes and Financial News also provide the subscriber the ability to select from a list of available stocks and.mutual funds and define criteria whereby a voicemail or text-based page is provided. The definable criteria are referred to as 'trigger points' and can be any or all of the following conditions:
~ Stock or mutual fund reaches a 52-week high value;
t s ~ Stock or mutual fund reaches a 52-week low value;
~ Stock or mutual fund reaches a user-defined high point; and ~ Stock or mutual fund reaches a user-defined low-point.
After a 'trigger point' condition has been satisfied, a message (voicemail or text-based pager) 2o is transmitted within 1 minute to the subscriber. Voicemail messages are directed to the subscriber's mailbox defined in the user's directlineMCI account. The information content for Stock Quotes and Financial News is no older-than 10-minutes old.

10. Personal Home Page Profile Management ' 25 Personal Home Page Profile Management provides subscribers the ability to customize their . Personal Home Page and define how guests can communicate with them (email or text-based pager). In addition, Profile Management also enables subscribers to control guest access to their calendar. Specifically, the subscriber is able to:
~ Establish and maintain a greeting message;
~ Establish and maintain a contact information (i.e., address information};
~ Establish and maintain a personal calendar;
~ Enable or disable guest access to paging, email or calendar;
~ Control guest access to calendar by defining PINs for standard or privileged access; and ~ Incorporate an approved subscriber submitted graphic, such as a personal photo or corporate logo, on a predefined location on the Personal Home Page.
Upon creation of the Personal Home Page, the contact information is populated with the subscriber's delivery address information. The subscriber has the capability to update that address information contained within the contact information.
1 I . List Management 15 List Management provides the subscriber the ability to create and update lists. Profile Management provides subscribers the ability to define lists accessible through the Message Center for message distribution. In one embodiment, list management is centralized such that Fax Broadcast list management capabilities are integrated with directlineMCI
list management capabilities to provide a single database of lists. In an alternate embodiment, 2o the two list management systems are separate, so the user may access either database for lists.
Lists are maintained through an interface similar to an address book on the PC
Client whereby subscriber are able to add or remove names to lists. Associated with each person's name are the email address, faxmail address (i.e., ANI), voicemail address (i.e., ANI}, and 25 pager number. As messages populate the Message Center inbox (i.e., universal inbox), the address book is updated with the source address of the associated message type.

wo 9sr~so rcr~rs9~nma When a subscriber chooses to create a distribution list, she is prompted to select a name, type and identifier name for the list. All created lists are available in alphabetical order by name.
The type of the list (voice, fax, email, page) accompanies the list name. In addition, list identif ers may consist of alphabetic characters.
~ 5 The subscriber is then prompted for recipient names and addresses to create a distribution list.
The subscriber is able to access his address book for recipient information.
The subscriber is not be restricted to record the same address types in his list; if a list is created with a fax type, the subscriber is able to include ANI, email and paging addresses in the list.
The subscriber is able to manage his distribution lists with create, review, delete, edit (add and delete recipients) and rename capabilities.
When the user chooses to modify a list through the WWW Browser interface, she is prompted to select the address type (voice, fax, fax, paging, email) and a list of the user's 15 distribution lists should be provided for that address type. The user is also able to enter the List Name to locate it. Users are able to modify lists through create, review, edit (add and remove recipients), delete and rename commands.
Whenever a subscriber modifies a list with a recipient addition, removal or address change, 2o she is able to make the modification a global change. For example, a user changes the voice mailbox address for Mr. Brown in one list. she is able to make this a global change, changing that address for Mr. Brown in all of his distribution lists. While the subscriber is able to create and modify distribution lists through the ARL1 and VRU in addition to the PC, enhanced list maintenance capabilities are supported through the WWW Browser interface.
' The subscriber is able to search and sort lists by name or by the different address fields. For example, a user is able to search for all lists containing 'DOLE' by using the *DOLE*
command within the search function. In addition, users are able to search lists using any of the address fields. For example, a user could search based on a recipient number, 'to' name or zip code. A user is able to sort lists by list names, identifiers and types or by any address field.

WO 98/23080 PCTlUS97/21174 In addition to search capabilities, the distribution list software enables the user to copy and create sub-lists from existing distribution list records. The user is able to import and export recipient data from external database structures.
The capability to share lists among users and upload lists to a host also exists.
12. Global Message Handling Global Message Handling provides subscribers the ability to define the message types that 1 o will appear in the "universal inbox" or accessed through the Message Center. The following message types are selectable:
~ directlineMCI voicemail;
~ directlineMCI faxmail;
~ networkMCI and SkyTel Paging; and IS ~ Email from an MCI email account (i.e., MCI Mail or internetMCI).
If a subscriber is not enrolled in a specific service then that option will be grayed-out and therefore not selectable within Global Message Handling. Any updates to Global Message Handling result in a real-time update to the Message Center. An example is that a subscriber 2o may choose to allow voicemail messages to appear in the Message Center. The Message Center automatically retrieves all voicemail message objects that exist within the voicemail database.
D. Message Center The Message Center functions as the "universal inbox" for retrieving and manipulating 25 message objects. The "universal inbox" consists of folders containing messages addressed to the user. Access to the Message Center is supported from all W W W Browsers, but content contained in the "universal inbox" only presents the following message types:
~ Voicemail: addressed to user's directlineMCI account;

~ EmaiI: addressed to the user's MCI email (i.e., MCI Mail or internetMCI) account;
~ FAXmail: addressed to the user's directlineMCI account; and ~ Paging: addressed to the user's networkMCI Paging account (or SkyTel Paging account).
s In addition to the On-Screen Help Text and Control :Bar discussed in the previous sections, the Message Center screen presents a Title Bar. The Title Bar provides the subscriber easy access to the Message Center functions and quick access to Profile Management.
The Message Center functions that are supported through. the Title Bar are:
~ File: lists user's defined folders and allows user to select folder;
to ~ Create: compose a new email message;
~ Forward: voicemails will be forwarded as email attachments;
~ Search: provide ability to search based on message type, sender's name or address, subject or date/time; and ~ Save: allows users to save messages to a folder on the universal inbox, to a file on the ~ 5 workstation or to a diskette.
When composing or forwarding messages through the Message Center, the user has the ability to send a message as either an email or a faxrr~ail. The only limitation is that voicemails may only be forwarded as voicemails or as email attachments. All other message 2o types may be interchanged such that emails may be forwarded to a fax machine, or pager messages may be forwarded as an email text message. Messages that are sent out as faxmail messages are generated in a G3 format, and support distribution to Fax Broadcast lists.
The presentation layout of the Message Center is consistent with the presentation layout of 25 the PC Client such that they have the same look and feel. The Message Center is designed to present a Message Header Frame and a Message Preview Frame, similar to the presentation that is supported by nMB v3.x. The user will have the ability to dynamically re-size the height of the Message Header Frame- and the Message Preview Frame. The Message Header Frame will display the following envelope information:

wo 9sn~oso rc~r~rs9~nma ~ Message type (email, voice, fax, page);
~ Sender's name, ANI or email address; -~ Subject;
~ Date/time; and ~ Message size.
The Message Preview Frame displays the initial lines of the body of the email message, the initial lines of the first page of the faxmail message, the pager message, or instructions on how to play the voicemail message. Playing of voicemail messages through an WWW
1 o Browser is supported as a streaming audio capability such that the subscriber is not required to download the audio file to their workstation before playing it. The streaming audio is initiated after the user has selected (single ieft-mouse click) on the voicemail header in the Message Header Frame. Displaying of faxmail messages is initiated immediately after the user has selected (single left-mouse click) on the faxmail header in the Message Header Frame.
The Message Center also allows the subscriber to use distribution lists that have been created in Profile Management. The distribution lists support sending messages across different message types.
2o In addition to the basic message retrieval and message distribution, the Message Center supports the creation and maintenance of message folders (or directories) within the universal inbox. Initially users are limited to the following folders:
~ Draft: retains all saved messages that have NOT been sent;
~ Inbox: retains all messages received by the "universal inbox" and it will be the default folder presented when the user accesses Message Center;
~ Sent: retains all messages that have been sent; and ~ Trash: retains for 7 days all messages marked for delete. Subscribers will eventually be able to create (and rename) folders (and folders within folders).

WO 98/Z30>30 PCT/US97/Z1174 1. Storage Requirements Initially, users are allotted a limited amount of storage space for directlineMCI voicemail and directlineMCI faxmail. Pager recall messages and email messages are not limited based upon _ amount of storage space consumed, but rather the date/time stamp of the message received.
Ultimately, storage requirements will be enforced based upon a common measurement unit, like days. This will provide users an easier approach to knowing when messages will be deleted from the database, and when guests will be prevented from depositing a message (voicemail, faxmail) to their "universal inbox". To support this, the following are storage requirements for messages retained in the inbox:
i o ~ directlineMCI voicemail: 60 minutes;
~ directlirieMCI faxmail: 50 pages;
~ networkMCI pages: 99 hours; and ~ Email: 6 months.
The subscriber is provided the option to download the messages that are scheduled to be overwritten in the database except for messages that: are retained in the trash folder.
E. PC Client Capabilities 1. User Interface The PC Client interface supports subscribers that want to operate in a store &
forward environment. These users want to download messages to either manipulate or store locally.
The PC Client is not designed to support Profile Management and the PC Client interface .. only presents messages (voicemail, faxmail, email, text-page). Access to Profile Management capabilities only is available through the ARU interface or the WWW Browser interface. The PC Client interface is integrated with the WWW Browser interface such that both components can exist on the same workstation and share a single IP connection.

The PC Client interface is optimized to support Windows 95; however, Windows 3.1 is supported as well.
The graphical user interface is designed to present a Message Header Window and a Message Preview Window, similar to the presentation that is supported by nMB v3.x and is supported by the WWW Browser. The user has the ability to dynamically re-size the height of the Message Header Window and the Message Preview Window. The Message Header Window displays the following envelope information:
~ Message type (email, voice, fax, page);
~ Sender's name, ANI or email address;
~ Subject;
~ Date/time; and ~ Message size.
The Message Preview Window displays the initial lines of the body of email messages or pager messages, or instructions on how to display the faxmail message or play the voicemail message. Playing of voicemail messages from the PC Client requires an audio card be present on the PC. Displaying of faxmail messages invokes the faxmail reader within the PC Client.
The Message Center also allows the user to use distribution lists that have been created in 2o Profile Management. The distribution lists support sending messages across different message types.
2. Security User authentication between the PC Client and the server is negotiated during the dial-up logon session. Security is supported such that the User ID and Password information is imbedded in the information that is passed between the PC Client and server when establishing the interface. Subscribers are not required to manually enter their User ID and Password. In addition, updates made to the password are communicated to the PC
Client.

WO 98/23080 PCT1U897/211'74 -3. Message Retrieval Message Retrieval provides subscribers the ability to selectively retrieve voicemail, faxmail, pages and email messages that reside in the "universal inbox". Message types that are displayed or played from the PC Client include:
~ directlineMCI voicemail;
~ directlineMCI faxmail;
~ networkMCI paging; and ~ Email from an MCI email account;
~ o The PC Client initiates a single communication session to retrieve all message types from the "universal inbox". This single communication session is able to access the upstream databases containing voicemails, faxmails, emails and pages.
The PC Client also is able to perform selective message retrieval such that the user may is able to:
~ Retrieve all messages;
~ Retrieve full text (or body) for selected message header(s);
~ Retrieve messages based upon editable search criteria:
-priority messages;
-email messages;
-pager messages;
-faxmail messages (complete or header only);
' -voicemail messages (complete or header only);
-sender name, address or ANI;
-date/time stamp on message; and -message size.

wo 9sr~3oso - rc~rrtrs9~nma Header-only faxmail messages retrieved from the "universal inbox" are retained in the "universal inbox" until the message body is retrieved. Voicemail messages are retained in the "universal inbox" until the subscriber accesses the "universal inbox" via the WWW Browser (i.e., Message Center) or ARU and deletes the message. Messages retrieved from the "universal inbox" are moved to the desktop folder.
In addition, the PC Client is able to support background and scheduled polling such that users are able to perform message manipulation (create, edit, delete, forward, save, etc.) while the to PC Client is retrieving messages.
4. Message, Manipulation Message Manipulation provides subscribers the ability to perform many standard messaging client actions, like:
~ Compose (or create) email, faxmail or pager messages;
~ Forward all message types;
~ Save;
~ Edit;
~ Delete;
~ Distribute;
~ Attach;
~ Search; and ~ Display or play messages.
F. Order Entry Requirements directlineMCI or networkMCI Business customers are provided additional interface options to perform profile management and message management functions. Both directlineMCI and networkMCI Business customers are automatically provided accounts to access the features and functions available through the different interface types. The ability to provide accounts to networkMCI Business customers is also supported; however not all networkMCI
Business customers are provided accounts. Order entry is flexible enough to generate accounts for networkMCI Business customers, as needed.
Order entry is designed such that directlineMCI customers or networkMCI
Business customers are automatically provided access to the additional interface types and services provided in the system. For example, a customer that orders directlineMCI (or networkMCI
Business) is provided an account to access the Home Page for Profile Management or yo Message Center. Checks are in place to prevent a customer from being configured with two accounts - one from directlineMCI and one from networkMCI Business. In order to accomplish this, integration between the two order entry procedures is established.
An integrated approach to order entry requires a single interface. The interface integrates order entry capabilities such that the order entry appears to be housed in one order entry system and does not require the order entry administrator to establish independent logon sessions to multiple order entry systems. This integrated order entry interface supports a consistent order entry methodology for all of the services and is capable of pulling --information from the necessary order entry systems. In addition, the interface supports the 2o capability to see the services associated with the user's existing application.
The specific requirements of the integrated order interface system are:
~ Automated feeds to define an MCI email (MCI Mail or internetMCI) account;
~ Automated feeds to define a networkMCI paging account(or SkyTel Paging) account;
~ Automated feeds to define a directlineMCraccount;
~ Automated feeds to enable Fax Broadcast capabilities;
. ~ Ability to manually enter MCI email account, networkMCI paging account or directlineMCI account information;
~ Ability to enable or disable access to inbound information services; and WU 98/23080 - PCT/US97/2l174 ~ Ability to enable or disable access to outbound information services.
These abilities give order entry administrators the flexibility to add a user based upon preexisting MCI service (email, paging) directlineMCI) account information.
Alternatively, the order administrator may add a user while specifying the underlying services.
The order entry systems provide the necessary customer account and service information to the downstream billing systems. They also track the initial customer order and all subsequent updates so that MCI can avoid sending duplicate platform software (i.e., PC
Client) and t0 documentation (i.e., User Guide). In addition, order entry processes enable an administrator to obtain the following information:
~ Record customer delivery and name:
-support USA and Canadian addresses, and -provide ability to prevent delivery to P.O. boxes;
~ Record customer's billing address, phone number and contact name;
~ Record the order date and all subsequent updates;
~ Record the name, phone number and division of the Account Representative that submitted the order;
~ Record or obtain the user's directlineMCI number;
~ Record or obtain the user's networkMCI paging PIN;
~ Record or obtain the user's MCI email account ID;
~ Generate a daily Fulfillment Report that is electronically sent to fulfillment house; and ~ Generate a daily Report that tracks:
-number of orders received;
-number of orders to create networkMCI Paging (or SkyTel Paging) account;
-number of orders to create MCI email account, and -number of orders to create a directlineMCI account.

Personal home pages can be ordered for a customer. The customer delivery information recorded during order entry is the default address information that is presented from the user's Personal Home Page. In addition, the order entry processes support the installation of and charging for special graphics.
' The capability to turn existing feature/functionality 'on' and 'off for a specific service exists.
Features that can be managed by the user are identified within the order entry systems. These features are then activated for management within the user's directory account.
There are real-time access capabilities between order entry systems and the user's directory account. This account houses all of the user's services, product feature/functionality, and account information, whether user-managed or not. Those items that are not identified as user-managed are not accessible through the user's interface.
1. Provisioning and Fulfillment Access requirements have been defined in terms of inbound access to the system and outbound access from the system. Inbound access includes the methods through which a user or a caller may access the system. Outbound access includes the methods through which 2o users are handled by the system in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
Internet support exists for both inbound and outbound processing.
The following components may provide inbound access:
~ directlineMCI: 800/BXX;
~ MCIMaiI: 800/BXX, email addresses;
~ networkMCI ~agmg: 800/8XX; and ~ internetMCI mail: 800/8XX, POP3 email address.
' The following components have been identified for outbound access:
~ directlineMCI:Diall;
~ Fax Broadcast: 800/8XX, local;

~ MCI Mail: 800/BXX, email address; and ~ internetMCI mail: 800/BXX, POP3 email address.
G. Traffic Systems Traffic is supported according to current MCI procedures.
H. Pricing Initially, the features are priced according to the existing pricing structure defined for the underlying components. In addition, taxing and discounting capabilities are supported for the to underlying components as they are currently being supported. Discounting is also supported for customers that subscribe to multiple services.
I. Billing The billing system:
~ Supports charges for directlineMCI enhanced services (voicemail, faxmail, both);
~ Supports charges for peak and off peak rates;
~ Supports discounts for multiple services (directlineMCI, networkMCI
Business, networkMCI Paging, networkMCI Cellular) which will vary based upon number of services;
~ Supports ability to suppress networkMCI Cellular charges for directlineMCI
calls (originating and terminating);
~ Supports charges for monthly fees sensitive to directlineMCI usage;
~ Supports promotions in the form of free minutes based on directlineMCI
usage;
~ Supports charges for Personal Home Pages;
~ Supports ability to suppress charges for Personal Home Pages; and ~ . Supports SCA Pricing.
In one embodiment, the billing system supports the current invoicing procedures that exist for _ each of the underlying components. In an alternative embodiment, the billing provides a 3o consolidated invoice that includes all of the underlying components. In addition to invoicing, _ CA 02279845 1999-OS-17 _ WO ~PGT/US97/Z1174 directed billing is supported for all of the underlying components that are currently supporting directed billing.
XVIII. DIRECTLINE MCI
The following is a description of the architecture of the directline MCI
system, as modified for use with the system. This document covers the general data and call flows in the directlineMCI platform, and documents the network and hardware architecture necessary to support those flows. Billing flows in the downstream systems are covered at a very high level. Order Entry (OE) flows in the upstream systems are covered at a very high Level.
Certain portions of the directlineMCI architecture reuse existing components (e.g. the Audio Response Unit (ARU)). Those portions of the directlineMCI architecture which are new are covered in more detail.
A. Overview In addition to billing, order entry, and alarming, the directlineMCI system is made up of three major components, as shown in Figure 43:
~ ARU (Audio Response Unit) 502 ~ VFP (Voice Fax Platform) 504 ~ DDS (Data Distribution Service) 506 2o The subsections below describe each of the major components at a high level.
Figure 43 shows the high-level relationships between the major system components.
1. The ARU (Audio Response Unit) 502 The ARU 502 handles all initial inbound calls for directlineMCI. Some features (such as find me/foliow me) are implemented entirely on the ARU. Inbound faxes are tone-detected by the ARU and extended to the VFP 504. Menuing provided by the ARU can be used to request access to the voicemail/faxmail features, in which case the call is also extended to the VFP.
2. The VFP (Voice Fax Platform] 504 The VFP provides the menuing for the voicemail/faxmail features as well as outbound fax and voice forwarding and pager notifications. The VFP is also the central data store for the customized subscriber prompts which are played and recorded by the ARU 502.

PCT/US97/211?4 3. The DDS (Data Distribution Service) 506 The DDS is a central data repository for OE profiles and Billing Details Records (BDRs). , OE profiles are deposited with DDS, which is responsible for distributing the profiles to all of the appropriate systems. DDS 506 collects BDRs and ships them to the downstream billing systems.
B. Rationale The requirement for the directlineMCI service is to integrate a variety of service components into a single service accessed by a single 800 number. A number of these service to components had been previously developed on the ISN ARU platform. The services not present in the ARU were mailbox services and fax services. The ARU 502 of the system 500 incorporates a voicemail/faxmail platform purchased from Texas Instruments (TI). Portions of that software are ported to run on DEC Alpha machines for performance, reliability, and scalability. Another requirement for the directlineMCI implementation is integration with the t 5 mainstream (existing MCI) billing and order entry systems. The DDS
provides the inbound and outbound interfaces between directlineMCI and the mainstream order entry systems.
C. Detail Figure 43 shows the relationships between the major system components. The OE
system 20 508 generates subscriber profiles which are downloaded via DDS 506 to the ARU 502 and the Voice Fax Platform (VFP) 504. BDRs generated by the ARU 502 and VFP 504 are fed to the billing systems 510 via DDS 506. The ARU 502 handles all inbound calls. If faxtone is detected, or if a voicemail/faxmail feature is requested, the call is extended from the ARU
502 to the VFP 504. For mailbox status (e.g. " You have three messages"), the 25 queries the VFP 504 for status and plays the prompt.
Subscribers' customized prompts are stored on the VFP 504. When the ARU plays the customized prompt, or records a new prompt, the prompt is accessed on the VFP
504.
Alarms from the ARU 502 and VFP 504 are sent to the Local Support Element (LSE).

wo 9sn~so rc~rrtrs9~nma 1. Call Flow Architecture 520 The call flow architecture for directlineMCI is shown in Figure 44. The top part of the figure shows the network 522 connectivity used to transport the calls. The bottom part of the figure ( shows the call direction for different call types. The subsections below provide the text description to accompany the figure.
~ 2. Network Connectivity All inbound ISN calls are received at an Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) 524 connected to the MCI network 522. The Access Control Point (ACP) receives notice of an inbound call 1o from the Integrated Services Network Application Processor (ISNAP) 526, which is the control/data interface to the ACD 524. The Network Audio System (NAS) plays and records voice under the control of the ACP via a T1 interface to the ACD. In the United States, a digital multiplexing system is employed in which a :first level of multiplexed transmission, known as T1, combines 24 digitized voice channels over a four-wire cable (one-pair of wires ~ 5 for "send" signals and one pair of wires for "receive" signals). The conventional bit format on the Tl carrier is known as DS 1 (i.e., first level multiplexed digital service or digital signal format), which consists of consecutive frames, each frame having 24 PCM voice channels (or DSO channels) of eight bits each. Each frame has an additional framing bit for control purposes, for a total of 193 bits per frame. The T1 transmission rate is 8000 frames per 2o second or 1.544 megabits per second (Mbps). The frames are assembled for T1 transmission using a technique known as time division multiplexing (TDM), in which each DSO
channel is assigned one of 24 sequential time slots within a frame, each time slot containing an 8-bit word.
25 Transmission through the network of local, regional and long distance service providers involves sophisticated call processing through various switches and hierarchy of multiplexed carriers. At the pinnacle of conventional high-speed transmission is the synchronous optical network (SONET), which utilizes fiber-optic media and is capable of transmission rates in the gigabit range (in excess of one-billion bits per second). After passing through the network, 3o the higher level multiplexed carriers are demultiplexed ("demuxed") back down to individual DSO lines, decoded and coupled to individual subscriber telephones.

WO ~PGT/US97/21174 Typicaily, multiple signals are multipexed over a single line. For example, DS3 transmission is typically carried by a coaxial cable and combines twenty-eight DS 1 signals at 44.736 _ Mbps. An OC3 optical fiber carrier, which is at a low level in the optical hierarchy, combines three DS3 signals at 155.52 Mbps, providing a capacity for 2016 individual voice channels in a single fiber-optic cable. SONET transmissions carried by optical fiber are capable of even higher transmission rates.
The NAS/ACP combination is referred to as the ARU 502. If the ARU 502 determines that a call must be extended to the VFP 504, it dials out to the VFP 504. The VFP
media servers ~ o are connected to the MCI network 522 via T1. Data transfer from the ARU
502 to the VFP
504 is accomplished via is Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) on each call. -3. Call Flow The call scenarios shown in Figure 44 are detailed below. At the start of any of the inbound calls, the ARU 502 has already received the call and performed an application select to determine whether the call is a directlineMCI call or not.
a) Inbound FAX:
An inbound FAX call is delivered to the ARU 502. The ARU performs a faxtone detect and 2o extends the call to the VFP 504. Account number and mode are delivered to the VFP
utilizing DTMF signaling.
b) Inbound Voice, ARU only:
An inbound voice call is made in either subscriber or guest mode, and only those features which use the ARU 502 are accessed. The ARU determines mode (subscriber or guest). In subscriber mode, the ARU queries the VFP 504 to determine the number of messages. No additional network accesses are made.

WO ~ PCT/US97I21174 c) Inbound/Outbound Voice, ARU only:
A call is made to the ARU 502, and either pager notification or find me/follow me features are accessed. The ARU 502 dials out via the ACD 524 to the outside number.
d) Inbound Voice, VFP features:
A call is made to the ARU 502, and the call is extended to the VFP 504.
Account number and mode (subscriber or guest} are sent to the VFP via DTMF. The guest modes are:
1. Deposit voicemail.
2. Deposit fax mail.
3. Collect fax mail.
The subscriber modes are:
1. Retrieve or send mail.
2. Maintain broadcast lists.
3. Modify mailbox name recording.
The VFP 504 continues prompting the userduring the VFP session.
e) Outbound Fax/Voice/Pager, VFP only:
For FAX ar voice delivery or pager notification, the VFP dials out on the MCI
network 522 directly.
fj Reoriginate/Takeback:
While an inbound subscriber call is connected to the VFP 504, the user may return to the top level of the ARU 502 directlineMCI menus by pressing the pound key for two seconds.
The network 522 takes the call back from the VFP 504 and reorginates the call to the ARU
' 25 502.
4. Data Flow Architecture Figure 45 depicts the primary data flows in the directlineMCI architecture 520:

WO 98/Z30&1 PCT/US97/21174 OE records (customer profiles) are entered in an upstream system and are downloaded at 530 to the DDS mainframe 532. The DDS mainframe downloads the OE records to the Network Information Distributed Services (KIDS) servers 534 on the ARU/ACP and the VFP/Executive Server 536. These downloads are done via the ISN token ring network 538.
On the executive server 536, the OE records are stored in the local Executive Server database (not shown).
BDRs are cut by both the Executive Server 536 and the ACP 540. These BDRs are stored in an Operator Network Center (ONC) server 542 and are uploaded to the DDS
mainframe 532.
t0 The uploads from the ONC servers 542 to the DDS mainframe are done via the ISN token ring network 538.
The ARU 502 prompts subscribers with their number of voicemail/faxmail messages. The number of messages a subscriber has is obtained from the VFP 504 by the ACP
540 over the t5 ISNAP Ethernet 544. Note that the ACPs 540 may be at any of the ISN sites.
The user-recorded ad hoc prompts played by the NAS 546 are stored on the VFP
504 and are played over the network on demand by the NAS 546. The NFS protocol 548 is used over the ISNAP Local Area Network (LAN) 544 and Wide Area network (WAN) 550.
D. Voice Fax Platform (YFP) 504 Detailed Architecture 1. Overview Figure 46 shows the hardware components of the Voice Fax Portion 504 of the directlineMCI
system for the first embodiment. The main components in this system are:
The TI MultiServe 4000 media server 560.
The DEC 8200 executive servers 536.
The Cabletron MMAC+ hubs 562.
The AiphaStation 200 console manager and terminal servers 564.
The Bay Networks 5000 hubs 566.

WO ~~ w PCT/US97/21174 In another embodiment, the Cabletron hubs will be removed from the configuration, and the Bay Networks hubs will then carry all the network traffic.
2. Rationale The TI MultiServe 4000 560 was selected by MCI for the voicemail/faxmail portion of the directlineMCI platform. The MultiServe 4000 is a fairly slow 68040 machine on a fairly slow Nubus backplane. The 68040/Nubus machine:c are used by TI as both media servers (T 1 interface, DSPs for voice and fax) and also for the executive server (database and object storage). Although this hardware is adequate for media server use, it was inadequate as an o executive server to serve hundreds or even thousands of gigabytes of voice and fax data and thousands of media server ports. Additionally, there is no clustering (for either performance or redundancy) available for the media server hardware. Thus, the executive server portion of the TI implementation was ported by MCI to run on a DEC Alpha 8200 cluster 536, described below. This clustering provides both failover and loadsharing (thus scalability).
l5 Likewise, the gigabytes that must be moved from the high speed 8200 platforms must be moved across a network to the TI media servers. Cabletron Hubs 562 with both Fiber Distribution Data Interface (FDDI) and switched IObT connectivity provide the backbone for the implementation. Each media server 560 is attached to a redundant pair of switched Ethernet ports. Because each port is a switched port, each media server gets a dedicated 20 l OMb of bandwidth to the hub. The 8200 servers 536 each need a large network pipe to serve the many smaller l OMb Ethernet pipes. For the first embodiment, the FDDI interfaces 568 will be used. However, traffic projections show that the necessary traffic will exceed FDDI capacity by several times, so an embodiment in accordance with a preferred embodiment will use higher speed networking technology such as ATM. The hub 25 configuration is fully redundant.
The AlphaStation 200 workstation 564 is needed for operations support. The AIphaStation 200 provides console management via DEC's Polycenter Console Manager for each of the directlineMCI VFP 504 components. It also runs the DEC Polycenter Performance Analyzer 3o software. The performance analyzer software collects and analyzes data from the 8200s for tuning purposes.

3. Detail Figure 47 shows the production installation of the VFP 504 at the production site.
Notes about Figure 47 and its relationship to Figure 46:
The DEC Alpha 8200s 536 are in a failover configuration. The center rack is a shared disk array.
The TI MultiServe 4000 560 is actually compound of four separate media servers in a single cabinet. The diagrams after this one show each "quadrant" (one of the four media servers in a MultiServe 4000) as a separate entity. Four each of the 16 FGD T 1 s are connected to each ~ o quadrant.
The AlphaStation 200 workstation 564 and the terminal servers are used to provide console and system management. The Cabietron hubs 562 provide the network between the media servers 5b0 and the executive servers 536.
is The Bay Networks hubs 566 provide the network between the VFP 504 and the network routers 569.
a) Internal Hardware Network 2o Figure 48 shows the VFP internal hardware/network architecture:
General notes about Figures 47-49:
The left DEC 8200 machine 536 is shown with all of its ATM and FDDI
connections 570 drawn in. The right DEC 8200 is shown with its Ethernet connections 572 drawn in. In actual deployment, both machines have all of the ATM, FDDI, token ring, and Ethernet 25 connections 570 and 572 shown.
The Cabletron hubs 562 show fewer connections into ports than actually occur because each 8200 536 is drawn with only half its network connectivity. Also, only one of the four media servers 560 is shown connected to the Ethernet ports. In fact, there is a transceiver and two Ethernet connects for each media server.
The Bay Hubs 566 are not shown in Figure 48. They are shown in Figure 49, directlineMCI
VFP External LAN Network Connectivity.

wo os0 rc~r~rsr~m ma -Starting from the top of Figure 48 of the DEC 8200s 536:
The top unit contains three 4GB drives 574 for operating system, swap, etc.
The system CD
drive 576 is also located here. This unit is controlled by the Single-Ended Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) ("SES" on the diagram) interface 578 from the main system 579.
The tape stacker 580 is a 140GB tape unit with a single drive and a 10 tape stack. This unit is controlled from a Fast-Wide SCSI ("FWS" on the diagram) interface 582 from the main system 579.
The main system unit 579 utilizes three of five available slots. Slot 1 has the main CPU card 584. This card has one 300MHz CPU and can be upgraded to two CPUs. Slot 2 has a 512MB memory card 586. This card can be upgraded to 2GB, or another memory card can be added. System maximum memory is 4GB.
Slots 3 and 4 are empty, but may be used for additional CPU, memory, or I/O
boards. Slot 5 has the main I/O card 588. This card has eight I/O interfaces:
One Fast-Wide SCSI interface 582 controls the tape stacker.
Two Fast-Wide SCSI interfaces 590-592 are unused.
2o The Single-Ended SCSI interface 578 controls the local system drives.
The FDDI interface 594 connects to one of the hubs.
The PCI slot 596 connects to a PCI expansion chassis 598.
One port is a l ObaseT Ethernet card 600 that is connected to the corresponding card in the other 8200 536 via a private thinnet Ethernet. This network is required for one of the system failover heartbeats.
An embodiment utilizes nine of the ten available slats in the PCI/EISA
expansion chassis 598. Slots 1 and 2 have disk adapters 602. Each disk adapter 602 is connected to a RAID
disk controller 604 that has another disk controller 604 (on the other machine) chained, which 3o in turn is connected to a disk controller 604 on that machine. Thus, each of the 8200 machines 536 has two disk controllers 604 attached off of each disk adapter 602. This is the primary clustering mechanism, since either machine can control all of the disks located in Figure 48 beneath the PCI chassis 598. Slot 3 has a Prestoserve board 606.
This is a Network File Server (NFS) accelerator.
Slot 4 has an FDDI board 608. This FDDI connection is made to the hub other than the FDDI connection made from main slot 5 above.
Slots 5 and 6 have ATM boards 610. It has a 1 ObaseT Ethernet card 612 that is connected to the corresponding card in the other 8200 536 via a private thinnet Ethernet.
This network is required for one of the system failover heartbeats. Slot 10 is empty.
~o The two units beneath the PCI chassis are Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks (RAID) disk controllers 604. Each disk controller 604 is on a SCSI chain with two disk controllers 604 in the middle and a disk adapter 602 (one per machine) on each end. Thus there are two chains, each with two disk controllers 604 and two disk adapters 602. This is the connectivity to the main system 579. Each disk controller 604 supports six single-ended SCSI chains. In this configuration, each of the two chains has one disk controller with two SES connections, and one disk controller with three connections. Each chain has five sets 614 (or "drawers") of disk drives as pictured in the center rack. Note the redundant power supply in the drawer with the RAID Disk Controller.
2o The Cabletron MMAC+ hubs 562 (Figure 47) are configured in a redundant pair. Both the 8200s 536 and the TI media servers 560 connect to both hubs 562, and the two hubs 562 are also connected to each other. Starting from the left side of the hubs: The FDDI concentrator card 616 provides an eight port FDDI ring. Each 8200 has one connection into the FDDI
card 616 on each hub 562. The 24 port Ethernet card 618 provides connectivity to the TI
media servers 560. Each media server 560 connects into one Ethernet port 618 on each hub.
There are eight empty slots 620 in each hub which can be used for additional FDDI, ATM, or Ethernet expansion.
There are four TI media servers 560 mounted in a single rack called a "MultiServe 4000".
3o Each media server in the rack is identical. Starting from the top unit, and then proceeding left to right for the main slots: The top unit 622 is a drawer that contains two 1 GB disk drives, and a removable/hot-insertable tape drive. There are two tape drives that can be shared among the four media servers. The left seven boards 624 labeled "DSP xxx" are TI MPB

wo 9sn~oso rcT~s9~nma boards which can each support six incoming or fifteen outgoing channels, as labeled. These boards 624 are grouped together into three sets. There is a right group of three boards, a middle group of three boards, and a single board on the left. Each group has one T 1. The T 1 terminates at the interface marked "TIM". This is the master TI interface. TI
channels may be shared by the set of boards delimited by the master/slave T 1 boards, and chained together by the bridge modules. The rightmost board 626 is the main CPU/IO board. This board supports an SCSI interface 628 to the disk drawer, an Ethernet connection 630 to a special transceiver 632, and a serial port for the console (not shown).
1 o The transceiver 632 to the right of the CPU/IO board connects to Ethernet ports on each of the two main hubs 562. The transceiver senses if one of its Ethernet connections has failed, and routes traffic to the other port.
b) External Hardware/Network Connections ~ 5 Figure 49 shows the hardware and network connections from the V FP 504 to the external network. Notes about Figure 49: Each 8200 536 is connected onto the ISN token ring 640 through the Bay Hubs for DDS access over SNA and BDR access over IP. A pair of terminal servers 642 has a connection to the console port of each machine and hub. A
DEC
AlphaStation 200 564 runs console manager software to access the ports connected to the 2o terminal servers 642. The DECNIS routers are all on an FDDI ring 568 (Figure 46), connected between the Bay Hubs 566 and the two DEC 8200s 536.
The Bay Hubs 566 connect the VFP system 504 to the external network through the seven routers 644 shown.
E. Voice~stribution Detailed Architecture I . Overview Voice Distribution refers to the portion of the architecture in which the NAS
546 (Figure 45) reads and writes the subscriber's ad hoc prompts across the LAN or WAN from/to the VFP
504 using the NFS protocol.

2. Rationale In one embodiment, voice distribution is implemented by placing a server at each ISN site and replicating the data via complex batch processes from each server to every other server.
The "Large Object Management" (LOM) project defines a network-based approach.
It was decided to use the directIineMCI VFP 504 as the network-based central object store for the NAS 546 to read and write customer prompts.
Figure 50 shows a network architecture to support Voice distribution traffic in accordance i o with a preferred embodiment. Figure 52A depicts a configuration of the Data Management Zone 5105 of the present invention. The Data Management Zone (DMZ) is a firewall between Internet dial-in platforms (although not the actual Internet itself) and the ISN
production networks. Its purpose is to provide dial-in access to data for ISN
customers while maintaining security for the ISN network as well as privacy and integrity of customer data in a production ISN network.
The DMZ permits a customer to receive periodically generated data, such as DDS
data down feeds from a mainframe database. Such data is periodically extracted from the database and placed in a user account directory on a secure File Transfer Protocol (FTP}
host for 2o subsequent retrieval by a customer.
Data access for customers is through dedicated ports at dial-in gateways, which are owned, operated and maintained by the Internet provider. Dial-in user authentication is through the use one time passwords via secure identification cards, as is more fully described below. The cards are distributed and administered by Internet provider personnel.
The DMZ provides a screened subnet firewall that uses a packet filtering muter to screen traffic from the outside unsecured network and the internal private network.
Only selected packets are authorized through the router, and other packets are blocked. The use of multiple 3o firewalling techniques ensures that no single point of failure or error in DMZ configuration puts the ISN production network at risk.

WO PCT/US97/Z11'74 The DMZ 5105 is intended to conform to several security standards. First, individuals who are not authorized employees cannot be allowed access to internal production networks.
Therefore IP connectivity through the gateway is not allowed. Second, access and use of DMZ services is restricted to authenticated and authorized users for specific purposes.
Therefore all other utilities and services normally found on a general purpose machine are disabled. Third, use of DMZ services and facilities must be carefully monitored to detect problems encountered by authorized users and to detect potentially fraudulent activity.
The centerpiece of the DMZ is the DMZ Bastion host 5110. Bastion host 5110 runs an FTP
1 o server daemon that implements a modified FTP protocol, as will be described in further detail below. Bastion host 5110 is a highly secured machine used as the interface to the outside world. Bastion host 5110 allows only restricted access from the outside world.
It typically acts as an application-level gateway to interior hosts in ISN 5115, to which it provides access via proxy services. Generally, critical information is not placed on Bastion host 5110, so t 5 that, even if the host is compromised, no access is made to critical data without additional integrity compromise at the ISN 5115.
Bastion host 5110 is connected to both interior and exterior users as shown in Figure 52A.
Bastion host 5115 may be a UNIX-based computer such as an IBM RS/6000 model 2o running the AIX operating system.
An interior user is a user connected to the ISN production token ring 5115.
Token ring 5115 is connected to an interior packet filter 5120 such as a Cisco model 4500 modular router.
Packet filter 5120 is connected to token ring LAN 5125, which in turn is connected to bastion 25 host 5110. Token ring LAN 5125 is a dedicated token ring that is isolated from all components other than bastion host 5110 and interior packet filter 5120, thereby preventing any access to bastion host 5110 through token ring LAN 5125 except as allowed by packet filter 5120.
3o Exterior users connect through exterior packet filter 5130, such as a Cisco model 4500 modular router. Packet filter 5130 is connected to bastion host 5110 through an isolated Ethernet LAN segment 5135. Ethernet LAN segment 5135 is a dedicated segment that is isolated from all components other than bastion host 5110 and extelyor packet filter 5130.

Because of the configuration, no user can access bastion host 5110 except through interior packet filter 5120 or exterior packet filter 5130.
Figure 52A depicts the DMZ 5105 in connection with dial-in environment 5205.
In dial-in environment 5205, the customer PC 5210 is connected to public switched telephone network (PSTN) 5220 through the use of modem 5215. Modem bank 5230 assigns a modem to answer incoming calls from PSTN 5220. Modem bank 5230 comprises a set of high-speed modems 5233 such as U.S Robotics V.34 Kbps modems. Incoming calls are authenticated by authentication server 5235. Authentication server 5235 may be implemented using a server ~ o such as the Radius/Keystone server running on a Sun Sparcstation model 20.
The Bastion host 5110 resides within a firewall, but is logically outside both the ISN 5115 and the gateway site 5205.
Following authentication, the selected modem 5233 is connected to incoming call router 5240 using Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). PPP is a protocol that provides a standard method of transporting mufti-protocol datagrams over point-to-point links. PPP is designed for simple links that transport packets between two peers. These links provide full-duplex simultaneous bi-directional operation, and are assumed to deliver packets in order. PPP
provides a common 2o solution for easy connection of a wide variety of hosts, bridges and routers). PPP is fully described in RFC 1661: The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), W. Simpson, Ed.
(1994) ("RFC
1661 "), the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Incoming call router 5240 selectively routes incoming requests to the exterior packet filter 5130 of DMZ 5105 over a communications link such as Tl line 5250, which is connected to exterior packet filter 5130 via a channel service unit (not shown). Incoming call router 5240 may be implemented using, for example, a Cisco 7000 series multiprotocol router. Incoming call router 5240 is optionally connected to Internet 5280. However, router 5240 is configured to block traffic from Internet 5280 to Exterior packet filter 5130, and to block 3o traffic from exterior packet filter 5130 to Internet 5280, thereby disallowing access to DMZ
5105 from Internet 5280.

wo ~n3o~o rcTi~rs~nma Bastion host 5110 runs a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server daemon that implements a modified FTP protocol based on release 2.2 of the wu ftpd FTP daemon, from Washington University. Except as noted herein, the FTP protocol is compliant with RFC
76~; File Transrer Protocol, by J. Postel (June I 980) ("RFC 765"), the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. RFC 765 describes a known protocol for transmission of files Y
using a TCP/IP-based telnet connection, in which the server responds to user-initiated commands to send or receive files, or to provide status information. The DMZ
FTP
' implementation excludes the send command (which is used to send a file from a remote user to an FTP server, and any other FTP command that transfers files to the FTP
host. A
o restricted subset of commands including the get (or recv), help, Is, and guit commands are supported.
The get command is used to transfer a file from host server 5110 to remote user 5210. The recv command is a synonym for get. The help command provides terse online documentation for the commands supported by host server 5110. T'he is command provides a list of the files in the current directory of the server, or of a directory specified by the user. The quit command terminates an FTP session. Optionally, the cd command, which specifies a named directory as the current directory, and the pwd command, to display the name of the current directory, may be implemented.
By disallowing send and other commands that transfer files to the server, a potential intruder is prevented from transfernng a "Trojan horse" type of computer program that may be used to compromise system security. As an additional benefit, the unidirectional data flow prevents a user from inadvertently deleting or overwriting one of his files resident on the Bastion server.
When the FTP daemon initiates a user session, it uses the UNIX chroot(2) service to specify the root of the user's directory tree as the apparent root of the filesystem that the user sees.
This restricts the user from visibility to UNIX system directories such as /etc and /bin, and 3o from visibility to other users' directories, while permitting the desired visibility and access to the files within the user's own directory tree. To further assure a secured environment, the FTP daemon executes at the user-id ("uid") of the user level, rather than as root, and allows access only to authorized users communicating from a set of predetermined IP
addresses wo 9sn3oso rcr~s9~nma known to be authorized. In particular, the standard non-authenticated accounts of anonymous and guest are disabled.
In order to further secure Bastion server 5110, a number of daemons that are ordinarily started by the UNIX Internet server process inetd are disabled. The disables daemons are those that are either not needed for Bastion server operation, or that are known to have security exposures. These daemons include rcp, rlogin, rlogind, rsh, rshd, tftp, and tftpd.
These daemons are disabled by removing or commenting out their entries in the AIX
/etc/inetd.conf file. The /etc/inetd.conf file provides a list of servers that are invoked by o inetd when it receives an Internet request over a socket. By removing or commenting out the corresponding entry, the daemon is prevented from executing in response to a received -request.
As a further assurance of security a number of daemons and utilities are disallowed from execution by changing their associated file permissions to mark them as non-executable (e.g., having a file mode of 000). This is performed by a DMZ Utility Disabler (DUD) routine that executes at boot time. The DUD routine marks as non-executable the above-identified files (rcp, rlogin, rlogind, rsh, rshd, tftp, and tftpc~, as well as a number of other daemons and utilities not ordinarily invoked by inetd. This set of daemons and utilities includes sendmail, 2o gated, routed, fingerd, rexecd, uucpd, bootpd, and talkd. In addition, DUD
disables the telnet and ftp clients to prevent an intruder from executing those clients to access an interior host in the event of a break-in. The telnet and ftp clients may be temporarily marked as executable during system maintenance activities.
Bastion host 5110 has IP forwarding disabled. This ensures that IP traffic cannot cross the DMZ isolated subnet 5115 by using Bastion host 5110 as a router.
The limited level of ftp service provided by Bastion server 5110 provides a secure ftp session but makes it difficult to perform typical system maintenance. In order to perform system 3o maintenance, maintenance personnel must connect to Bastion host 5110 from an interior host within ISN 5115 using a telnet client. The FTP client program in Bastion is then changed from non-executable (e.g., 000) to executable {e.g., 400), using the AIX chmod command.
Maintenance personnel may then execute the ftp client program to connect to a desired host WO ~ PCT/US97121174 on ISN 5115. During this procedure, control of transfers is therefore from within Bastion host 5110 via the FTP client program executing within that host, rather than from a client outside of the host. At the end of a maintenance session the FTP session is terminated, and _ the chmod command is executed again to revert the ftp client program to a non-executable state (e.g., 000), after which the ISN-initiated telnet session may be terminated.
To provide .logging, Bastion server 5110 implements a TCP daemon wrapper, such as the TCPwrappers suite from Wietse Venema. The TCf wrapper directs inetd to run a small wrapper program rather than the named daemon. The wrapper program logs the client host o name or address and performs some additional checks, then executes the desired server program on behalf of inetd. After termination of the server program, the wrapper is removed from memory. The wrapper programs have no interaction with the client user or with the client process, and do not interact with the server application. This provides two major advantages. First, the wrappers are application-independent, so that the same program can protect many kinds of network services. Second, the lack of interaction means that the wrappers are invisible from outside.
The wrapper programs are active only when the initial contact between client and server is established. Therefore, there is no added overhead in the client-server session after the 2o wrapper has performed its logging functions. The wrapper programs send their logging information to the syslog daemon, syslogd. The disposition of the wrapper logs is determined by the syslog configuration file, usually /etc/syslog.conf.
Dial-in access is provided through dial-in environment 5105. The use of authentication server 5235 provides for authentication of users to prevent access from users that are not authorized to access the DMZ. The authentication method implemented uses a one-time password scheme. All internal systems and network elements are protected with one-time password generator token cards, such as the SecurID secure identification token cards produced by Security Dynamics, using an internally developed authentication client/server mechanism called Keystone. Keystone clients are installed on each element that receive authentication requests from users. Those requests are then securely submitted to the Keystone Servers deployed throughout the network.

WO 98IZ3080 PCT/i1S97/21174 Each user is assigned a credit card sized secure identification card with a liquid crystal display on the front. The display displays a pseudo-randomly generated six-digit number that changes every 60 seconds. For an employee to gain access to a Keystone protected system, the user must enter their individually assigned PIN number followed by the number currently displayed on the secure identification card. Such authentication prevents unauthorized access that employ the use of programs that attempt to "sniff' or intercept passwords, or Trojan horse programs designed to capture passwords from users.
Authentication information collected by the Keystone clients is encrypted with an RSA and 1 o DES encryption key, and is dispatched to one of many Keystone Servers. The Keystone Servers evaluates the information to verify the user's PIN and the access code that should be displayed on that user's card at that moment. After the system verif es that both factors for that user where entered correctly, the authorized user is granted access to the system, or resource requested.
In order to assure security from the point of entry of the external network, no external gateway machine has a general access account and all provide controlled access. Each gateway machine ensures that all gateway services generate logging information, and~ach external gateway machine maintains an audit trail of connections to the gateway. All of the 2o external gateway machines have all non-essential services disconnected.
The authentication server 5235 serves as a front end to all remote access dial up, and is programmed to disallow pass-through. All network authentication mechanisms provide for logging of unsuccessful access attempts. Preferably, the logs generated are reviewed daily by designated security personnel.
Figure 53 depicts a flow diagram showing the fax tone detection methodology.
In step 5305, the fax tone detection system allocates a null linked-list; that is, a linked list having no entries. In step 5310, the fax tone detection system starts the asynchronous routine 3o auCheckForFaxAsync 5315. The auCheckForFaxAsync routine 5315 is an asynchronous program that executes concurrently with the main line program, and rather than synchronously returning control to the calling program. The auCheckForFax routine evaluates the tone of the incoming call to see whether the call is originated by a facsimile PCTlUS97/21174 machine, and generates an auCheckForFax response 5318 if and when a facsimile tone is detected.
After starting auCheckForFaxAsync routine 5315, control proceeds to step 5320.
In step 5320, the fax tone detection system adds an entry to the linked list allocated in step 5305.
The added entry represents a unique identifier associated with the message being processed.
In step 5330, the fax tone detection system starts the asynchronous routine auPlayFileAsync 5335. The auPlayFileAsync routine 5335 is an asynchronous program that executes concurrently with the main line program, rather than synchronously returning control to the 1 o calling program. The auPlayFileAsync routine 5335 accesses previously stored digitally recorded sound files and plays them to the originating caller. The sound files played may be used, for example, to instruct the originating caller on sequences of key presses that may be used to perform particular functions, e.g., to record a message, to retrieve a list of previously recorded messages, etc.
In step 5340, the fax tone detection system starts the asynchronous routine auInputDataAsync 5340. The auInputDataAsync routine 5340 is an asynchronous program that executes concurrently with the main line program, rather than synchronously returning control to the calling program. The auInputDataAsync routine 5340 monitors the originating call to detect 2o key presses by the user, in order to invoke the routines to execute the tasks associated with a particular key press sequence.
As has been noted, the auCheckForFaxAsync routine 5315 executes concurrently with the main program, and generates a auCheckForFax response 5318 if and when a facsimile tone is detected. In step 5350, the fax tone detection system checks to see whether an auCheckForFax response 5318 response has been received. If a response has been received, this indicates that the originating call is a facsimile transmission, and the fax tone detection system extends the incoming call to Voice/Fax processor (VFP) 5380. If no auCheckForFax response 5318 is received within a predetermined time (e.g., 7 seconds), the fax tone 3o detection system concludes that the originator of thf: call is not a facsimile device, and terminates the auCheckForFaxAsync routine 5315. In an implementation, it may be preferable to implement this check through an asynchronous interruption-handling process.
In such an implementation, an execution-time routine may be set up to gain control when an wo 98/23080 PCT/US97/21174 auCheckForFax response 5318 event occurs. This may be implemented using, for example) the C++ catch construct to define an exception handler to handle an auCheckForFax response 5318 event.
Following the decision in step 5350, the fax tone detection system in step 5360 waits for the next incoming call.
Figures 54A through 54E depict a flow diagram showing the VFP Completion process for fax and voice mailboxes. As depicted in Figure 54A, the VFP completion routine in step 5401 1 o searches the database for a record corresponding to the addressed mailbox.
In step 5405, the VFP completion routine checks to see if a mailbox record was successfully retrieved. If no mailbox record was found, in step 5407, the VFP completion routine generates a VCS alarm indicating that the desired mailbox record was not found. Because the mailbox record was not found, the VFP completion processor will be unable to test the attributes of the mailbox ~ 5 address. However, regardless of whether the mailbox record is found;
control proceeds to step 5409. In step 5409, the VFP completion processor tests the contents of the mailbox record, if any, to determine whether the addressed mailbox is full. If the addressed mailbox is full, in step 5410, the VFP completion routine plays an error message indicating that the addressed mailbox is at capacity and is unable to store additional messages, and exits in step 20 5412.
In step 5414, the VFP completion processor obtains the mode of the VFP call.
The mode is derived from the dial string provided by the originating caller, and is stored in the enCurrentNum field of the pstCall l State structure. The dial string has the following format:
char number[10]; /* 10-digit 8xx number dialed by user */
char asterisk; /* constant '*' */
char mode; /* 1-byte mode */
3o char octothorp; /* constant '#' */
The mode has one of the following values:

1 guest voicemaiI
2 guest fax with voice annotation 3 guest fax without voice annotation 4 user voice/fax retrieval 5 user list maintenance 6 user recording of mailbox In step 5416, the VFP completion processor retrieves the route number associated with the addressed mailbox from the database. In step 5418, the route number is passed to the SIS
layer.
As depicted in Figure 54B, execution continues with step 5420. In step 5420, the VFP
completion processor initialized an answer supervision flag that is used to determine whether t5 the VFP is accepting transfer of the call. In step 5422, the VFP completion processor calls the SisCollectCall routine to process the call. If the call is unsuccessful, Step 5424 causes the SisCollectCall invocation of step 5422 to be repeated up to a predetermined number of retries.
2o In step 5426, the VFP completion processor obtains a predetermined timer expiration value from the otto.cfg file. The timer expiration value is set to the amount of time in which, if an answer is not received, the VFP completion processor may conclude that the VFP
is not currently reachable. In step 5428, the VFP completion processor sets the timer according to the value from step 5426. In step 5430, the VFP completion processor check to see whether 25 answer supervision occurred prior to the expiration of the timer set in step 5424. If so, control proceeds to step 5430 to transfer control to the VFP.
Figure 54C depicts the operation of transferring control to the VFP in response to an affirmative decision in step 5430. In step 5440, any pending timers set in step 5428 are 3o canceled. In step 5442, the VFP completion processor calls routine sisOnHoldTerm() to put the VFP on hold. In step 5444, the VFP completion processor calls routine sisOffHoldOrig() to take the originating call off hold.

In step 5446, the VFP completion processor plays a previously stored digitally recorded sound file, instructing the originating caller to wait during the process of transferring the call to the VFP. In step 5448, the VFP completion processor calls routine sisOnHoldOrig() to put the originating call back on hold. In step 5450, the VFP completion processor calls routine sisOffHoldTerm to take the VFP off hold. In step 5452, the VFP completion processor calls the auPlayDigits routine, passing to it as a parameter, a string comprising the addressed mailbox numbers an asterisk ('*') to indicate a field separation, the mode, and an octothorp ('#') to indicate the end of the command string.
to In step 5454, the VFP completion processor obtains a timeout value AckTimeout and an interdigit delay value from the otto.cfg file. The AckTimeout value is used to determine the amount of time before the VFP completion processor determines that no response is forthcoming from the VFP. The interdigit delay value is used to time the delays between audio signals sent that represent telephone keypad presses. In step 5456, the VFP completion ~ 5 processor calls the InputData routine to obtain a response from the VFP.
Following steps 5440 through 5456, or following a negative decision in step 5430, control proceeds to step 5460, as shown in Figure 54D. In step 5460, the VFP
completion processor requests a response from the VFP. In step 5462, the VFP completion processor waits for the 2o VFP response or for a timer set in step 5428 to expire. In step 5464, if the VFP has responded, the.VFP completion processor proceeds to step 5446.
In step 5446, the VFP completion system checks the VFP response and writes the appropriate BDR term status record. The response indicates the acknowledgment from the TI
platform.
25 A response of '00' indicates success, and the VFP completion processor writes a BDR-STAT_NORMAL indicator. A response of 'O1' indicates the VFP did not receive the key to the addressed mailbox, and the VFP completion processor writes a BDR STAT_DUNE TI NO DIGITS indicator. A response of '02' indicates that the VFP
timed out while collecting the key, and the VFP completion processor writes a 3o BDR STAT DLINE TI FORMAT indicator. A response of- _ _ _ "03' indicates that the addressed mailbox was not found, and the VFP completion processor writes a BDR STAT DUNE TI-MAILBOX indicator. If no response was received, a WO 98/Z3~0 PCT/US97J21174 BDR STAT DUNE TI NO RSP indicator is written. Following the BDR indicator, control proceeds to step 5480 as shown in Figure 54E.
If no answer was received from the VFP, the timer set in step 5428 has expired, and control passes to step 5468. In step 5468 the VFP completion processor gives a VCS
alarm w indicating that the VFP did not answer. In step 5470, the VFP completion processor calls routine sisReleaseTerm() to disconnect the call to the VFP. In step 5472, the VCS
completion processor calls routine sisOffHoldOrig to take the originating call off of hold. In step 5474, the VFP completion processor calls tiCancelTimers to cancel all outstanding to timers that have not yet been canceled. In step 5476, the VFP completion processor plays a previously stored digitally recorded sound file, reporting to the originating caller that the VFP
completion processor was unable to connect to the VFP.
After either step 5476 or step 5466 (depending on the decision in step 5464), control proceeds to step 5480, as shown in Figure 54E. In step 5480, the VFP completion processor checks to see if the originating caller is a subscribed user. If so, control passes to step 5482. In step 5484, the VFP completion processor checks to see if the originating caller is a guest user. If so, control passes to step 5482. Step 5482 then returns the originating caller to the menu from which the caller initiated the VFP request. If the originating caller is neither a 2o subscribed user nor a guest, control passes to step 5486. In step 5486, the originating caller is assumed to be a fax call, and the call is disconnected.
Figures 55A and 55B depict the operation of the Pager Termination processor.
In step 5510, the pager termination processor calls the GetCallback routine to obtain the telephone number that will be used to identify the caller, and that will be displayed on the paging device to identify the number to be called back by the pager subscriber. The GetCallback routine is describe in detail below with respect to Figure 56.
In step 5515, the pager termination processor checks to see if a telephone number was 3o returned by the GetCallback. If no number was returned, in step 5520 the pager termination processor indicates that the call should be ended, and in step 5522 provides the caller with a menu to select another service.

WO 98/23080 PCT/US97l21174 -If a number was returned, the addressed pagers PIN is obtained from the database in step 5530. The pager termination processor constructs a pager dial string comprising the pager PIN retrieved in step 5530 and the callback number obtained in step 5510. In step 5532, the pager termination processor obtains the pager's type and routing information is obtained from the database. In step 5534, the pager termination processor checks the configuration file to obtain a pager parse string that defines the parameters for pagers of the type addressed. In step 5536, the pager termination processor checks to see whether the requested pager parse string was successfully retrieved. If not, in step 5538 the pager termination processor indicates that the page could not be performed by setting the BDR term status to BDR STAT PAGER NOT FOUND, and in step 5540 provides the caller with a menu to select another service.
If the pager parse string was successfully retrieved, the pager termination processor proceeds to step 5550 as shown in Figure 55B. In step 5550, the pager termination processor calls the ~ 5 pager subsystem, passing to it the route number, the dial string, and the pager parse string. In step 5552) the pager termination processor checks the return code from the pager subsystem.
If the page was successfully completed, the pager termination processor, in step 5554 plays a digitally prerecorded message to the caller, informing the caller that the page has been successfully sent. In step 5556 the enEndCallStatus field is updated to mark the pager call -2o complete. In step 5558, the transfer status is marked as blank, indicating that there is no need to transfer the caller, and in step 5560, the pager termination processor presents the user with a menu permitting it to select another service or to end the call.
If the page was not successfully completed, the pager termination processor checks in step 25 5570 whether the caller had disconnected during the page attempt. If the caller had disconnected, the pager termination processor in step 5575 checks to see whether the page had been sent prior to the disconnection. If the page was sent despite the disconnect, the pager termination processor in step 5580 indicates a normal ending to the page request in step 5580 and sets the status as complete in step 5582. In step 5584, the pager termination 3o processor presents the user with a menu permitting it to select another service or to end the call.

If the page was not sent the pager termination processor indicates an abnormal ending to the page request in step 5586 and indicates a caller disconnect in step 5588. In step 5590, the pager termination processor presents the user with a menu permitting it to select another service or to end the call.
If the caller has not disconnected, the pager termination processor sets a code indicating the reason for the failure in step 5572. The failure types include BDR_STAT_PAGER ROUTE NUM (for an invalid route number);
BDR STAT_PAGER CRIT ERROR (for a failure in the originating call);
t o BDR STAT_PAGER TIMEOUT (for the failure of the pager to acknowledge the call within a predetermined timeout time interval); BDR STA7 =PAGER DIGITS HOLD (for the failure of the pager subsystem to play the digits corresponding to the pager address);
BDR_STST_PAGER DISC (for a premature disconnect of the paging subsystem); and BDR_STAT PAGER NOT FOUND (for an invalid parse string).
~5 In step 5592 the pager termination processor posts the error code selected in step 5572 to the BDR. In step 5582, the pager termination processor plays a prerecorded digital sound file indicating that the page could not be sent. In step 5595 the enEndCallStatus field is updated to mark the pager call complete. In step 5597, the transfer status is marked as blank, 2o indicating that there is no need to transfer the caller, and in step 5599, the pager termination processor presents the user with a menu permitting it to select another service or to end the call.
Figure 56 depicts the GetCallback routine called from the pager termination processor in step 25 5510. In step 5610 the GetCallback routine obtains constants that define the applicable start and interdigit delays from the otto.cfg file. In step 5615, the GetCallback routine plays a prerecorded digital sound file prompting the caller to provide a callback telephone number, by pressing the applicable keypad keys, followed by an octothorp ('#'). In step 5620, the GetCallback routine reads the number entered by the caller. In step 5625 the data received is 3o placed in the BDR. In step 5630, the GetCallback routine checks to see if the number entered was terminated by a '#' character. If so, the GetCallback routine returns success in step 5635. If not, the GetCallback routine, in step 5640, sees if the retry count has been exceeded.
If the retry count has not been exceeded, execution repeats from step 5615. If the retry count has been exceeded, in step 5650, the GetCallback routine plays a prerecorded digital message indicating that the number was not successfully received, and in step Sb60 returns an error condition to the calling program.
The following description sets forth a user interface for user-management of directlineMCI
profile items currently accessed via ARU (DTMF) and Customer Service. These items include:
(De)Activate Account Find-Me Routing - Schedules - 3-Number Sequence - First, Second, Third Numbers and Ring-No-Answer Timeouts Pager OnlOff Override Routing Final (Alternate) Routing Caller Screening Pager Notification of Voicemail Messages Pager Notification of Faxmail Messages Speed Dial Numbers The following table lists the fields that the directlineMCI customer is able to update via DTMF. This list does not include all fields in the service, only those that are used by the directlineMCI application.
Primary Termination Primary Time-out Value - _ secondary Termination ~econdaryTime-out Value tertiary Termination TertiaryTime-out Value Override Routing Override Time-out Value Alternate Routing Alternate Time-out Value PIN Flags, specifically:
Bit 10 Schedule 1 Bit 11 Schedule 2 Bit 1 S Page on Vmail Bit 16 Page on Fax StateVFlags, specifically:
Bit 3 Account Available Bit 13 Pager On/Off Bit 14 Find-Me On/Off Bit 15 Voicemail On/Off Bit 16 Fax On/Off Call Screening State Default Fax Number -Speed Dial # 1 Speed Dial #2 Speed Dial #3 Speed Dial #4 Speed Dial #5 Speed Dial #6 Speed Dial #7 Speed Dial #8 Speed Dial #9 A user will access his directlineMCI profile via http:/www.mci.services.com/directline.
Upon entry of a valid Account ID and Passcode, the user's Routing Screen witl be presented.

The user may click on tabs to move from one screen to another. If a user returns to a screens that's been updated during that session, the screen will be displayed as it was when he last left it, i.e. any updates he's submitted will be reflected in the data. If, however, a user logs off, or times out, when next he logs into his profile management screens, the data displayed will be from a new query into the 800PIN_1 Call database. Updates made within the last 15 minutes may not have reached the NIDS databases serving the Web Server, so the data may not reflect any recent updates.
The following items will appear in the index frame, and will act as links to their associated Web screens. When a user 'clicks' on one of these items, the associated screen will be displayed in the text frame. -Call Routing Guest Menu Override Routing Speed Dial Numbers Voicemail Faxmail Call Screening In addition, a LOGOFF button will appear at the bottom of the index frame.
Clicking on this button will result in immediate token expiration, and the user will be returned to the login screen.
F. Login Screen Figure 57 shows a user login screen 700 for access to online profile management.
directlineMCI Number 702 The account ID will be the directlineMCI customer's 10-digit access number, of the format 8xx xxx xxxx. This number, concatenated with a PIN of '0000', will be the key into the 1 Call database, which contains the customer profile data.
The user will not be allowed a successful login if the Program flag (PIN flag 4) is set to 'N'.
If a login attempt is made on such an account. the Login Error screen will be displayed.

WO 9g/Z3pg0 PGT/US9'7/21174 Passcode 704 The passcode will be the same as that used to access user options via the ARU
interface. It is a six-character numeric string. The user's entry will not be echoed in this field; an asterisk ' 5 (*} will be displayed for each character entered.
Statas message directlineMCI Number: "Enter your directlineMCI number."
Passcode: "Enter your passcode."
1o G. Call Routing Screen Figure 58 shows a call routing screen 710, used to set or change a user's call routing instructions.
15 "Accept Calls" Section 712 The user can specify whether calls are accepted at 712 on her account by selecting the appropriate radio button 714 or 7I6. These buttons <:orrespond directly to the Account Available flag (State flags, bit 3) in the customer's directline record:
Radio Buttons~Account Available flag Accept Calls Y

Do Not Accept N

Calls "Choose from the selections below" Section 718 The user specifies whether the guest caller should receive a Guest Menu, or Override Routing treatment. This selection will indicate whether the data in the Guest Menu or Override Routing screen is applicable.

The customer's Override Termination will be populated as follows, according to the user's selection:
'4ffex Guests...' pvei~ide itadio -Buttons . . . Termination Guest Menu 00 No Menu - Override 08* (default Routing voicemail) "When I cannot be reached..." Section 720 A user specifies call treatment for those calls for which he was unable to be reached . The Alternate Termination in the customer record is updated as follows:
Radio Buttons . . Alternate . .. :: .; , ., :y . Terniiz~ation . . ':

Voicemail 08 Pager 07 Voicemail or Pager 09 - Caller Choice Final Message OS

Status messages Depending on the choices made by the user, the following status messages are provided to the user for each selection identified below:
Do Not Accept Calls: "No calls will be accepted on your directlineMCI Number."
Accept Calls: "Calls will be accepted on your directlineMCI Number."
~ 5 Guest Menu: "Lets callers select how they want to contact you." -No Menu - Override Routing: "Routes callers to a specific destination selected by you.'' Voicemail: "Callers will be asked to leave a voicemail."
Pager: "Callers will be prompted to send you a page."
Voicemail or Pager: "Callers can choose to leave you a voicemail or send you a page."
2o Closing Message: "Callers will hear a message asking them to try their call later."

WO 98I23t180 - PCT/US97/21174 H. Guest Menu Co»ftguration Scree»
When Override Routing has been disabled, i.e., when Guest Menu has been selected, a Guest Menu will be presented to the guest caller. The user has the ability to configure his Guest Menu using a guest menu configuration screen 730 (Figure 59) to the following extent:
"Fi»d Me Routing" Checkbox 732 In this phase, Find-Me Routing cannot be de-selected. The check box will be checked based on the Find-Me Flag (PIN Flags, bit 9, and the option greyed out.
If the subscriber enters a 'leading 1' for a domestic number, it will be stripped from t o the number, and only the NPA-Nxx-xxxx will be stored in the database.
When programming his 3--Number Sequence numbers, the subscriber may select the number of rings, from 1 to 6, the system should allow before a Ring-no-Answer decision is made. The number of rings will be stored in the database in terms of seconds;
the formula for calculating seconds will be: 6 *Ring~Limit. The default, if no value is entered, is 3 rings, or t 5 18 seconds. When reading from the database, from I) to 8 seconds will translate to 1 ring. A
number of seconds greater than 8 will be divided by six, with the result rounded to determine the number of rings, up to a maximum of 16.
Updates to the customer's record will be as follows:
Radio Buttonsgched~e ll2 p.y Secondary . ~ 'Tertiary _ 'flags . Termination Tezm~nation aniiTezmination ~ and ~. and T'uneout v' "Timeout Timeout ... .

Schedules Both Y no change no change no change 3-Number Both N 1st entered 2nd entered 3rd entered Sequence number* * number* * and number* *
and and timeout timeout timeout 20 **Domestic/international termination will be validated as described in Appendix A.
"Leave a Voicemail " Checkbox 734 In this phase,Voicemail cannot be de-selected. The check box will be checked based on the Vmail Flag (PIN Flags, bit 3), and the option grayed out.
"Send a Fax " Checkbox 736 In this phase, Fax cannot be de-selected. The check box will be checked based on the Fax Termination Flag (PIN Flags, bit 13), and the option greyed out.
"Send a Page " Checkbox 738 The user can specify whether callers will be offered the paging option by toggling the box labeled Send me a Page. This box corresponds directly to the Pager On/Off flag (State flags, bit 13) in the customer's directline record:
Page Qhe~kbox Rager OnlOff flag Checked Y

Unchecked N

Status messages Find Me Routing: "Allows callers to try to 'find you' wherever you are."
Schedule Routing: "Routes callers based on your schedule."
Three Number...: "Allows callers to locate you through the three numbers."
1 st #, 2nd #, 3rd #: "Enter telephone number."
~ 5 1 st~ 2nd 3rd Ring Limit: "Enter the number of times to ring at this number."
Leave a Voicemail: "Allows callers to leave you a voicemail."
Send a Fax: "Allows callers to send you a fax."
Send a Page: "Allows callers to send you a page."
I. Override Routing Screen 2o Figure b0 shows an override routing screen 740, which allows a user to route all calls to a selected destination. When a user selects to route all his calls to a specific destination, bypassing presentation of the guest menu 730 of Figure S9, the Override Termination in the customer record will be updated as follows:
Buttons ~ Termination Guest Menu selected 00 Voicemail ~ 08 wo 9sn~uso rcn~rsg~mm4 -Pager 07 Find-Me 06 Telephone number Entered number**
When this option is initially selected from the Profiles screen, there will be no Override Routing setting in the user's customer record. The default setting, when this screen is s presented, will be Voicemail) if available, Find-Me if Voicemail is not available.
Status messages Find Me Routing: "Allows callers to only try to 'find you' wherever you are."
Schedule Routing: "Routes callers based on your schedule."
Three Number...: "Allows callers to locate you through the three numbers."
I st #, 2nd #, 3rd #: "Enter telephone number."
I st~ 2nd 3rd Ring Limit: "Enter the number of times to ring at this number"
Voicemail: "Callers will be prompted to leave you a voicemail only."
Send a Page: "Callers will be prompted to send you a page only."
~ 5 Temporary Override Number: "caller will only be routed to this number you select."
Telephone Number Ring Limit: "Enter the number of times to ring at this number"
J. Speed Dial Screen 2o Figure 61 shows a speed dial numbers screen 744. A user may update his nine (9) Speed Dial numbers via the Web interface. Speed Dial numbers labeled 1 through 9 on the Web page correspond with the same Speed Dial numbers in the customer's record. Domestic and international termination will be validated as described below.
25 Status messaees 1 - 9: "Enter speed dial number <1 - 9>."

Figure 62 shows a voicemail screen 750.
"Receive Voicemail Messages" Checkbox 752 "Page me when I receive" Checkbox "Page me when I receive a new voicemail message" Checkbox 754. This box corresponds s directly to the Page on Vmail flag (PIN flags, bit I S) in the customer's directline record:
Pager IV~titi Page ~on ration , V~sii Checkbox flag Unchecked N

Checked Y

Status messages Receive voicemail...: "Callers will be able to leave you a voicemail message."
1 o Page me each time. . . : "You will be paged when you receive a voicemail message."
Figure 63 shows a faxmail screen 760.
"My primary Fax number is" Field 762 1 s "Receive Faxmaii Messages" Checkbox 7b4 Profile management of this item is shown as it appears on the Faxmail Screen.
"Page me when I receive" Checkbox 766 This item appears as a "Page me when I receive a new voicemail message"
Checkbox 766.
This box corresponds directly to the Page on Fax flag (PIN flags, bit 16) in the customer's 2o directline record:
'Parker Notifir,~:tioapage:on Fax -. flag Checkbox Unchecked N

Checked y Status messages Receive fax...: "Callers will be able to send you a fax."
Page me each time...: "You will be paged when you receive a fax."
" 5 Figure 64 shows a call screening screen 770. A user may elect to screen his calls by caller name, originating number or both name and number. The Call Screening State in the customer record will be updated as follows:
CaI~ SGt~~ri$ R8d14-~B1#~OI1SC~ SCI's . ~

Checkbox: , ,. , :;, :State:: ~ ~
~ ' . ..

Unchecked n/a 00 Checked Number Only 02 Name Only 01 Name and 03 Number to Status messages Allow me to screen...: "Activating this feature allows you to screen your calls."
Name only: "Caller's name will be presented to answering party."
Telephone number: "Caller's telephone number will be presented to answering party"
t 5 Name and Telephone: "Caller's name and telephone number will be presented to answering party., Figures 65-67 show supplemental screens 780, 782 and 784 used with user profile management.
2o Login Error screen 780 This error screen is presented when a login attempt has failed due to an invalid account number, passcode, or a hostile IP address. This is also the screen that is displayed when a user's token has expired and he's required to login again.
Update Successful screen 782 This screen is presented when an update has been successfully completed. The 'blank' will be filled in with: 'Call Routing options have ', 'Guest Menu options have ', 'Override Routing has ', 'Speed Dial Numbers have ', 'Voicemail options have', 'Faxmail options have', and 'Call Screening option has '.
Update Failed screen 784 This screen will be presented when a user has attempted to enter one or more invalid terminating number(s), or to update his account with a blank First number. The account will not be updated until corrections are made and all numbers are successfully validated.
In the various screens of the user interface, profile options are 'grayed out', indicating that the option is not available from the screen, based on the following flag settings:
Green Login Screen Login Program (Follow-Me) Flag Profile Screen Accept Calls Avail Programming Flag Final Routing to Find-Me Fiag AND
Voicemail Voicemail Flag Final Routing to Find-Me Flag AND
Pager Pager Termination Flag Final Routing to Find-Me Flag AND
Voicemail or Pager Voicemail Flag AND

Pager Termination Flag Guest Menu Schedules Find-Me AND

Schedule 1 Trans populated AND

Schedule 2 Trans populated Three-Number SequenceFind-Me AND

Domestic Termination Flag OR

International Termination ( 1 st, 2nd, 3rd) Domestic Termination Flag OR
International Termination Flag a page Pager Termination Flag WO 98/?~080 PCT/US97/21174 Override Routing Schedules Find-Me Flag AND

Schedule 1 Trans populated AND

Schedule 2 Trans populated Three-Number SequenceFind-Me AND

Domestic Termination Flag OR

International Termination Number ( 1 st, 2nd, Find-Me Flag AND
3rd) Domestic Termination Flag OR

International Termination Flag Pager Pager Termination Flag Telephone Number Find-Me Flag AND

Domestic Termination Flag OR

International Termination Speed Dial Numbers 1 - 9 Speed Dial Programming AND

Domestic Completion Flag OR

International Completion Flag Voicemail screen Page me when I receive...Voicemai! Flag AND

Pager Termination Flag Faxmail screen Page me when I receive...Fax Termination Flag AND

Pager Termination Flag Call Screening Allow me to screen...Call Screening Programming For some of the profile options described above, validation checks are made as follows:
International numbers, with the exception of North American Dialing Plan (NADP) numbers, must be prefaced with 'Ol 1', or will not be accepted for programming.
976 blocking will be implemented as follows:
The International Blocking database will be queried, using Category 000, Type 002, , and the programmed NPA, looking for a pattern match, to ensure that the programmed r number is not a blocked Information/Adult Services number. If a match is found, programming to that number will not be allowed.
Country Set blocking will be implemented as follows:

- The Country Set of the directlineMCI Property record will be validated against the Country Code of the programmed number. If the terminating country is blocked the directlineMCI Country Set, programming to that number will not be allowed.
Programming Routing If the programmed Perform the following validation number is: checks Domestic Domestic Flag 976 Blocking NADP Domestic Flag 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term PCC, Auth Cset International International Flag Cset Blocking using Term CC, Auth Cset wo ~3oso rcr~s9~nma Programming Speed Dial Numbers If the programmed Perform the following validation number is: checks ' Domestic Domestic Comp Flag 976 Blocking NADP Domestic Comp Flag 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term PCC, Auth Cset International International Comp Flag Cset Blocking using Term CC, Auth Cset Figure 68 is a flow chart showing how the validation for user entered speed dial numbers is s carried out. The same flow chart is applicable to validation of entries by a guest on the guest screen when a call is made to a user by a non-subscri'~ber.
The integrated switching system and packet transmission network of this invention allows the w provision of an improved feature set for users. directlineMCI is a single-number access personal number, with features including Find-Me functionality, voicemail, paging, and fax store and forward services. A subscriber, or user, is asked for profile information, which is entered into his customer record in the directlineMCI database on the ISN
mainframe. The product's feature set includes:
Personal Greeting: The user has the option of recording a personal greeting to be played to is his guest callers. If a user records a personal greeting, it replaces the 'Welcome to directlineMCI' default greeting.
Guest Menu: The Guest Menu is defined by which features the user has subscribed to. A
guest caller to a 'fully loaded' account will be presented options to Speak to or Page the user, Send a Fax, or Leave a Voicemail Message.

3- Number Sequence for Find-Me functionality: The system attempts to reach the user at three numbers, trying the First (Primary) number, then the Second(ary), then the Third (Tertiary) number. If no answer is received at any of these numbers, the call is treated as prescribed in Alternate Routing.
2-Level Schedule for Find-Me functionality: The system attempts to reach the user at two numbers, using current date/day/time information to query his schedules.
Attempts are made to a number from the user's Schedule 1, then Schedule 2; if no answer is received, Alternate Routing defines the treatment.
Alternate Routing allows the user to prescribe the treatment of a guest caller who chose to reach him, but no answer was received at any of the attempted numbers. Options for Alternate Routing include Voicemail, Pager, a Guest's choice of Voicemail or Pager, or a Closing Message, asking the caller to try his call again at a later time.
Override Routing allows the user to disable the presentation of the Guest Menu, and prescribe a single treatment for all guest callers. Options include completion to a telephone number, the user's defined Find-Me sequence, Voicemail, or Pager.
Default Routing is the treatment of a guest caller who, when presented the Guest Menu, does not respond after three prompts. Default Routing options include a transfer to the Operator, 2o completion to a telephone number, the Find-Me sequence, or Voicemail.
Call Screening allows the user to define whether or not he wishes callers to be announced before being connected. Options include no call screening, or having the caller identified by name, originating telephone number, or both name and number.
2s The 'Place a Call' option in the user's menu allows him to make a call, and have it charged to his directlineMCI account.
Voice/Faxmail: Both voice and fax messages can be stored for later retrieval by the user.
The user may opt to be notified when new voice and/or fax messages are deposited into his mailbox.
The Voice / Fax Platform (VFP) has been integrated into the Intelligent Services Network (ISN), to allow the ISN applications to query its databases, and billing records to be cut directly from the VFP.

WO 98/23080 PG"T/US9?/211?4 Among the changes to the original directlineMCI product are the following items:

Find-Me Routing Find-Me Routing now has two options, selectable by the subscriber: the 3-number sequence currently implemented, or the 2-level schedule option. The schedule option is implemented such that the subscriber's Schedule 1 translation will be treated as the primary termination, and his Schedule 2 translation will be treated as the secondary termination.
Find-Me Routing is described in more detail in the CaII Flow diagrams and ARU Impacts sections.
Default Routing Default Routing is the prescribed action the application takes when a caller does not respond to Guest Menu prompts. Options for Default Routing include a telephone number, voicemail, Find-Me routing, and Operator transfer.
Voice/Fax Message Information When a subscriber accesses the user menu, the application provides mailbox status information, including the number of new voice or fax messages, and if his mailbox is full.
The application launches a query to the VFP database to obtain this information.
t 5 Speed Dial In addition to the ability to complete a call to a telephone number entered real-time, the subscriber is now able to complete to programmed Speed Dial numbers. These 9 Speed Dial numbers will be user-programmable via DTMF.
2o K ARU CALL FLOWS
Figs. 69A through 69AI depict automated response unit (ARU) call flow charts showing software implementation of the directline MCI product described above, and are useful for a further understanding of the invention.
25 Fig. 69A depicts the starting point for processing of an ARU call. As a call initiates, it is assumed to be a guest call. If the account to which the call is directed is not currently online, the ARU in Step 69010 plays a message indicating that calls cannot be accepted for the account, and in Step 69012 disconnects the call. If the ARU detects a fax tone on the incoming call, the ARU in Step 69014 performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Fax without Annotation routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 69L.
If no fax tone is detected, the ARU in Step 69018 performs the ARU Play Greeting routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 69L. The ARL;~ then checks to see whether the subscriber has indicated an override for incoming calls. If so, in Step 69020 the ARU
performs the ARU Find Me routine, specifying a parameter of "Override." The ARU Find Me routine is described below with respect to Figs. 69E and 69F. If override has not been specif ed, the ARU in Step 69022 performs the ARI:~ Guest Menu routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 69D.
Fig. 69B depicts the ARU Play Greeting routine. If a custom greeting has been recorded, the ARU plays the custom greeting in Step 69030. Otherwise, the ARU plays a generic prerecorded greeting in Step 69032.
Fig. 69C depicts the ARU Play Temp Greeting routine. If a temporary greeting has been recorded, the ARU plays the temporary greeting in Step 69034. If a custom greeting has been recorded, the ARU plays the custom greeting in Step 69036. Otherwise, the ARU
plays a generic prerecorded greeting in Step 69038.
2o Fig. 69D depicts the ARU Guest Menu routine. In Step 69040, the ARU
presents an audible menu to the caller. In the example shown, item ' 1' corresponds to a request to speak to a subscriber; item '2' corresponds to a request to leave a voice mail message for a subscriber;
item '3' corresponds to a request to send a fax to a subscriber; and item '4' corresponds to a request to page a subscriber. In addition, a subscriber may enter his or her passcode to gain access to the ARU as a subscriber.
If the caller requests to speak to a subscriber, the ARU checks the schedule flags associated with the caller's profile. If the subscriber's profile indicates routing by schedule, the ARU in Step 69042 performs the Find Me routine of Fig. 69E and 69F, using "Sched 1 "
as the 3o parameter. If the subscriber's profile does not indicate routing by schedule, the ARU in Step 69044 performs the ARU Find Me routine using "First" as the parameter. The ARU
Find Me routine is discussed in further detail below with respect to Figs. 69E and 69F.

If the caller requests to leave a voice mail message, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber's mailbox is full. If the mailbox is full, a recorded message is played and the caller is returned to the guest menu. If the mailbox is not full, a recorded message is played advising the caller to hold while he is transferred to the ARU Voicemail routine in Step 69046.
If the caller requests to send a fax, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber's mailbox is full. If the mailbox is full, a recorded message is played and the caller is returned to the guest menu. If the mailbox is not full, a recorded message is played advising the caller to hold while he is transferred to the voice/fax routine in Step 69048.
If the caller requests to page the subscriber, the ARU in Step 69050 performs the ARU Send Page routine, which is described with respect to Fig. 69M, below.
t 5 If the caller enters a valid passcode, the ARU in Step b9052 performs the ARU User Call routine, which is described with respect to Fig. 69P, below.
Figs. 69E and 69F depict the operation of the ARU Find Me routine. As shown in Step 69060, the ARU Find me routine takes a single parameter Term_Slot, which is set by the 2o caller and used by the ARU performing the ARU Find Me routine to choose among alternative courses of action. If Term-Slot is set to "Find Me", this indicates that the ARU is to use the default method of determining the subscriber's current number. This value may be set, for example, for override or default processing. If the subscriber's profile includes schedule flags, the ARU performs the ARU Find Me routine using the "Schedt"
parameter as 25 shown in Step 69062; if not, the ARU performs the ARU Find Me routine using the first telephone number in the list of numbers for the subscriber, as shown in Step 69061.
If Term Slot is set to "Voicemail," the ARU plays a message to the caller that the subscriber has requested that the caller leave a voice mail message. If the subscriber's mailbox is not 3o full, the ARU in Step 69064 performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine, depicted in Fig. 69K. That routine returns if unsuccessful, in which case a message is played indicating that the caller should try the call later, and the caller is disconnected. Likewise, if WO _ PCT/US97I21174 the subscriber's mailbox is full, the ARU plays messages indicating that the mailbox is full and that the caller should try the call later, and the caller is disconnected.
If Term_Slot is set to "Pager," the ARU plays a message to the caller that the subscriber has requested that the caller leave a request to page the subscriber. The ARU then performs the ARU Send Page routine, which is described with respect'to Fig. 69M, below.
That routine returns if unsuccessful, in which case a message is played indicating that the caller should try the call later, and the caller is disconnected.
If Term Slot is set to any POTS ("Plain Old Telephone Service") value (such as Schedl, Sched2, First, Second, or Third), the POTS value indicates that the subscriber has specified that incoming calls be sent using the standard telephone system, and the ARU
has been directed to use the particular scheduled or selected telephone number. In Step 69070, the ARU performs the ARU Record Name routine to acquire a digital recording of the caller's 15 identification. The ARU Record Name routine is described in detail with respect to Fig. 69H, below. The ARU plays an appropriate message for the caller (e.g., "Please hold while I try to reach your party" on the first attempt, and "I am still trying to reach your party; please continue to hold" for subsequent attempts). In Step 69071, the ARU places the caller on hold and launches the call to the selected telephone number. If the call is answered by an 2o individual, the ARU in Step 69072 performs the ARU Connect Call routine, discussed below with respect to Fig. 69I. If the line is busy, the ARU in Step 69074 performs the ARU
Alternate Routing routine of Fig. 69N. If the ARU detects an answering machine, it checks to see whether the subscriber has requested that the ARU roll over to the next alternative number upon encountering an answering machine. If not, the ARU connects the call.
25 Otherwise, the ARU selects the next number in rotation to call and re-performs the ARU Find Me routine using the newly-selected number.
If there is neither a live answer, a line busy signal, nor an answering machine answer, then if Term_Slot is set to "Operator," the ARU performs the ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC
routine, 3o described below with respect to Fig. 6.9M, to transfer the call to the operator. Otherwise, the ARU selects the next telephone number, if any, and re-invokes the ARU Find Me routine with the new number. If no more numbers to check remain, the ARU in Step 69084 performs the ARU Alternate Routing routine of Fig. 69N.

Fig. 69G depicts the ARU Record Name routine. This routine is used to record the name of the caller if the subscriber has specified call screening, either by name or by name and ANI.
If the subscriber has specified call screening, the ARU checks to see whether the caller's name has been recorded on a previous pass. If not, the caller is prompted to supply a name, and the audible response is recorded in Step 69090. If the subscriber has not specified either form of call screening, the ARU Record Name routine returns without recording the caller's name.
1 o Fig. 69H depicts the ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC routine. This routine plays a prerecorded message asking the caller to hold, and then transfers the call to the operator in Step 69092.
Fig. 69I depicts the ARU Connect Call routine. If operator assistance is required to complete the call, the ARU performs the ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC routine of Fig. 83H. If the t 5 subscriber has not requested call screening, the call is connected to the subscriber. If the subscriber has selected call screening, the ARU plays a set of informational messages to the subscriber. The ARU plays "You have a call from," followed by a message identifying the caller, depending on the options chosen by the subscriber and whether a caller name had been recorded. If the name is not recorded, the identifying message 69106 gives only the ANI
2o from which the call was placed. If a name was recorded, the identifying message includes the name as in Step 69107 if the subscriber has requested screening by name, or the name and ANI as in Step 69108 if the subscriber has selected screening by name and ANI.
After prompting the subscriber with the identifying information, the ARU in Step 69110 performs the ARU Gain Acceptance routine depicted in Fig. 69J.
Fig. 69J depicts the ARU Gain Acceptance routine called from Step 69110. The ARU
checks whether the subscriber has an available mailbox that is not full. If so, the ARU
prompts the subscriber to indicate whether to take the call or to have the call directed to voice mail. If the mailbox is full or not available, the ARU prompts the subscriber whether to take 3o the call or direct the caller to call back later. If the subscriber indicates that he will take the call (e.g., by pressing '1'), the ARU connects the call in Step 69124.
Otherwise, the ARU
acknowledges the refusal with an appropriate informational message (e.g., "Your caller will be asked to leave a voice mail message" or "Your caller will be asked to try again later,"

depending on the condition of the mailbox determined in Step 69120). The ARU
disconnects the subscriber and takes the calling party off hold. The ARU plays a recording to the calling party indicating that it was unable to reach the subscriber and optionally prompting the caller to leave a voice mail message. If no mailbox is available, the caller is disconnected. If a non-full mailbox is available, the ARU in Step 69128 performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine of Fig. 69K. Following this routine, the ARU plays a message asking the caller to call back later, and disconnects.
Fig. 69K depicts the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine, which connects the caller l0 to the VFP to leave a voice mail message. The ARU attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the ARU connects the call in Step 69130. If unsuccessful, the ARU plays an error message in Step 69132 and exits. Fig. 69L
depicts the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Fax w/ or w/out Annotation routine, which connects the caller to the VFP to transmit a fax. The ARU attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the ARU connects the call in Step 69140. If unsuccessful, the ARU
plays an error message in Step 69142 and exits. The routines of Figs. 68K and 69L are similar except for the service requested of the VFP and the contents of the error message played to the caller.
2o Fig. 69M depicts the ARU Send Page routine, which initiates a call to the subscriber's paging service. In Step 69150 the ARU prompts the caller to enter the telephone number that should be provided to the addressed pager. This prompt is repeated up to three times until a callback number is received. If no callback number after three prompts, the ARU
performs the-ARU
Guest Xfer to MOTC routine, which transfers the caller to the operator. This permits a caller without DTMF-enabled equipment by which to enter .a callback to provide the number to an operator who can enter it on his or her behalf. In Step 69158, the ARU plays a recording to the caller, enabling the caller to correct a number entered in error, or to confirm that the correct number has been entered. In Step 69160, the ARU places a call to the subscriber's paging service, using the data provided by the caller to indicate to the paging service the 3o number to be displayed on the pager. If the call to the paging service is successful, the ARU
plays a message indicating success in Step 69164 and disconnects in Step 69166. If the calf to the paging service is unsuccessful, the ARU in Step 69162 plays a message indicating the failure and returns, whereupon the ARU may optionally present the caller with additional options.
Fig. 69N depicts the ARU Alternate Routing routine. The ARU performs this routine to route calls that cannot be routed to the subscriber. If the subscriber has indicated that such unrouted calls are to be routed to his or her paging service, the ARU in Step 69170 plays a recording indicating that the caller may send a page. The ARU then in Step 69172 performs the ARU Send Page routine that has been described with respect to Fig. 69M. If the page was unsuccessful, the ARU plays a message indicating the failure and disconnects the caller in Step 69174. If the subscriber has indicated that unrouted calls are to be routed to voice mail, the ARU in Step 69173 plays a recording indicating that the caller may leave a voice mail message. If the subscriber's mailbox is not full, the ARU performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine. If that routine returns, the attempt to leave the voice mail was unsuccessful, and the ARU plays a message indicating the failure and disconnects the ._ caller in Step 69184. If the mailbox is full, the ARU plays a recording informing the caller of that condition and then disconnects the caller in Step 69184. If the subscriber has indicated a "guest option," the ARU in Step 69180 performs the ARU Alternate Routing Guest Option routine of Fig. 690; otherwise the ARU disconnects the caller in Step 69182.
2o Fig. 690 depicts the ARU Alternate Routing Guest Option routine. This routine permits the guest to select whether to leave a voice mail or send a page is the subscriber is unreachable.
The ARU in Step 69190 presents the caller with a menu of available routing options, here, ' I' to leave a voice mail, and '2' to send a page. If the caller request to send a page, then the ARU in Step 69200 performs the ARU Send Page routine of Fig. 69M. If the Send Page routine fails, the ARU plays a diagnostic recording to the caller and disconnects the caller in Step 69202. If the caller requests to leave a voice mail, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber mailbox is full. If the mailbox is not full, the ARU performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine of Fig. 69K. If the routine returns, that indicates that it was not successful. In that case, or if the mailbox was full, the ARU plays a prerecorded message 3o indicating that the voicemail could not be sent, and in Step 69195 prompts the caller to indicate whether he would like to send a page instead. If the caller selects an option to send a page, the ARU performs the ARU Send Page routing in Step 69200, as if the caller had WO 98/230130 ' PCT/US97/21174 initially selected that option. If the ARU Send Page routine is not successful, the ARU plays a diagnostic message and disconnects the caller in Step 69202.
Fig. 69P depicts the main menu for the ARU User Call routine for processing a call from a subscriber. This routine is performed as Step 69052 in the ARU Guest Menu routine as depicted in Fig. 69D, if the caller enters a valid passcode. After playing an introductory welcome greeting, the ARU checks to see if the subscriber's mailbox is full.
If the mailbox is full, the ARU plays a message informing the subscriber of this condition in Step 69300.
After playing this warning, or if the mailbox is not fill, the ARU in Step 69302 plays a status to recording informing the subscriber of the number of new voicemail messages and fax messages stored for the subscriber.
In Step 69304, the ARU plays a menu for the subscriber. In the example shown, item ' 1' corresponds to a request to change call routing; item '2' corresponds to a request to send or t 5 retrieve mai l; item '3' corresponds to a request to place a call; item '4' corresponds to a request for the administration menu; and item '0' corresponds to a request to be transferred to customer service.
If the subscriber selects the option to change call routing, the ARU in Step 69310 performs 2o the ARU Change Routing routine, described below with respect to Fig. 69T.
If the subscriber selects the option to send and retrieve mail, the ARU plays a prerecorded message asking the subscriber to hold and then in Step 69312 performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Retrieve routine, described with respect to Fig. 69Q, below. If the subscriber selects the option to place a call, the ARU in Step 69314 presents the subscriber with a menu 25 querying the type of call desired to be placed. If the subscriber responds with an international or domestic telephone number, or with a previously specified speed-dial number corresponding to an international or domestic_telephone number, the ARU in Step 69316 connects the call. If the subscriber requests operator assistance, the ARU in Step 69318 performs the ARU User Xfer to MOTC routine to transfer the subscriber to the operator. If 3o the subscriber cancels the call request, the ARU returns to Step 69304. If, from the main menu presented in Step 69304, the ARU performs the Administration routine, described below with respect to Fig. 69P. If the subscriber requests customer service, the ARU
performs the ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine of Fig. 69AH, described below.

Fig. 69Q depicts the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Receive routine, which connects the subscriber to the VFP to send and retrieve voice mail messages.
The ARU
attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the ARU
connects the call in Step 69330. If unsuccessful, the ARU plays an error message in Step 69332 and exits.
Fig. 69R depicts the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Receive routine, which connects the subscriber to the VFP to manage the subscriber's distribution lists. The ARU
attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the ARU
connects the call in Step 69340. If unsuccessful, the ARU plays an error message in Step 69342 and exits.
Fig. 69S depicts the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Record Name routine, which connects the subscriber to the VFP to record the name that will be used in VFP-originated messages identifying the subscriber. The ARU attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP.
If the handshake is successful, the ARU connects the call in Step 69350. If unsuccessful, the ARU plays an error message in Step 69352 and exits. The routines of Figs. b9Q, 69R, and 69S are similar except for the service requested of the VFP and the contents of the error 2o message played to the subscriber.
Fig. 69T depicts the ARU Change Routing routine, by which the subscriber modifies the routing options associated with his or her service. In Step 69390, the ARU
presents a menu of options to the subscriber. If the subscriber selects the option for Find-Me routing, the ARU performs the ARU Change Find-Me Routing routine, described below with respect to Fig. 69U. If the subscriber selects the option for Override routing, the ARU
in Step 69400 plays a message indicating the subscriber's present overnde routing setting and in Step 69404 presents the subscriber with a menu to select a new option. If the subscriber selects a change in option, the ARU performs, as Step 69408, the ARU Program routine to set the override option as specified, by passing the parameters of "override" and the selected option. If the subscriber selects the "Cancel" option, the ARU returns to Step 69390.

wo 9sn3oso rc~r~s9~nm4 If, from the ARU Change Routing menu of Step 69390 the subscriber selects the "Alternate Routing" option, the ARU in Step 69409 plays a message indicating the subscriber's present alternate routing setting and in Step 69410 presents the subscriber with a menu to select a new option. If the subscriber selects a change in option, the ARU performs, as Step 69414, the ARU Program routine to set the alternate option as specified, by passing the parameters of "alternate" and the selected option. If the subscriber selects the "Cancel"
option, the ARU
returns to Step 69390.
If, from the Change Routing menu of Step 69390, the subscriber selects the "cancel and 1 o return" option, the ARU in Step 69412 returns to the user menu of Fig.
69P.
Fig. 69U depicts the ARU Change Find-Me Routing routine. In Step 69420, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber's Find-Me routing is by schedule. If not, in Step 69422, the ARU plays a message indicating that the routing is set to attempt three successive telephone ~ 5 numbers, and in Step 69424 performs the ARU Change 3-Number Sequence routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 69V. If the subscriber's Find-me routing is by schedule, the ARU in Step 69426 plays a message indicating that the subscriber's Find-Me routing is currently set by schedule, and in Step 69428 presents the subscriber with a Change Schedule Routing menu. If the subscriber selects the option to change to 3-Number routing, the ARU
zo in Step 69430 plays a-message that the routing is set to 3-Number sequence and in Step 69432 performs the ARU Change 3-number Sequence routine of Fig. 69V. If the subscriber selects the Save and Continue option, the ARU in Step 69434 plays a message that the subscriber's Find-Me routing is set to routing by schedule, and in Step 69436 performs the ARU Change Routing routine. Step 69436 and the ARU Change Routing routine are also 25 performed if the subscriber selects the option to cancel and return.
Fig. 69V depicts the ARU Change 3-Number Sequence routine, which permits the subscriber to alter contents and order of the three alternate numbers used by the ARU
Find-Me routine of Fig. 69E and 69F. In Step 69440, the ARU presents the subscriber with a menu of 30 options. If the subscriber selects an option to change one of the three telephone numbers, the ARU in Step 69442 plays a recorded message indicating the current setting for the number, and then in Step 69444 performs the Program routine, passing to the routine a parameter identifying the number to be changed and indicating the POTS number to which it is to be WO 98/23080 ' PCT/US97/Z1174 changed. The ARU then returns to Step 69440. If the subscriber selects an option to review the current settings, the ARU in Step 69446 plays a series of messages disclosing the settings for each of the three numbers. The ARU then returns to Step 69440.
If the subscriber selects an option to change the schedule routing, the ARU in Step 69450 checks whether the subscriber is eligible for schedule routing. If so, in Step 69454 the ARU
plays a message indicating that the Find-Me routing is set to the subscriber's schedule and in Step 69456 toggles the schedule setting to enable it. After toggling the setting, the ARU in Step 69450 returns to the ARU Change Routing routine of Fig. 69T. If schedule routing is not an option for this subscriber, the ARU plays a diagnostic message indicating that schedule routing is not available and that the subscriber may contact Customer Service to obtain the option. The ARU then returns to Step 69440.
If the subscriber selects an option indicating cancel and return, the ARU
returns to the ARU
t 5 Change Routing routine of Fig. 69T.
Fig. 69W depicts the ARU Administration routine. In Step 69460, the ARU
provides the subscriber with a menu of options. In the example shown, item ' 1 ' corresponds to a request to maintain the subscriber's broadcast or speed-dial lists; item '2' corresponds to a request to 2o record a greeting; and item '3' corresponds to a request to activate or deactivate features. If the subscriber requests list maintenance the ARU, in Step 69462 presents the subscriber with a menu of options. If the subscriber selects an option to maintain his or her broadcast lists, the ARU in Step 69464 performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Distribution Lists routine of Fig. 69R. After performing that routine, the ARU in Step 69468 performs the 25 ARU Lists routine of Fig. 69W. If the subscriber selects the option to maintain the speed-dial list, the ARU in Step 69470 performs the ARU Change Speed-Dial Numbers routine of Fig.
69X. If the subscriber selects an option to cancel and return, the ARU returns to Step 69460.
If, in response to the menu presented in Step 69460, the subscriber selects an option to record 3o greetings, the ARU in Step 69474 presents the subscriber with a menu of options. In the example depicted, item ' 1 ' corresponds to a request to modify the subscriber's welcome message; item '2' corresponds to a request to modify the name associated with subscriber's mailbox. If the subscriber selects the option to modify the welcome message, the ARU in Step 69476 performs the ARU Play Greeting routine of Fig. 69B to play the current welcome message, and in Step 69478 performs the ARU Change Greeting routine of Fig.
69Y. If the subscriber selects an option to modify the mailbox name, the ARU plays a message requesting the subscriber to hold and in Step 69480 perform the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Mailbox Name routine, described previously with respect to Fig.
69S. After performing this routine, the ARU returns to Step 69474. If the subscriber) in response to the menu presented in Step 69474, indicates that the request to modify greetings should be canceled (e.g., by pressing the asterisk button), the ARU returns to Step 69460.
If, in response to the menu presented in Step 69460, the subscriber selects an option to activate or deactivate features, the ARU in Step 69484 performs the ARU
Feature Activation routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 69Z. If the subscriber instead indicates that the request to modify greetings should be canceled (e.g., by pressing the asterisk button), the ARU returns to the ARU User Menu routine, which is depicted as Step 69304 in Fig. 69P.
Fig. 69X depicts the ARU Change Speed Dial Numbers routine. In Step 69490, the ARU
provides the subscriber with a menu of options corresponding to particular speed dial numbers. For example, item ' 1' corresponds to the first speed dial number, item "2' -corresponds to the second speed-dial number, etc., through item '9', which corresponds to the 2o ninth speed-dial number. When the subscriber selects one of these options, the ARU in Step 69492 plays a message indicating the current setting for the selected speed-dial number. In Step 69494, the ARU performs the ARU Program routine, described below with respect to Fig. 69AA, specifying parameters of "Spd_Dial n" to indicate the speed dial number to being programmed (where n is replaced by a digit corresponding to the number of the addressed speed dial button) and the POTS number to which the specified speed dial number is to be set. The ARU then returns to Step 69490. If the subscriber selects an option (indicated in the example as an asterisk) to cancel the Change Speed Dial Numbers request, the ARU returns to Step 69462 as depicted in Fig. 69W.
y 3o Fig. 69Y depicts the ARU Change Greeting routine. In Step 69500, the ARU
presents a menu to the subscriber corresponding to available options. For example, item '1' corresponds to a request to record a custom greeting, and item '2' corresponds to a request to use the standard system greeting. If the subscriber selects the option to record a custom greeting, the wo 9snn~oso Pcr~s9~nma ARU in Step 69502 presents a menu of options related to the customized greetings. In the example shown, item ' 1 ' corresponds to a request to review the present contents of the subscriber's custom greeting and item '2' corresponds to a request to replace the currently recorded custom greeting with a new recorded custom greeting. The octothorp ('#') corresponds to a request to save the contents of the greetings, and the asterisk ('*') corresponds to a request to cancel and return.
If the subscriber selects an option to review the present contents of the subscriber's custom greeting, the ARU in Step 69504 performs the ARU Play Temp Greeting routine, previously described with respect to Fig. 69C, and returns to Step 69502. If the subscriber selects an option to replace the currently recorded custom greeting with a new recorded custom -greeting, the ARU in Step 69506 prompts the subscriber to begin recording the new greeting and in Step 69506 records the new greeting. After recording the greeting, the ARU returns to Step 69502. After recording a greeting, a subscriber may request that the newly recorded ~ s greeting be saved. If the subscriber selects saving the greeting, the ARU
in Step 69510 saves the recorded greeting to disk, overwriting the previous contents of the greeting file, and in Step 69514 plays a message indicating that the new greeting has been stored.
After storing the greeting, the ARU performs the ARU Administration routine previously described with respect to Fig. 69W. If, in response to the menu presented by the ARU in Step 69502, the 2o subscriber cancels the request to modify greetings, the ARU in Step 69518 performs the ARU
Greetings routine, previously described with respect to Fig. 69W.
If, in response to the menu presented in Step 69500, the subscriber selects an option to use the system greeting (i.e., a default greeting that does not identify the subscriber), then the 25 ARU in Step 69520 erases any previously-recorded greeting and in Step 69522 plays a prerecorded message that callers will now hear the system greeting instead of a personalized greeting. The ARU then returns in Step 69525 to the ARU Administration routine, previously described with respect to Fig. 69W. The ARU also returns in Step 69525 if the subscriber selects an option to cancel and return.
Fig. 69Z depicts the ARU Feature Activation routine. In Step 69530, the ARU
presents a menu to the subscriber corresponding to available options. For example, item '1' corresponds to a request to set the Call Screening option: item '2' corresponds to a request to activate or deactivate a pager recipient; option '3' corresponds to an request to set pager notification; and option '4' corresponds to a request to activate or deactivate an account. If the subscriber selects the call screening option, the ARU in Step 69532 plays a recording indicating the current setting of the call screening option. In Step 69534, the ARU presents the subscriber with a list of options relating to call screening. In this example, item '1' corresponds to a request to select screening by ANI (telephone number) only;
item '2' corresponds to a request to select screening by name only; item '3' corresponds to select screening by both AM and name; and item '4' corresponds to a request to turn call screening off completely. If the subscriber selects one of these options, the ARU in Step 69536 I o performs the ARU Program routine, described below with respect to Fig.
69AA, passing it a first parameter to indicate that the screening option is desired to be altered, and a second parameter indicating the value to which the option should be set. Following Step 69536, the ARU returns to Step 69530. Likewise, if the subscriber selects a cancel and return option in Step 69534, the ARU returns to Step 69530.
If the subscriber selects an option to activate or deactivate a pager, the ARU
in Step 69538 plays a recorded message indicating the new status of the pager notification option. In Step 69540, the ARU toggles the current status of the pager option (i.e., enables the option if it is currently disabled, or disables the option on if it is currently enabled).
After the toggle, the 2o ARU returns to Step 69530.
If the subscriber selects the pager notification option, the ARU in Step 69542 plays a recording indicating the current setting of the call screening option. In Step 69544, the ARU
presents the subscriber with a list of options relating to pager notification.
In this example, item '1' corresponds to a request to select notification by pager only of incoming voicemails;
item '2' corresponds to a request to select notification by pager only of incoming faxes; item '3' corresponds to select request to select notification by pager both for incoming voicemails and for incoming faxes; and item '4' corresponds to a request to turn call pager notification completely. If the subscriber selects one of these options, the ARU in Step 69546 performs 3o the ARU Program routine, described below with respect to Fig. 69AA, passing it a first parameter to indicate that the pager notification option is desired to be altered, and a second parameter indicating the value to which the option should be set. Following Step 69546, the ARU returns to Step 69530. Likewise, if the subscriber selects a cancel and return option in Step 69544, the ARU returns to Step 69530.
If the subscriber selects an option in Step 69530 to activate or deactivate his or her account, the ARU in Step 69550 plays a recorded message indicating the new account status. In Step 69552, the ARU toggles the current status of the account option (i.e., activates the option if it is currently deactivated, or deactivates the option on if it is currently activated). After the toggle, the ARU returns to Step 69530.
1 o If the subscriber in Step 69530 selects the cancel and return option, the ARU returns to the ARU Administration routine, described above with respect to Fig. 69W.
Fig. 69AA depicts the ARU Program routine, which is performed by the ARU to set options selected by the subscriber. As shown in Step 69560, the Program routine takes as input two 15 parameters: Term Slot, which identifies the option whose value is being altered, and Term, whose value indicates the value to which the option addressed by Term_Slot is being set. In Step 69562, the ARU checks the type of value specified in Term. If the term value is a POTS
identifier (i.e. a telephone number, such as a telephone number being programmed into a speed-dial number, as in Step 69494 in Fig. 69X), the ARU in Step 69564 prompts the 2o subscriber to enter a POTS number. If the subscriber enters a domestic or international number, or an option (' 1' in the example shown) to erase a previously stored POTS value, the ARU in Step 69566 plays a message indicating the new setting to which the addressed slot will be changed. In Step 69568, the ARU prompts the subscriber to correct the number by reentering a new number, to confirm the request, or to cancel the request. If the subscriber 25 selects the option to correct the number, the ARU returns to Step 69564. If the subscriber confirms the request, the ARU in Step 69570 stores the Term parameter value as the variable addressed by the Term Slot parameter. If the subscriber cancels the request, the ARU returns to the calling routine in Step 69572. The ARU also returns to the calling routine in Step 69572 if the subscriber selects a cancel option when prompted for a POTS
number in Step 30 ' 69564.
If the Term value is not a POTS identifier, the ARU in Step 69580 plays a message that informs the subscriber that the addressed option is about to be changed. In Step 69582, the ARU prompts the subscriber to confirm or cancel the request. If the subscriber opts to confirm the request, the ARU in Step 69584 stores the Term parameter value as the variable addressed by the Term_Slot parameter and returns to the calling routine in Step 69572. If the subscriber cancels the request, the ARU returns to the calling routine in Step 69572 without storing the value.
Fig. 69AI depicts the ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine. In Step 69592, the ARU
plays a prerecorded message to the subscriber asking the subscriber to hold.
In Step 69594, the ARU then transfers the subscriber to customer service.
Fig. 69AB depicts the ARU Validate Guest Entry routine. This routine is used by the ARU to determine whether an attempt by a guest to use the VFl' guest facilities is valid. The ARU
permits up to 3 attempts for the guest to enter his or her identification information. For the first two invalid attempts, the ARU, in Step 69610, returns a status that the guest entry was invalid.
~ 5 On a third attempt, the ARU in Step 69615 performs the ARU Find-Me routine of Figs. 69E and 69F. If a guest entry was received, the ARU in Step 69617 checks to see whether a guest entry was one of the available choices on the applicable menu. If not, the ARU in Step 69620 plays a recorded message that the guest entry option is not available. If this is the third invalid entry, the ARU in Step 69624 performs the ARU Guest Xfer to MTOC routine of Fig. 69H. If it is the 2o first or second invalid entry, the routine in Step 69622 returns with an indication that the guest entry was invalid. If the ARU determines in Step 69617 that the guest entry was a proper menu option, it returns a valid status in Step 69626.
Fig. 69AC depicts the ARU Validate User Entry routine, which is used by the ARU to validate 25 an attempt by a subscriber to use subscriber services of the VFP. If no user entry is received, the ARU in Step 69630 plays a diagnostic message that no entry was received. If an entry was received, the ARU checks in Step 69634 whether the menu to which the subscriber was responding includes an option for user entry. If so, the .ARU returns a valid status in Step 69636.
If not, the ARU in Step 69638 plays a diagnostic message that that option is not available. If 3o either no entry was received or the entry was not valid for the menu, the ARU in Step 69632 checks to see whether this is the third failure to specify subscriber information. If so, the ARU
in Step 69640 performs the ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine of Fig 89AI. If this is the first or second failed entry, the ARU returns an invalid status in Step 69642.

Fig. 69AD depicts the ARU Validate Passcode Entry routine, which is used by the ARU to authenticate a passcode entered by a subscriber. In Step 69650, the ARU checks to see whether the passcode enters matches the passcode for the specific subscriber. If so, in Step 69652 the ARU returns with a valid status. If the entry is not valid, the ARU in Step 69654 plays a recorded message that the entry is not valid. The ARU allows two attempts to specify a valid passcode. In Step 69656, the ARU checks to see whether this is the second attempt to enter a passcode. If this is the second attempt, the ARU in Step 69660 performs the ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine, which is described above with respect to Fig. 69AI.
If this is not the 1 o second-failure, the ARU in Step 69658 prompts the subscriber to enter a valid passcode and returns to Step 69650.
Fig. 69AE depicts the ARU Validate Completion routine, used by the ARU to validate the entry of a valid telephone number. In Step 69670 the ARU checks to see whether a valid user entry ~ 5 had been received. If not, the ARU checks to see if this is the third invalid entry attempted. If not, the ARU in Step 69672 returns an indicator that no valid entry was received. If this is the third attempt, in Step 69674, the ARU plays a message and in Step 69676 performs the ARU
Xfer User to MTOC routine, which is described above with respect to Fig. 69H.
2o If a valid user entry was received, the ARU checks to see whether a telephone number entered begins with "011." If so, the ARU in Step 69680 performs the ARU Validate International Completion routine of Fig. 69AF. In Step 69682, the ARU checks to see whether the domestic terms flag has been set by the subscriber. If not, the ARU in Step 69684 plays a diagnostic message that domestic calls are not available, and proceeds to Step 69671. In Step 69686, the 25 ARU checks to see whether a ten-digit number was entered, and in Step 69688 checks to see whether a valid MPA-Nxx number was entered. If number entered was not a ten-digit valid MPA-Nxx number, the ARU in Step 69690 plays a diagnostic message and proceeds to Step 69671. In Step 69690, the ARU checks to see whether NADP blocking is effective for this subscriber, and in Step 69692, the ARU checks to see whether 976 blocking is effective for this 30 subscriber. If either blocking is effective, the ARU in Step 69694 plays a diagnostic message indicating that calls to the addressed number are blocked and proceeds to Step 69671.
Otherwise, the ARU in Step 69696 returns with a status that the number entered is valid.

Fig. 69AF depicts the ARU Validate International Completion routine. In Step 69700, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber is configured to place international calls. If not, the ARU plays a diagnostic message in Step 69702. In Step 69704, the ARU
checks to see whether the number entered is syntactically valid as an international dialing number. If not, the ARU in Step 69706 plays a diagnostic message. In Step 69708, the ARU
checks to see whether Cset blocking will block the specified number. If so, the ARU in Step 69710 plays a diagnostic message. If no error conditions were found, the ARU returns a valid status in Step 69712. If errors were found the ARU in Step 69713 returns an invalid status.
If three failed attempts have been made to enter a number, the ARU plays a status message in Step 69714 to and transfers the subscriber to the operator in Step 69716.
Fig. 69AG depicts the ARU Validate POTS Programming routine, used by the ARU
to ensure that only a valid telephone number is stored for use by call routing. In Step 69720 the ARU
checks to see whether a valid user entry had been received. If not, the ARU
checks to see if this 15 is the third invalid entry attempted. If not, the ARU in Step 69722 returns an indicator that no valid entry was received. If this is the third attempt, in Step 69676 performs the ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine, which is described above with respect to Fig.
69AI.
If a valid user entry was received, the ARU checks to see whether a telephone number entered 2o begins with "0I 1." If so, the ARU in Step 69730 performs the ARU Validate International Completion routine of Fig. 69AF. In Step 69732, the ARU checks to see whether the domestic terms flag has been set by the subscriber. If not, the ARU in Step 69734 plays a diagnostic message that domestic calls are not available, and proceeds to Step 69721. In Step 69736, the ARU checks to see whether a ten-digit number was entered, and in Step 69738 checks to see 25 whether a valid MPA-Nxx number was entered. If neither was entered, the ARU
in Step 69740 plays a diagnostic message and proceeds to Step 69721. In Step 6975(1, the ARU
checks to see whether 976 blocking is effective for this subscriber. If'so, the ARU in Step 69754 plays a diagnostic message indicating that calls to the addressed number are blocked and proceedsto Step 69721. Otherwise, the ARU in Step 69756 returns with a status that the number entered is 3o valid.
Fig. 69AH depicts the ARU Validate International Programming routine used by the ARU to assure that only a valid telephone number is stored for use by call routing.
In Step 69760, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber is configured to place international calls. If not, the ARU plays a diagnostic message in Step 69762. In Step 69764, the ARU
checks to see whether the number entered is syntactically valid as an international dialing number. If not, the ARU in Step 69766 plays a diagnostic message. In Step 69768, the ARU
checks to see whether Cset blocking will block the specified number. If so, the ARU in Step 69770 plays a diagnostic message. If no error conditions were found, the ARU returns a valid status in Step 69772. If errors were found, the ARU in Step 69773 returns an invalid status.
If three failed attempts have been made to enter a number, the ARU plays a status message in Step 69774 and transfers the subscriber to the operator in Step 69776.
Figs. 70A through 70S depict automated console call flow charts showing software implementation of the directline MCI product described above and are useful for a further understanding of the invention. A console call flow differs from an ARU call flow in that the console, while automated, is manned by an individual who may act in response to requests -, I S made by a caller. This permits a caller without DTMF-enabled equipment to utilize the product. DTMF data provided by the caller will be processed, but the availability of a human operator permits many of the available operations to be performed without the use of DTMF
input. Data may be provided by the caller by directly entering it on a keypad, if any, or it may be entered by the human operator in accordance with voice responses provided by the 2o caller. -Fig. 70A depicts the starting point for processing of an automated console call into an account. As a call initiates, it is assumed to be a guest call. If the account is not currently online, the automated console in Step 70010 plays a message indicating that calls cannot be 25 accepted for the account. Unless the caller indicates to the operator that he has a passcode, the console in Step 70012 disconnects the call. If the caller provides the operator with a passcode, the operator in Step 70014 initiates the Console Validate Passcode routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 74K.
3o If the account is currently online, the console checks to see whether the subscriber has indicated an override for incoming calls. If so, the console routes the call to the operator in Step 70018. If the caller is generating a fax tone, the console in Step 70024 performs the Console Fax Tone Detected routine, described below with respect to Fig. 705.
If the caller provides the operator with a passcode, the operator in Step 70026 initiates the Console Validate Passcode routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 70K.
Otherwise, the call is processed as an incoming call for the subscriber, and the console in Step 70020 performs the Console Find Me routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 70BC.
The console supplies the ''override" parameter to the Console Find Me routine invocation.
If override has not been specified, the console in Step 70030 presents an audible menu to the caller. In the example shown, item '1' corresponds to a request to speak to a subscriber; item '2' corresponds to a request to leave a voice mail message for a subscriber;
item '3' corresponds to a request to send a fax to a subscriber:; and item '4' corresponds to a request to page a subscriber. In_addition, a subscriber may provide his or her passcode to gain access to the console as a subscriber.
If the caller requests to speak to a subscriber, the console in Step 70032 checks the schedule ~ 5 flags associated with the caller's profile. If the subscriber's profile indicates a schedule, the console in Step 69034 performs the Console Find Me routine of Figs. 70B and 70C, using "Sched 1" as the parameter. If the subscriber's profile does not indicate a schedule, the console in Step 69036 performs the Console Find Me routine using "First" as the parameter.
The Console Find Me routine is discussed in further detail with respect to Figs. 70B and 70C, 2o below.
If the caller requests to leave a voice mail message, the console in Step 70040 performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest routine, described below with respect to Fig.
70E. If the caller requests to send a fax, the console in Step 70042 performs the Console Xfer to 25 Voice/Fax Guest w/ or w/out Annotation routine, describe below with respect to Fig. 70F.
After performing this routine, the console returns to the guest menu in Step 70030. If the caller requests to leave a voice mail message, the console in Step 70040 performs the Console Send Page routine, described below with respect to Fig. 70G. After performing any of the routines of Steps 70040, 70042 or 70044, the console returns to the guest menu in Step 30 70030.
If the caller provides a passcode, the console in Step '70046 performs the Console Validate Passcode routine, which is described with respect to Fig. 70K, below. If the console detects a fax tone on the incoming call, the console in Step 70048 performs the Console Fax Tone Detected routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 705.
Figs. 70B and 70C depict the operation of the Console Find Me routine. As shown in Step 70060, the Console Find Me routine takes a single parameter Term_Slot, which is set by the caller and used by the console to choose among alternative courses of action.
If Term Slot is set to "Find Me", this indicates that the console is to use the default method of determining the subscriber's current number. This value may be set, for example, for overnde or default processing. If the subscriber's profile includes schedule flags, the console performs the o Console Find Me routine using the Sched 1 parameter as shown in Step 70062;
if not, the console performs the Find Me routine using the first telephone number in the list of numbers for the subscriber, as shown in Step 70061.
If Term_Slot is set to "Voicemail," the console plays a message to the caller that the subscriber has requested that the caller leave a voice mail message, and in Step 70074 performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine, as depicted in Fig. 70E. That routine returns if unsuccessful, in which case a message is played indicating that the caller should try the call later, and the caller is disconnected in Step 70075.
2o If Term_Slot is set to "Pager," the console plays-a message to the caller that the subscriber has requested that the caller leave a request to page the subscriber. The console then performs the Console Send Page routine, which is described with respect to Fig. 70G, below.
That routine returns if unsuccessful, in which case a message is played indicating that the caller should try the call later, and the caller is disconnected in Step 70066.
If Term_Slot is set to any POTS value (such as Schedl, Sched2, First, Second, or Third) that indicates that the subscriber has specified that incoming calls are to be sent using the standard telephone system, and the console has been directed to use the particular scheduled or selected telephone number. In Step 70070, the console performs the Console Record Name 3o routine to acquire a digital recording of the caller's identification. The Console Record Name routine is described in detail with respect to Fig. 70H, below. The console in Steps 70073 and 70075 plays an appropriate message for the caller (e.g., "Please hold while I try to reach your party" on the first attempt, and "I am still trying to reach your party;
please continue to hold" for subsequent attempts). _ If the call is answered by an individual, the console in Step 70072 performs the Console s Connect Call routine, which is discussed below with respect to Fig. 70D, to connect the caller. If the call is answered by an answering machine, the console in Step 70090 checks to see whether the subscriber has requested that the console roll over to the next alternative number upon encountering an answering machine. If not, the console in Step 70094 connects the call. If the subscriber has selected rollover, the console selects the next number in rotation to call and re-performs the Console Find Me routine using the newly-selected number, as shown in steps 70081, 70082 and 70083. -If the line called is busy, or if no more numbers to check remain, the console in Step 70074 performs the Console Alternate Routing routine of Fig. 70I.
Is Fig. 70D depicts the Console Connect Call routine. I f the subscriber has not requested call screening, the console in Step 70100 connects the call to the subscriber. If the subscriber has selected call screening, the console in Step 70104 plays an informational message to the subscriber, identifying the caller by name and by ANI, if available. If the subscriber opts to 2o take the call, the console in Step 70106 takes the caller off hold and in Step 70108 plays a message indicating that the call is being connected, which it performs in Step 70110. If the subscriber declines to take the call, the console in Step 70114 takes the caller off hold and in Step 70118 plays a recording to the calling party indicating that it was unable to reach the subscriber and optionally prompting the caller to leave a voice mail message.
If no mailbox 2s is available, the console in Step 70119 plays a diagnostic message and disconnects the caller in Step 70120. If a mailbox is available and able to receive messages, the console in Step 70128 performs the Console Xfer to VoicelFax Guest Voice routine of Fig. 70E.
After this routine has been performed, the console in Step 70119 plays a message asking the caller to call back later, and disconnects in Step 70120.
Fig. 70S depicts the Console Fax Tone Detected routine. In Step 70130, the console attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the console connects the call in Step 70132. If unsuccessful, the console disconnects the caller in Step 69132 and exits.
Fig. 70E depicts the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine, which connects the s caller to the VFP to leave a voice mail message. The console plays a status message in Step 70140 and checks to see whether the subscriber's mailbox is full in Step 70142. If the mailbox is full, the console plays a diagnostic message in Step 70144 and returns. If the mailbox is not full, the console attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP.
If the handshake is successful, the console connects the call in Step 70146. If unsuccessful, the console plays an error message in Step 70148 and returns.
Fig. 70F depicts the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Fax w/ or w/out Annotation routine, which connects the caller to the VFP to transmit a fax. The console plays a status message in Step 70150 and checks to see whether the subscriber's mailbox is full in Step 70152. If the 1 s mailbox is full, the console plays a diagnostic message in Step 70154 and returns. If the mailbox is not full, the console attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP.
If the handshake is successful, the console connects the call in Step 70156. If unsuccessful, the console plays an error message in Step 70148 and returns. The routines of Figs. 70E and 70F
are similar except for the service requested of the VFP and the contents of the error message 2o played to the caller.
Fig. 70G depicts the Console Send Page routine, which initiates a call to the subscriber's paging service. In Step 70160 the console prompts the caller to provide the telephone number that should be provided to the addressed pager. In Step 70162, the console plays a 2s status recording to the caller, asking him or her to hold while the page is sent. If the page is successfully sent, the console in Step 70164 plays a status message indicating that the page has been sent and in Step 70165 disconnects the call. If the call to the paging service is unsuccessful, the console in Step 70166 plays a message indicating the failure and returns, enabling the console to present the caller with additional options.
Fig. 70H depicts the Console Record Name routine. This routine is used to record the name of the caller if the subscriber has specified call screening, either by name or by name and ANI. If the subscriber has specified call screening by name of by name and ANI, the console in Step 70170 prompts the caller to supply a name, and records the audible response. If a fax tone is detected during the recording process, the console in Step 70172 performs the Console Fax Tone Detected routine; otherwise, the routine returns.
Fig. 70I depicts the Console Alternate Routing routine. The console performs this routine to route calls that cannot be routed to the subscriber. If the subscriber has indicated that such unrouted calls are to be routed to his or her paging service, the console in Step 70180 plays a recording indicating that the caller may send a page. If the caller elects to send a page, the console in Step 70182 performs the Console Send Page routine that has been described with to respect to Fig. 70G. If the page was unsuccessful, the console in Step 70185 plays a message indicating the failure and disconnects the caller in Step 70184. If the subscriber has indicated that unrouted calls are to be routed to voice mail, the console in Step 70183 plays a recorded message indicating that the caller may leave a voice mail message. If the caller elects to leave a voicemail, the console in Step 70186 performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine that has been described with respect to :Eig. 70E. If the voicemail was unsuccessful, the console in Step 70185 plays a message indicating the failure and disconnects the caller in Step 70184.
If the subscriber has indicated a "guest option," the console in Step 69190 performs the 2o Console Alternate Routing Guest Option routine of Fig. 70J; otherwise the console plays a diagnostic message in Step 69192 and disconnects the caller in Step 69194.
Fig. 70J depicts the Console Alternate Routing Guest Option routine. This routine permits the guest to select whether to leave a voice mail or send a page if the subscriber is unreachable. The console in Step 70200 presents the caller with a menu of available routing options; here, either to leave a voice mail or to send a page. If the caller requests to send a voice mail, then the console in Step 70202 performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine of Fig. 70E. If that routine returns a return code indicative of an unsuccessful event, then the console plays a prerecorded message indicating that the voicemail could not 3o be sent, and in Step 70204 prompts the caller to indicate whether he would like to send a page instead. If the caller, in response to either the prompt of Step 70200 or the prompt of Step 70204, requests to send a page, the console in Step 70206 performs the Console Send Page routine of Fig. 70G. If the Console Send Page routines returns (indicating the page could not WO 98/23080 PCT/US97rI1174 be sent), or if the caller declines to send a page in response to the prompt of Step 70204, the console plays a diagnostic message in Step 70208 and disconnects the caller in Step 70209. -Fig. 70K depicts the Console Validate Passcode Entry routine, which is used by the console to authenticate a passcode provided by a subscriber. In Step 70220, the caller is prompted for a passcode. In Step 70224, the console checks to see whether the passcode provided matches the passcode for the specific subscriber. If so, in Step 70226 the console performs the Console User Call routine, described below with respect to Fig. 70L. The console allows two attempts to specify a valid passcode. In Step 70228, the console checks to see whether this is the second failed attempt to provide a passcode. If this is the second attempt, the console in Step 70232 informs the caller that the passcode is not valid, and offers to connect the caller to customer service. If the caller elects not to be connected to customer service, the caller is disconnected in Step 70234. If this is the first failed attempt, the console in Step 70230 prompts the subscriber to provide a valid passcode and returns to Step 70224.
is Fig. 70L depicts the Console User Call routine. In Step 70240, the console checks to see whether the subscriber's mailbox is full. If so, in Step 70242, the console plays a warning message to the subscriber. Regardless of whether the mailbox is full, the console in Step 70244 plays a status message for the subscriber informing the subscriber of the number of 2o voicemail messages and faxes in the mailbox. On Step 70246, the console provides a menu of options to the subscriber. In the example shown, option '1' corresponds to a request to send or retrieve mail; '2' corresponds to a request to place a call; and '3' corresponds to a request to exit. If the subscriber selects the option to send or retrieve mail, the console in Step 70248 plays a hold message and then performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax 25 Subscriber Send/Retrieve routine of Fig. 70M. After that routine has completed, the console again returns to Step 70246. If the subscriber selects an option to place a call, the console performs the Console Outbound Calling routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 70N. If the subscriber selects the Exit Programming option, the console disconnects the call.
Fig. 70M depicts the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Receive routine, which connects the subscriber to the VFP to send and retrieve voice mail messages.
The console attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the console connects the call in Step 70250. If unsuccessful, the console plays an error message in Step 70252 and exits.
Fig. 70N depicts the Console Outbound Calling routine, by which a subscriber may place an outgoing call. In Step 70260, the console checks to see whether the subscriber is configured to place international calls. If so, the console in Step 70262 enables the international call key, enabling non-domestic calls to be made. In Step 70264, the subscriber is prompted for a telephone number. The console connects the subscriber to the outgoing call in Step 70268.
Fig. 700 depicts the Console Validate Guest Entry routine. This routine is used by the console to determine whether an attempt by a guest to use the VFP guest facilities is valid. The console in Step 70270 checks to see whether a guest entry was one of the available choices on the applicable menu. If not, the entry is not accepted, and the console maintains the same menu, as shown in Step 70272. If guest entry is a proper menu option, the console returns a valid status in I5 Step 70274.
Fig. 70P depicts the Console Validate User Entry routine, which is used by the console to validate an attempt by a subscriber to use subscriber services of the VFP. The console in Step 70280 checks to see whether user entry is one of the available choices on the applicable menu.
2o If not, the entry is not accepted, and the console maintains the same menu, as shown in Step 70282. If user entry is a proper menu option, the console returns a valid status in Step 70284.
Fig. 70Q depicts the Console Validate Completion routine, used by the console to validate the entry of a valid telephone number. In Step 70292, the console checks to see whether the 25 domestic terms flag has been set by the subscriber. If not, the console in Step 70294 plays a diagnostic message that domestic calls are not available, and in Step 70310 returns with an indication that the number provided is not valid. In Step 70296, the console checks to see whether a ten-digit number was provided, and in Step 70298 checks to see whether a valid MPA-Nxx number was provided. If number provided was not a ten-digit valid MPA-Nxx 3o number, was provided, the console in Step 70302 plays a diagnostic message and in Step 70310 returns with an indication that the number provided is not valid. In Step 70304, the console checks to see whether NADP blocking is effective for this subscriber, and in Step 70306, checks to see whether 976 blocking is effective for this subscriber. If either form of blocking is effective, the console in Step 70308 plays a diagnostic message indicating that calls to the addressed number are blocked and in Step 70310 returns with an indication that the number provided is not valid. Otherwise, the console in Step 70312 returns with a status that the number -provided is valid.
Fig. 70R depicts the Console Validate International Completion routine. In Step 70322, the console checks to see whether the subscriber is configured to place international calls. If not, the console plays a diagnostic message in Step 70324 and in Step 70340 returns with an indication that the number provided is not valid. In Step 70326, the console checks to see to whether the number begins with the "011" prefix indicating an international number, and in Step 70327, the console checks to see whether the number provided is syntactically valid as an international dialing number. If the number does not begin with "011" or is not syntactically valid, the console in Step 70328 plays a diagnostic message and in Step 70340 returns with an indication that the number provided is not valid.
is In Step 70330, the console checks to see whether Cset blocking will block the specified number. If so, the console in Step 70332 plays a diagnostic message. If no error conditions were found, the console returns a valid status in Step 70334.
2o Implementation of the improved directline MCI product as described above has the following impacts on billing procedures. -directlineMCI domestic Bill Type: 1 s directlineMCI international Bill Type: 115 directlineMCI Call Types:
Call Call Description Type 52 Transfer to Customer Service 138 User Call Completion 139 User Administration Call 140 Guest termination to programmed number 141 Guest termination to voicemail 142 Guest termination to billing number (and defaults, see below) 143 Pager termination 144 Message delivery 145 Guest termination to Fax 146 Guest termination to Inactive Account 147 User termination to voice i fax mail 178 Op Assist User Call Completion 179 Op Assist Guest Termination to programmed number 336 Op Assist Guest Termination to Billing number 337 Op Assist Guest Termination to voicemail 338 Op Assist Guest Termination to Pager 339 Op Assist Guest Termination to Fax 340 Op Assist User Termination to voice/fax platform Billing Detail Records and OSR's for billing, and SCAI messaging for reorigination, are populated as follows for the various directlineMCI Call Types:
Bill Type 1 I S is not applicable for BDR's generated by the VFP (Call Types 144); because all these calls are originated at the VFP, they are all be billed as domestically originated, using Bill Type 15.

Billable Call? N
Bill Type: I S OR I 15 Call Type: 146 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number*
+

Originating NumberOriginating ANI

Termination Method02 Termination Status00**

Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Account number refers to the user's 800/8xx access number ** Termination Status is suggested; other values may be more appropriate WO ~~~ PCT/US97/21174 -Billable Call N console Billable Calt N

Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 140 OR i42 Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Terminating : Blank Call Type: 179 OR 336 Number Billing Number Account number Terminating : Blank + Number 0000 Billing Number Account number +

Originating Originating 0000 Number ANI

Termination O1 Originating Originating Method Number ANI

Termination 262 Termination O1 Status Method Miscellaneous Account number Termination 262 1 Status Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a --SCAI BNOA n/a -SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a A Guest Disconnect BDR
may have a different Call Type, depending on at what point in the call flow the disconnect came fi Billable Call N Console Billable Call N
Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 141 Bill Type: I S OR I 15 Terminating : Blank Call Type: 337 Number Billing Number Account number Terminating : Blank + Number 0000 Billing Number Account number +

Originating Originating ANI 0000 Number Termination O1 Originating Originating Method Number ANI

Termination 262 Termination 01 Status Method Miscellaneous Account number Termination 262 1 Status Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous , Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Billable Call N ~ ~ console Billable Call N
Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 145 Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Terminating Number:Blank Call Type: 339 Billing Number Account number Terminating Number:
+ Blank 0000 Billing Number Account number - +

Originating NumberOriginating 0000 ANI

Termination MethodO1 Originating NumberOriginating ANI

Termination Status262 Termination MethodO1 Miscellaneous Account number Termination Status262 I

Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Billable Call N Console BilIabIe Call N
Bill Type: 15 OR I 15 Call Type: 140 OR 142 Bill Type: 15 OR 11 S

Terminating Number: Blank Call Type: 179 OR 336 Billing Number Account number Terminating_Number: Blank +

0000 Billing Number Account number +

Originating NumberOriginating ANI 0000 Termination MethodO1 Originating Originating ANI
Number Termination Status262 Termination O1 Method Miscellaneous Account number Termination 262 1 Status Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous --OSR-Only Flag N Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a -SCAI BNOA n/a -SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a wo 9srs3oso rcr~rs9~r~ma Billable Call? N ~C_onsole --Bi:llable Call? N

Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 145 Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Terminating Number: Fax Routing Call Type: 339 Number Terminating Number: Fax Routing Billing Number Account number Number +

0000 Billing Number Account number +

Originating Number Originating 0000 ANI

Termination Method 03 Originating Number Originating ANI-Termination Status 257 Termination Method 03 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 3 Miscellaneous 2 OSR-Only Flag N Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag N

SCAI BNOA 7C SC'.AI OIR Flag N

SC:AI BNOA 7C

ciuest termW atoon to fax - Normal Guest termination to Fax - Normal Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Console Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 145 Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Terminating : Fax Routing Call Type: 339 Number Number Terminating : Fax Routing Number Billing Number Account number Number +

0000 Billing Number Account number +

Originating Originating ANI 0000 Number Termination 00 Originating Originating ANI
Method Number Termination 257 Termination 00 Status Method Miscellaneous Account number Termination 257 I Status Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 90 OSR Entry Code 90 SCAI OIR Flag N

SCAI BNOA 7C SCAI OIR Flag N

wo ~sn~oso rcrms~r~m4 Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Billable Call? Y - MatchlMerge--Bill Type: I S OR 115 Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 141 Call Type: 337 Terminating Number: Voicemail Terminating Number: Voicemail Routing Routing Number Number Billing Number Account number Billing Number Account number + +

Originating Number Originating Originating Number Originating ANI ANI

Termination Method 00 Termination Method 00 -Termination Status 257 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 90 OSR Entry Code 90 SCAI OIR Flag N SC'.AI OIR Flag N

SCAI BNOA 7C SC'.AI BNOA 7C

WO ~' PCT/US97/21174 Billable Call ? N ~ ~ Billable Call ? N
Bill Type: 15 OR 115 BiII Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 140 OR 142 Call Type: 179 OR 336 Terminating Terminating Number: Blank Number: Blank Billing NumberAccount number Billing Number Account number + +

Originating Originating ANI Originating Originating ANI
Number Number Termination 02 Termination 02 Method Method Termination 00 Termination 00 Status Status Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 I I OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a SCAI BNOA n/a WO 98/"13080 PCT1I1S97/21174 Guest Term to Closin Message Guest Term to Closin~Message - -Voicemail handshake failure Voicemail handshake failure (Console) ' Billable Call ? N Billable Call ? N

Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Bill Type: 15 OR I 15 Call Type: 14I Call Type: 337 Terminating Number: Blank Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number Billing Number Account number + +

Originating Number Originating Originating Number Originating ANI ANI

Termination Method 02 Termination Method 02 Termination Status 00 Termination Status 00 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SC'AI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a SCAI BNOA n/a handshake failure handshake failure (Console) Billable Call ? N Billable Call ? N
Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 145 Call Type: 339 Terminating Terminating : Blank Number: Blank Number Billing Number Account number Billing Number Account number + +

Originating Originating ANI Originating Originating Number Number ANI

Termination 02 Termination 02 Method Method Termination 00 Termination 00 Status Status Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 ~ ~ OSR Entry Code 08 __ SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge ~ ' Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Bill Type: 15 OR 11 S

Call Type: 142 Call Type: 336 Terminating : Billing number Terminating : Billing Number Number number Billing Number Account number Billing Number Account number + +

Originating Originating ANI Originating Originating Number Number ANI

Termination 00 Termination 00 Method Method Termination 257 Termination 257 Status Status Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous ' Miscellaneous , Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 90 ~ ' OSR Entry Code 90 SCAI OIR Flag N SCAI OIR Flag N
SCAI BNOA 7C SC'AI BNOA 7C

Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Console Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 1 I S

Call Type: 140 Bill Type: I S OR 115 Terminating Number: Programmed Call Type: 179 number Billing Number Account number Terminating Number: Programmed +

0000 number Originating Number Originating Billing Number Account number ANI +

Termination Method 00 0000 Termination Status 257 Originating Number Originating ANI
, Miscellaneous 1 Account number Termination Method 00 Miscellaneous 2 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 3 Miscellaneous 1 Account number OSR-Only Flag N Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR Entry Code 90 OSR-Only Flag N

SCAI OIR Flag N OSR Entry Code 90 SCAI OIR Flag N

WO gg~3pgp PCT/US97/21174 -Billable Call? N
Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: - 140 OR 142 Terminating Transfer Routing Number:

Number Billing Number Account number +

Originating Originating ANI
Number Termination 03 Method Termination 257 Status Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag N -41'7 WO 98/23080 _ P~~/pS97/Z1i74 I Billable Call? Y - BDR Only I I Billable Call? Y - BDR Only Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Bill Type: 15 OR I 1 S

Call Type: 143 Call Type: 338 Terminating Terminating Number: Pager Number: Pager Routing Routing Number Number Billing Number Account number Billing Number Account number + . +

Originating Originating ANI Originating Originating Number Number ANI

Termination 00 Termination 00 Method Method Termination 257 Termination 257 Status Status Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Callback number Miscellaneous Callback number OSR-Only Flag N OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a SCAI BNOA n/a WO 98/23080 PCT/US9?/211?4 User termination to voicemail User termination to voicemail - messaee - messa~ze retrieval retrieval ~Console~

Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Bill Type: I S-OR I 15 Call Type: 147 Call Type: 340 Terminating Number: Voicemail Terminating Number: Voicemail Routing Routing Number Number Billing Number Account number Billing Number Account number + +

0000 0(100 Originating Number -Originating Originating Number Originating ANI ANI

Termination Method 00 Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 80 OSR Entry Code 80 SCAI OIR Flag Y SC:AI OIR Flag Y

SCAI BNOA 7C SC:AI BNOA 7C

administration call Billable Call? N
Bill Type: 1 S OR 11 S

Call Type: 147 Terminating : Voicemail Routing Number Number Billing Number Account number +

Originating Originating ANI
Number Termination 03 Method Termination 257 Status Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous OSR-Only Fiag N

OSR Entry Code 08 ~ -SCAI OIR Flag Y

wo 9sn3oso rcTrt~s9~mma Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge ( I Killable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 138 Call Type: 178 Terminating Customer Terminating Customer Number: Number:

Input/Speed Input/Speed Dial ANI Dial ANI

Billing Number Account number Billing Number Account number + +

Originating Originating ANI Griginating Originating Number Number ANI

Termination 00 Termination 00 Method Method Termination 257 Termination 257 Status Status Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 80 ~ ~ GSR Entry Code 80 SCAI OIR Flag Y SCAI OIR Flag Y

Billable Call? N
Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 139 _ Terminating : Blank Number Billing Number Account number +

Originating Originating ANI
Number Termination 08 Method Termination 257 Status Miscellaneous Account number Miscellaneous Programmed information Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a WO ~~ PCT/US97/211'14 Subscriber Disconnect - proQrammin~ Subscriber Disconnect - No choice or at User no choice at User Menu Menu (Console) Billable Call? N Billable Call? N

Bill Type: I S OR 115 Bill Type: 15 OR I I S

Call Type: 139 Call Type: 340 Terminating Number: Biank Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number Billing Number Account number + +

Originating Number Originating Originating Number Originating ANI ANI

Termination Method O1 Termination Method O1 Termination Status 262 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Programmed Miscellaneous 2 Programmed information information Miscellaneous 3 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Billable Call? N Console Billable Call? N
Bill Type: 15 OR 1 I S

Call Type: 138 Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Terminating Number: Blank Call Type: 178 Billing Number Account number Terminating + Number: Blank 0000 Billing Number Account number +

Originating NumberOriginating ANI 0000 Termination MethodO1 Originating Originating Number ANI

Termination Status262 Termination O1 Method Miscellaneous Account number Termination 262 I Status Miscellaneous Programmed Miscellaneous Account number information Miscellaneous Programmed Miscellaneous information OSR-Only Flag N Miscellaneous OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Billable Call? N B illable Call? N

Bill Type: 70 Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 52 Call Type: 138 Terminating Number: Transfer Terminating Number: Transfer Routing Routing Number Number Billing Number Account number Billing Number Account number + +

Originating Number Originating Originating Number Originating ANI ANI

Termination Method 03 Termination Method 03 Termination Status 257 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR-Only Flag N

OSR Entry Code 08 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag N SCAI OIR Flag N

The following are the new directlineMCI scripts for the automated response unit (ARU), referencing the corresponding call flow diagram on which they appear:
Call IV ARU Text Flow Number Script Diagram Number All 73300011 Press 1.

73300022 Press 2.

73300033 Press 3.

wo 9sn3oso rcr~rs9~nma 73300044 Press 4.

73300055 Press 5.

73300066 Press 6.

73300077 Press 7.

73300088 Press 8.

73300099 Press 9.

733001010 Press 0.

733001 11 Press *.
I

7330012I2 Press #.

1 7330101I01 I'm sorry, calls are not being accepted at this time.

2 7330201201 Welcome to directlineMCI!

3 7330301301 To speak to your party ...

7330302302 To leave a voicemail message ...

7330303303 To send a fax ...

7330304304 To send a page ...

7330306306 Please hold while I transfer you to voicemail.

7330307307 I'm sorry, your party's mailbox is full 7330308308 Please hold to send a fax.

4 7330401401 Your party has requested that you leave a voicemail message.

7330403403 Your party has requested that you send a page.

7330404404 Please hold while I try to reach your party.

7330405405 am still trying to reach your party. Please I continue to hold 7330406406 am unable to reach your party at this time.
I

6 7330408408 May I please have your name?

7330409409 Please hold while I transfer you to the operator.

7 7330701701 You have a call from ...

7330702702 .. at ...

7330703703 .. an undetermined location.

7330704704 .. an international location.

8 7330801801 To accept the call ...

7330802802 To send your caller to voicemail ...

7330803803 To have your caller try again later . ..

7330805805 Your caller will be asked to leave a voicemail message.

7330806806 Your caller will be asked to try again later.

7330807807 I'm sorry, your caller has disconnected.

7330809809 Please try your call again later.

9 7330901901 I'm sorry, I am unable to access voicemail at this time.

7330902902 I'm sorry, I am unable to access faxmail at this time.

73310011001 Please enter your call-back number, followed by the # sign.

73310021002 .. will be sent 73310031003 To re-enter your call-back number ...

73310041004 To continue ...

73310061006 No entry was received.

73310071007 Thank you. Your page has been sent.

73310081008 I'm sorry, I am unable to complete your page.

73311011101 I was not able to reach your party.

11 73311021102 Please hold to send a page or try your call again later.

12 73312071207 To send a page, press 1; or, please try your call again later.

13 73313011301 Welcome to User Programming!

73313021302 Your mailbox is full. Please delete your saved messages.

73313031303 You have ...

73313041304 .. new voicemail and , ..

73313051305 .. new fax messages.

73313061306 .. no ...

73313071307 To change your call routing ...

73313081308 To send or retrieve mail ...

73313091309 To place a call ...

73313101310 For account maintenance ...

73313111311 To reach customer service from any menu ...

73313131313 Please hold to retrieve your voice and fax messages.

73313141314 For a domestic call) enter the area code and number.

73313151315 For an international call, enter 0 1 i and the number.

73313161316 Please enter the phone or speed-dial number, followed by the #
sign.

73313171317 For operator assistance 14 73314011401 I'm sorry, I am unable to access your voice/fax mailbox at this time.

73314031403 I'm sorry, I am unable to access your distribution lists at this time.

73314041404 I'm sorry, I am unable to record your mailbox name at this time.

15 73315011501 To change Find-Me routing ...

733 1502 To change override routing . ..
i 502 73315031503 To change final routing ...

73315041504 To cancel and return to the previous menu ...

73315071507 Override routing is currently set to ...

73315081508 .. voicemail.

73315091509 .. pager.

73315101510 .. your Find-Me sequence.

73315121 S Your override routing is currently turned 12 off.

73315131513 To set override routing to a telephone number ...

73315141514 To set override routing to voicemail ...

73315151515 To set override routing to your pager ...

73315161516 To set override routing to your Find-Me sequence ...

7331 1517 To turn off override routing ...

73315191519 Your final routing is currently set to ...

73315201520 .. the voicemail or pager option.

73315231523 .. a closing message.

73315251525 To set finalrouting to the voicemail or pager option ...

73315261526 To set finalrouting to your voicemail ...
~ I

73315271527 To set finalrouting to your pager ...

73315281528 To set finalrouting to a closing message ...

16 73316011601 Your Find-Me routing is set to your schedule.

73316021602 Your Find-Me routing is set to your three-number sequence.

73316041604 To change to your three-number sequence ...

73316061606 To save and continue ...

17 73317011701 To change your first number ...

73317021702 To change your second number ...

73317031703 To change your third number ...

7331 1704 To review all three numbers ...

73317051705 To change to schedule routing .. , 73317081708 Your first number is set to ...

73317091709 Your second number is set to ...

73317101710 Your third number is set to ...

73317111711 Your second number is currently not programmed.

73317121712 Your third number is currently not programmed.

73317131713 You do not have a schedule set up at this time. Please contact customer service.

18 73318011801 To create or update your lists.

73318021802 To record your greeting or mailbox name ...

73318031803 To activate or deactivate features ...

73318061806 For broadcast lists ...

73318071807 For speed-dial numbers ...

73318081808 Please hold to update broadcast lists.

73318091809 For your personal greeting ...

73318101810 For your mailbox name ...

73318111811 Please hold to record your mailbox name.

73318121812 Your current greeting; is ...

19 73319011901 To change speed-dial number ...

73319111911 Speed-dial number ...

WO 98/23080 - PCT/US97/Zll'74 73319121912 .. is set to ...

73319131913 .. is currently not programmed.

73319141914 To record a new greeting ...

73319151915 To use the system greeting ...

73319161916 Begin recording after the tone.

73319171917 To review your greeting ...

73319181918 To re-record your greeting ...

73319211921 Your callers will now hear the system greeting.

73319221922 Your new greeting has been saved.

20 73340004000 To set caller-screening ...

733400 4001 To activate or deactivate your pager ..
i .

73340024002 To set pager notification ...

73340034003 To activate or deactivate your account ...

73340054005 Caller-screening is set to ...

73340064006 Caller-screening is currently turned off.

73340074007 .. number only.

73340084008 .. name only.

73340094009 .. name and number.

73340104010 To set caller-screening to number only ...

73340114011 To set caller=screening to name only ...

73340124012 To set caller-screening to name and number ...

73340134013 To turn off caller-screening ...

733401 4015 Your callers will be given the option to S page you.

73340164016 Your callers will not be given the option to page you.

73340174017 Your account has been activated.

73340184018 Your account has been deactivated.

73340194019 You are currently being paged for ...

73340204020 .. new voicemail messages.

73340214021 .. new fax messages.

73340224022 .. new voicemail and fax messages.

73340234023 Pager notification is currently turned off.

73340244024 To be paged for voicemail messages ...

73340254025 To be paged for fax messages ...

73340264026 To be paged for voice: and fax messages ...

73340274027 To turn off pager notification ...

21 73341014101 For a domestic number, enter the area code and number.

73341024102 For an international number, enter 0 1 1 and the number.

73341034103 To erase this number ...

73341054105 To re-enter the number ...

73341074107 Your override routing; will be deactivated.

73341084108 Your override routing will be changed to ...

7334111411 Please hold for customer service.
I

73341124112 Your finalrouting will be changed to ...

73341164116 Your first number will be changed to ...

73341174117 Your second number will be erased.

73341184I Your second number will be changed to ...

73341194I Your third number will be erased.

73341204120 Your third number will be changed to ...

73341214121 This speed-dial number will be erased.

73341224122 This speed-dial number will be changed to ...

73341234123 Your caller-screening will be turned off.

73341244124 Your caller-screening will be changed to ... -73341284128 Your pager notificatian will be turned off.

73341294129 You will be paged for ...

22 7330309309 That option is not available.

23 7330102102 That entry is invalid.

7330103103 Please re-enter your passcode. -24 73344014401 I'm sorry, domestic calls are not available.

73344034403 I'm sorry, calls to that number are blocked.

25 73325012501 I'm sorry, international calls are not available.

26 73326012601 I'm sorry, you may not program a domestic number.

WO 98/23080 PCT/US9~/21174 -32701 2701 ~I'm sorry, you may not program an i The following are the new directlineMCI scripts for the Console Application:
Call Console Text Flow Script DiagramNumber 1 14160 Welcome to directlineMCI

Calls are not currently being accepted on this account {Courtes, Close}

22008 MCIOperator!

How may I help you reach your party?

22005 MCIOperator!

{Press User Prog if caller is account owner}

2 22033 Your party has requested that you leave a voicemail message;

please hold { Procedure Cal l }

22034 Your party has requestedthat you send a page { Procedure Cal l }

22037 Please try your call agair~iater {Courtesy Close}

3 22031 Please hold while I try to reach your party-{ Procedure Call }

15848 MCIOperator!

Please hold while I try to reach your party { Proc Call }

15844 am still trying to reach your party; please I continue to hold { Proc Call }

15849 MCIOperator!

I am still trying to reach your party; please continue to hold {Proc Call}

33000 {Press YES if answered, BUSY if busy, NO
if no answer after 4-5 rings, ANS MACH for Answer Machine.

4 22036 This is the MCI Operator.

You have a call from NAME and/or ANI; would you like to speak to your caller?

15845 I'm sorry, I'm unable to reach your party at this time { Proc Call }

22032 Thank you; your call is connected {Proc Call}

7115 Please hold while I transfer you to voicemail {Proc Call}

22900 I'm sorry, your party's voice mailbox is full { Procedure Call }

22104 'm sorry, I'm unable to access voicemail I at this time {Procedure Call}

22340 Please hold to send a fax {Procedure Call}

22105 'm sorry, I'm unable to access faxmail at I this time { Procedure Call }

6 15865 What callback number would you like to send?

15866 MCIOperator!

What callback number would you like to send?

22375 ease hold while your page is sent --{Procedure Call}

15863 Your page has been sent. Thank you!

{Disconnect}

15693 'm sorry; I'm unable to complete your page I

{ Procedure Call }

WO 98/Z3080 PGT/US97/211'14 22035 What is your name, please?

7 15860 I'm sorry, I'm unable to reach your party at this time; would you like to send a page?

22040 Would you like to send a page?

15842 I'm sorry, I'm unable to reach your party at this time; please try your call again later {Courtesy}

8 22038 I'm sorry, I'm unable to reach your party at this time; would you like to leave a voicemail message, or send a page?

9 22003 May I please have your passcode?

22102 Please repeat your passcode 22017 I'm sorry; that is not a valid passcode {Offer Customer Service or disconnect}

22901 Your mailbox is full; please delete your saved messages { Procedure Call }

22902 You have X new voicemail and Y new fax messages { Procedure Call }

22400 How may I help you?

22904 Please 'hold for your voice and fax messages_ {Procedure Call}

11 22905 I'm sorry; I'm unable to access your voice / fax mailbox { Procedure Call }

22906 What number do you wish to dial?

{Enter number or 1-digit Speed Dial number}

22908 MCIOperator!

What number do you wish to dial? -{Enter number of 1-digit Speed Dial number}

22907 Thank you; please hold while your call is connected { Procedure Cal l }

13 15063 'm sorry; domestic termination are not available I

{Procedure Call}

w° rc°r~rs~nma 15053 I'm sorry ; that is not a valid domestic number { Procedure Call }

15057 I'm sorry; calls to that number are blocked {Procedure Call}

14 15061 I'm sorry; international termination are not available {Procedure Call}

15051 I'm sorry ; that is not a valid in(ernational number {Procedure Call}

16001 (Press GEN ASST to process a No D-Dial Call1 ARU impacts are described in detail below, as well as in the call flow diagrams.
User input In general, throughout the call flow, at every opportunity for user/caller input, the possibility of response delay is minimized as much as possible. Following are some examples:
During 'guest' portion of the call, the subscriber may enter '*', at which time the NIDS
Audio Server (NAS) begins to collect 6 passcode digits, applying an inter-digit timeout.
During playing of the Guest Menu, a single key pressed results in an immediate response, unless the key pressed is the '*' key, at which point the NAS collects six passcode digits _ ~ 0 During playing of any User Menu, a single key pressed results in an immediate response, except in the Outbound Call menu. Because a domestic telephone number, an international telephone number, or a Speed Dial number can be entered here, the system allows the user to press '#', which indicates the end of dialed digits. The '#' is accepted whether it's entered following a single digit entry or a string of digits, i.e. a telephone number.
At any place in the call flow where the user is able to enter a domestic or international number, the '#' key must be accepted to indicate the end of dialed digits.
This includes - during programming of the First, Second or Third Find-Me numbers, Override Routing to POTS and Speed Dial numbers.

Where possible. the ability for the user to 'power dial' is built into the call flow-. This means that , in the event that multiple keys are pressed, scripting is bypassed and the appropriate menu is reached.
One access method is supported for directlineMCI in this embodiment: 800/8xx number access, with no PIN. The PIN field in the database is defaulted to 0000.
Billed Number Screening (Fraud) Validation All directlineMCI calls received are subject to a Billed Number Screening validation, to verify that the number has not been tagged as a Fraud risk. The lookup is into Category S, Type 0; the flag checked is the Credit Card (Hot) flag. In the event that the number has been 'shut down', i.e. the Hot flag is set to 'Y', the application treats the call as an off line account, but does not allow a subscriber to access programming options.
WorldPhone Callers are able to access the directlineMCI platform via WorldPhone. In a preferred embodiment, these calls arrive at the directline platform with a pseudo-ANI in the ~ 5 Originating Number field of the SCAI message. This pseudo-ANI is associated with the specific Feature Group A (FGA) circuit on which the WorldPhone call extension was launched. In another embodiment, the true originating country information is forwarded to the directline platform; the Originating Number field is populated with the 3-digit Country Code.
2o In a preferred embodiment, the WorldPhone-originated directline call is billed as follows:
Calls originating via WorldPhone, and arriving at the directline platform with a pseudo-ANI
as the origination, are billed as domestic, using Bill Type 15. The Originating Number field in the BDR is the FGA pseudo-ANI.
In another embodiment, the call is billed as follows:
25 The ARU and Console implement code to identify whether the Originating Number field _ contains a pseudo-ANI or true origination information. If the true Country Code origination information is provided, the application refers to its configuration files, where a WorIdPhone pseudo-ANI is an optional entry. The existence of this item in the configuration file indicates to the application how the call should be billed.

WO 9~'Z30~80 PCT/pS97/21174 If the application finds a WorldPhone pseudo-ANI in its config file, the call is billed as domestic, using Bill Type I5. The Calling Number in the BDR is set to that WorldPhone pseudo-ANI, and the application instructs the bridging switch to change its Originating Number to that same pseudo-ANI.
If the application does not find the WorIdPhone pseudo-ANI in its config file, the call is billed as international, using Bill Type 1 I S, and the Originating Number information is retained in the switch record. The BDR is populated with a 10-digit string: ' 191 ' + 3-digit Country Code + '0000'.
Guest call routing is prescribed by the directlineMC1 subscriber in several ways, as described in the following paragraphs:
Blocking checks for guest termination, based on origination, are included below.
Call Routing Two options are provided to the user in defining Call Routing: the Find-Me sequence, and ~ 5 the Schedule sequence. With the exception of Schedule definition, the user has the ability to define Call Routing via DTMF.
3-Number Find-Me Sequence If the user has chosen the Find-Me sequence for his C'.all Routing, the application launches a call to the user's Primary (First) programmed number. If a live answer is received, the guest 2o caller is connected with the answering party. Call screening, described below, may be active, in which case the answering party must actively a;:cept the call before it is connected.
If the line at the First number is busy, the call is routed to the user's programmed Alternate Routing, described below. If no answer is detected after a configurable time, the application launches a call to the user's Secondary (Second) programmed number.
2s Answer treatment at the Second number is the same as for a call attempt to the First number with no answer resulting in a call attempt to the user's Tertiary (Third) number. Answer treatment at the Third number is the same, with no answer resulting in Alternate Routing.
If, at any point in this calling sequence, a termination slot is not programmed, the application skips that number in the sequence, and proceed to the next number, or Alternate Routing.

For any programmed international termination, the application looks up the terminating country code in the Country Code tables. If the Direct Dial Country flag is set to 'Y' for that _ country, the ARU transfers the call to the manual console (TTC =1 e) for processing.
2-Level Schedule Sequence s If the user has chosen the Schedule sequence for his Call Routing, the application takes the Schedule 1 Trans and Schedule 2 Trans fields to use as keys into the 800 Translation database to retrieve schedule information. From the user's two schedule translations, and using the current day and time, the First and Second Schedule numbers are determined.
A call is launched to the First Schedule number, and answer treatment is as described in the Find-Me sequence, with no answer resulting in a call attempt to the Second Schedule number.
Answer treatment at the Second Schedule number is the same, with no answer resulting in Alternate Routing.
Again, if at any point in the Schedule calling sequence, a tewminating number cannot be found, the application skips that slot in the sequence, and proceeds to the next number, or ~ s Alternate Routing.
The user's schedule is set up during Order Entry, and is not user-updatable via DTMF. At Order Entry, the user is asked to define his schedule by Date, Day of Week, Time of Day (in 30 minute increments), and by Time Zone.
Override Routing 2o The option is available, via DTMF, for the user to disable the presentation of the Guest Menu by prescribing specific routing for all guest callers. Via Override Routing, the user is able to:
route callers to a single telephone number, have callers leave a voicemail message, have callers page him, or route callers through his programmed Call Routing (Find-Me or Schedule).
2s If the user has programmed Override Routing to route to a telephone number, no answer at that number results in Alternate Routing treatment.
Alternate Routing Alternate Routing allows the user to define, via DTMF, the treatment of a caller for whom an attempt to reach the subscriber has been made, but no answer was received.
Alternate Routing options include Voicemail, Pager, Closing Message, or the Guest Option of Voicemail or Pager. The default for Alternate Routing, if not programmed, is the playing of - the Closing Message.
- - Default Routing The user is able to prescribe at Order Entry the treatment for a caller who, when presented the Guest Menu, does not respond after two attempts. The Default Routing options are: a transfer to the Operator (TTC = 67), where the Guest menu is presented again, a telephone number, with no answer resulting in Alternate Routing, Voicemail, or Call Routing (Find-Me or Schedule). The default for Default Routing, if it's not programmed, is the Operator to transfer.
Call Screening The user may choose to have Call Screening invoked, to announce all guest callers. Call Screening options include pre-programming of Name Only, ANI Only, Name and ANI, and No Call Screening. The user has the ability to program Call Screening via DTMF.
~5 When Name Only or Name and ANI screening is programmed, the caller's name is recorded If the caller does not respond to the prompt, and nothing is recorded, the system will default to ANI Only screening. When an answer is received at a terminating telephone number, the caller's Name and/or ANI is played and the answering party is asked to accept or reject the 2o call. If the call is accepted, the caller is connected. If Caller Screening includes ANI
screening, and the originating number is a Country Code, the scripts '... an international location' will be played in place of the ANI.
If the call is rejected, or no response is received from the answering party, the caller is asked to leave a voicemail message, or the Closing Message; is played, if the user has not subscribed 25 to Voicemail.
Timeout Parameters Timeout values are defined, in seconds, in the directlineMCI database for the following termination:

For this termination: Use this timeout value:

First Find-Me Primary Timeout Second Find-Me Secondary Timeout Third Find-Me Tertiary Timeout Schedule 1 Primary Timeout Schedule 2 Secondary Timeout Override Routing, if Override Timeout telephone number Default Routing, if Default Timeout telephone number These timeout values are defaulted to 25 (seconds), but the user is allowed to change them via Customer Service.
Call Connection times Call connection delays, when a guest call to a programmed termination is completed, are minimized as much as possible.
Answer detection For all call attempts to a telephone number, treatment on detection of an answering machine is defined by the Roll on Machine Detect flag (State flag, bit 9). If this flag is set to 'N', the 1 o caller is connected to the answering machine . If the flag is set to 'Y', the application routes to the next number in the calling sequence or Alternate Routing.
Current answer detection performance on the ISN is as follows: The NAS
correctly detects a live answer at 99% reliability; a machine is correctly detected at 67%
reliability.
For any Answer Detection responses not addressed specifically in this requirement, Fast-Busy for example, treatment is as described for a No Answer condition.

Prosrammed Number Validation The user has the ability to program a telephone number in his First, Second, and Third Find-Me numbers, and Override Routing. Before a number is accepted for programming, the application makes the following validation checks:
Domestic numbers The Domestic Terms flag (PIN bit 1 ) is examined to ensure that the user is authorized to program a domestic number The International Blocking database is queried, using Category 000, Type 002, and the programmed NPA, looking for a pattern match, to ensure that the programmed number is not a blocked Information/Adult Services number.
The Exchange Master is examined to determine whether the termination is an NADP number.
If so, Country Set blocking is applied. The Pseudo-Country Code (PCC) associated with the programmed number is validated against the Country Set found in the directlineMCI Property Record. If that PCC is blocked, programming to that number is not allowed.
International numbers.
The International Terms flag (PIN bit 2) is examined 1:o ensure that the user is authorized to program a international number.
The Country Set from the directlineMCI Property Record is retrieved, and the application verifies that the programmed Country Code is not blocked for that Country Set.
Blocking checks for programming guest termination are included below.
The Call Flow diagram depicts the various situations for which a transfer to the Voice/Fax Platform (VFP) is necessary. A transfer is implemented using the routing number in the Voicemail Route Number field of the customer record.
- In order to 'mask' some of the delay in call extension to the VFP) the call is extended before the 'please hold' script is played to the caller. Call extension delay is reduced additionally by removing inter-digit timeouts, as described previously. After launching a call and playing the WO 98/23080 - PCTlUS97/21174 script, the application awaits answer detection, at which time the user's directlineMCI access number (800/8xx number) is out-pulsed to the VFP, followed by a '*', then a single mode digit, which indicates to the VFP the type of transfer to process, followed by a '#'. The mode indicator is one of the values, described in the table that follows. To ensure that the information has been received and validated by the VFP, the application awaits th;, playing of two DTMF '00' tones from the VFP, then the caller is connected.
Mode Transfer type indicator 1 Guest voicemail 2 Guest fax with voice annotation 3 Guest fax without annotation 4 User voice/fax retrieval 5 User list maintenance 6 User recording of mailbox name A VFP transfer attempt is considered failed if two handshake attempts have failed. If a Guest a 0 transfer to voice or faxmail fails during Override, Default, or Alternate Routing, the guest caller is asked to try his call again later. If a Guest transfer fails on a Guest Menu choice, the menu will be presented again. If a user transfer to voice or faxmail fails, a script will be played, informing the user of the failure, and the user is returned to the previous menu.
A guest fax transfer without annotation occurs when, at the outset of the call, fax tone is detected. Fax tone detection is independent of the presentation of the welcome message, so -the length of the greeting has no effects on the reliable detection of fax tones.

WO 98/23080 PGT/US9'1/21174 -When a user accesses User Programming, the application presents the count of new voicemail messages, new fax messages, and a full mailbox me;>sage, if applicable. The application queries this information from the VFP via the VFP 'Trans Service.
The user also has the ability to define, via DTMF, whether he would like a pager notification of new voice and fax messages. Pager notification options are: Voicemail notification, Fax notification, notification of both Voicemail and Fax, and No notif cation.
Pager notification settings are stored in the Page on Vmail flag (PIN bil: 15) and Page on Fax flag (PIN bit 16).
Paging The option to page the subscriber is one of the choices presented at the guest menu. In addition, the guest may be asked to send a page, according to the user's programmed Override or Alternate Routing.
In sending a page, the application requests the callback number from the caller. The user's customer record contains the following information used in processing the page: the Pager Access Number, used in launching the call to the pager company, the user's Pager PIN, and the Pager Type, which points to a configurable dial string for communicating the page 2o information. The dial string provides the timeout value for waiting for answer detection, the delay following answer detection, the number of PIN' digits to DTMF, and any termination characters needed, for example '#'.
If a caller disconnects after entering a callback number, the page is completed and billed.
Pager types supported are as follows:
w Page ~ Pager Pager dial string Pager Access r ~ Company Number Type WO 98123080 - PCT/(TS97/21174 1 SkyTel/MTeI A 180T32R7D#ED 6019609560 2 AirTouch A180T32R7D#ED 6019609560 3 Mobile MediaA I 80T32R7D#ED6019609560 4 AirSignal/McCA 180T32R7D#ED 6019609560 aw #

American A180T32R7D#ED 6019609560 Paging #

6 Mobile Comm A180T136R6T18E 8009464646*

7 MCIPage A180T136R7T18E 8006247243*

8 MCI Word A180T136R7T18E 8006247243*

* 800-access numbers will be routed via the DAP-looparound at the brid~ins switches.
The user has the ability to enable/disable the presentation of pager as a guest menu option.
When pager is disabled, it is not presented at the Guest Menu, nor is it presented to the user 5 in programming Override or Alternate Routing. The Guest Option of Voicemail or Pager also is removed from Alternate Routing programming choices. If Override Routing is set to Pager, and pager has been turned off, the call is handled as if Override were not populated. If Alternate Routing is set to Pager, and pager has been turned off the caller is routed to voicemail, if he has it, or the closing message is presented. These are the default treatments 1o for Override and Alternate Routing. The Pager On/Off flag (State bit 13) is where the pager's enabled/disabled status is stored.
In addition to the pager enable/disable ability, the user can define pager notification options, as described in the Voicemail/Faxmail section of this description. The VFP
performs pages ~ 5 for notif cation of new voice and fax messages, and supports those pager types supported by the ISN. The status Pager On/Off flag has no impact on pager notification; the user is WO ~~ PCT/US97/21174 required to set Pager Notification to No Notification, in order to receive no notification of new messages.
Outbound Dialing The user has the ability to make a call, billing the call to his directlineMCI
account. This option is presented at the Main User Programming menu. Outbound calling options include:
Domestic termination, dependent on the Domestic Completion flag (State bit 4), International termination, dependent on the International Compilations flag (State bit 5), and programmed Speed Dial termination, dependent on the Speed Dial Completion flag (State bit 6).
1o For any requested international completion, the application looks up the terminating country code in the Country Code tables. If the Direct Dial Country flag is set to 'Y' for that country, the ARU transfers the call to the manual console (TTC =9d) for processing.
The following validation checks are made before a call is completed for a subscriber:
Domestic numbers The Domestic Compilations flag must be set to 'Y' 2o The International Blocking database is queried, using Category 000, Type 002, and the programmed NPA, looking for a pattern match, to ensure that the programmed number is not a blocked Information/Adult Services number.
The Exchange Master is examined to determine whether the termination is an NANP number.
If so, Country Set blocking is applied using the Country Set found in the directline AuthCode Property record. In the case of a subscriber calling in from an international location, the Country Sets from both the Property Record of the originating country and from the directlineMCI Property Record are retrieved, and the application verif es that the PCC is not blocked for either Country Set. The Property Record for an originating country is looked up using ' 191 '+3-digit Country Code+' 0000' as key into the Property Record database.

International numbers The International Compilations flag must be set to 'Y' The Country Set from the directlineMCI Property Record is retrieved, and the application verifies that the destination Country Code is not blocked for that Country Set. In the case of an international origination, the Country Sets from both the Property Record of the originating country and from the directlineMCI Property Record are retrieved, and the application verifies that the destination Country Code is not blocked for either Country Set.
t o Blocking checks for user call compilations, based on origination, and for programming Speed °
Dial numbers, are included below.
Reori~ination A caller may reoriginate from a call completion, either to the VFP or a telephone number, by ~ 5 pressing the # key for 2 seconds. The switch verifies that reorigination is permitted for that call, and if so, it delivers the caller back to the ISN.
The status of a reoriginating caller is derived from the value in the Val Stat field of the BDR
of the original call. The following table defines possible values for that field and what each value indicates:
zo Val StatCaller Disposition of Reoriginatabl Original Value Type Call e?

200 Subscriber Call Completion Y

201 Subscriber Voice Mail Y

202 Subscriber Fax * n/a 100 Guest Off Line N

101 Guest Primary N

102 Guest Secondary N

103 Guest Tertiary N

104 Guest Override N

105 Guest Closing Message N

112 Guest Voice Mail N

PCT/US97l211'14 113 Guest Pager N
114 Guest Fax N -* Unused - Currently there is no differentiation between subscriber access to voice mail and subscriber access to fax mail; it will be indicated with a Val Stat of 201 Additionally, # Reorigination is made available to the subscriber from completion to the voice mail/fax mail platform. This is done with two changes to the data populated in the switch record (OSR), as indicated in the Billing section.
Subscriber reorigination A subscriber reorigination is identified as such via the Val Stat field of the original call, and the User Programming menu is presented. A subscriber who has completed to the voice/faxmail platform or to a telephone number is allowed to reoriginate.
Console Impact t o Console impacts are described in detail in the .following sections, as well as in the call flow diagrams.
ARU Transfers The Console receives transfers from the ARU for the following reasons.
Treatment for these transfers is indicated in the Console call flow diagrams.
TTC ~ Transfer Reason Text 1 a I Guest call completion requiring Operator 'Guest call requires Operator assistance assistance' 64 Third non-entry at pager callback number prompt 'Pager callback number not entered properly' 67 Request or timeout at Guest Menu 'Requested transfer or time-out at Main menu' 9d Subscriber call completion requiring Operator 'Subscriber call requires Operator assistance assistance' Access Method Refer to the Access Method section in ARU Impacts.
Direct Calling Refer to the Direct Calling section in ARU Impacts., with the following exception:
Default Routing Default Routing does not have an impact on the Console, except when it's been programmed or defaulted to Operator Transfer. In this case, the call will be handled as a new call, with the Guest Menu presented.
Voicemail / Faxmail Refer to the Voicemail/Faxmail section in ARU Impacts.
Pa in Refer to the Paging section in ARU Impacts.
Outbound Dialing Refer to the Outbound Dialing section in ARU Impacts.
Reorigination Refer to the Reorigination section in ARU Impacts.
Flag Dependencies Flag dependencies are shown in the following table:
Diagra Menu Menu Item Dependencies m 3 Guest Menu -- Leave a voicemail VMaiI Flag -message Send a fax Fax Termination Flag Send a page Pager Termination Flag AND
Pager On/Off Flag (Passcode) Program (Follow-Me) Flag WO g ~~ PCT/tJS97/21174 13 User Main Menu Change Call Routing,Find-Me Flag AND

(Domestic TerminationsFlag OR .

International Termination Flag OR

Vmail Flag OR

Pager Termination Flag) Send / Retrieve VMail Flag OR
Mail Fax Termination Flag Place a Call Domestic Completion Flag OR

International Completion Flag OR

Speed Dial Completion Flag Administration Vmail Flag OR

Fax Termination Flag OR

Speed Dial Programming Flag OR

Greeting Recording OR

Call Screening Programming Flag OR

Pager Termination Flag OR

Avail Programming Flag --Place a Call Speed Dial Number Speed Dial Compilations Flag Domestic Number Domestic Compilations Flag International NumberInternational Compilations Flag 1 S Change Routing Find-Me Routing Domestic TerminationsFlag OR

International Termination Flag Override Routing Domestic TerminationsFlag OR

International Termination Flag OR

Vmail Flag OR

Pager Termination Flag - Alternate Routing Vmail Flag OR

Pager Termination Flag Overnde RoutingPOTS Domestic Termination is Flag OR

International Termination Flae Pager Pager Termination Flag Find-Me Domestic TerminationsFlag OR

International Termination Flag Alternate RoutingGuest Option Vmaii Flag AND

Pager Termination Flag Voicemail Vmail Flag Pager Pager Termination Flag 17 Change 3-NumberFirst Number Domestic TerminationsFlag OR

Sequence International Termination Flag Second Number Domestic TerminationsFlag OR

International Termination Flag Third Number Domestic TerminationsFlag OR

International Termination Flag Change to Schedule Schedule 1 Flag AND

Routing Schedule 2 Flag 18 Administration List Maintenance VMail Flag OR

Fax Termination Flag OR

Speed Dial Programming Flag Record Greetings Greeting Recording Flag OR

Vmail Flag OR

Fax Termination Flag Activate / DeactivateCall Screening Programming Flag Features OR

Pager Termination Flag OR

VMail Flag OR

Fax Termination Flag OR

Avail Programming Flag Lists Broadcast Lists VMail Flag OR

Fax Termination Flag Speed Dial Lists Speed Dial Programming Flag Greetings Welcome Greeting Recording Flag L.

PCT/US97/211~4 Mailbox Name VMail Flag OR
Fax Termination Flag 20 Feature ActivationCall Screening Call Screening Programming Flag _ Activate / DeactivatesPager Termination Flag Pager Pager Notification Pager Termination Flag Options AND
(VMail Flag OR Fax Termination Flag) Activate / DeactivateAvailable Programming Flag Account Pager NotificationVoicemail Only VMail Flag Fax Only Fax Termination Flag Voicemail and Fax VMail Flag AND
Fax Termination Flag 21 Program Domestic number Domestic Flag International numberInternational Flag Blocking Checks This description does not include flags checks; it discusses Country Set, 'Adult Services' (976), and Inter-NANP Blocking. Where needed, a default ANI Property record is used for Country Set Blocking.
976 blocking is implemented as follows:
The International Blocking database is queried, using Category 000, Type 002, , and the programmed NPA, looking for a pattern match, to ensure that the programmed number is 1 o not a blocked InformationlAdult Services number. If a match is found, the call/programming is not allowed.
Inter-NANP blocking is implemented as follows:
The Exchange Master is examined to determine whether the termination is an NANP
number. If so, the Intra-NANP flag is checked to see if it's set to 'Y'. If it is, the Intra-Country flag for the originating number is checked. If the Intra-Country flag for the originating number is also set to 'Y', the call is biocked. If not, the call is allowed. In short, wo 98n3oso rcrrtJS~nma if the Intra-Country flags of both the originating and terminating numbers are 'Y', the call is blocked; if either one is set to 'N', the call is allowed.
Country Set blocking is implemented as follows:
The Country Sets) of the directlineMCI Property record, and possibly the originating .
ANI/country; as indicated below, are validated against the Country Code of the termination:
If the terminating country is blocked in any of the Country Sets, the call is blocked.
Guest Call Completion TerminationG

OriginationBDomestic NANP international Domestic Inter-NANP Inter-NANP (Allow) Cset Blocking using Term (Allow) Cset Blocking using CC, Orig ANI* & Auth Term PCC, Orig ANI & Auth Csets Csets NANP Inter-NANP Inter-NANP (Block) Cset Blocking using Term (Allow) CC, Orig ANI & Auth Csets InternationalAllow Cset Blocking using Cset Blocking using Term Term PCC, Orig CC and AuthCC, Orig CC and Auth Csets Csets User Call Completion OriginationB ~ Domestic NANP .International Domestic Domestic Comp Domestic Comp Flag International Comp Flag Flag Inter-NANP (Allow) Cset Blocking using Term Inter-NANP 976 Blocking CC, Orig ANI & Auth (Allow) Cset Blocking using Term Csets 976 Blocking PCC, Orig ANI & Auth Csets NANP Domestic Comp Flag International Comp Domestic Flag Comp Flag Inter-NANPInter-NANP (Block) Cset Blocking using Term (Allow) 976 Blockini; CC, Orig ANI & Auth 976 Blocking Csets InternationalDomestic CompDomestic Comp Flag International Comp Flag Flag 976 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term Blocking Cset Blocking using CC, Orig CC and Term Auth PCC, Orig CC and Csets Auth Csets Programming Routing TerminationG

OriginationBDomestic NANP International N/A Domestic Flag Domestic Flag International Flag 976 Blocking 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term Cset Blocking using Term CC, Auth Cset PCC, Auth Cset ProErammin~ Speed Dial Numbers TerminationG

OriginationBDomestic NANP International N/A Domestic Domestic Cornp Flag International Comp Comp Flag Flag 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term 976 BlockingCset Blocking, using CC, Auth Cset Term PCC) Auth Cset XIX. INTERNET FAX
A. Introduction A large percentage of calls on the PSTN are Fax calls. These calls send digital information encoded and modulated for analog transmission to the phone company's central office (CO).

WO. 98/23080 PCT/US97/211'74 At the CO the analogue signal is digitized for continuous transmission across the PSTN at 64 Kbps. At the destination CO the digital signal is converted to analogue for transmission to the recipient Fax machine. Continuous transmission of international Fax traffic results in high utilization of scarce transmission capacity and incurs the high cost of international direct dial phone service.
B. Details Currently, there is an increased interest in sending fax and voice over the Internet. In the past, facsimiles tended to be on the periphery of the network and did not utilize the 1 o intelligence inherent in the Internet. A preferred embodiment transparently routes faxes over the Internet rather than tying up the telephone network. A network subsidized with appropriate logic can sense a fax call by sensing tones on the line. Then, the call can be directed to another piece of hardware or software that would then perform a fax over the Internet. The network performs routing by utilizing the destination fax machines phone ~ 5 number as an address. Then, by accessing the DAP, the appropriate gateway can be selected to route the call to the appropriate destination based on the phone number.
This is accomplished by sending a routing request to the DAP. The DAP selects the destination gateway by one of several methods. One method may be by point of origin. That is, by table lookup a particular point of origin is assigned a particular destination gateway. Another 2o method could be by a load balancing technique. The network logic can transparently detect normal telephone network activities and transmit them over the Internet without affecting their integrity. One embodiment employs a double dialing scenario similar to the current telephone credit card. The first number is utilized to designate how the call was to be routed, while the second telephone number is used to route the call to the destination address tike any 25 other telephone call once the appropriate gateway was identified.
The detailed logic associated with the alternative routing of faxes on the Internet is accomplished by monitoring calls on trunk groups. Typically, a company or other organization will purchase capacity on a trunk line that can be utilized exclusively to service 3o the requirements of the organization. The trunk group of a preferred embodiment is modified with appropriate sensing hardware which can be a hybrid network, such as, or including a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) to divert faxes destined for predetermined carriers over a data network such as an Internet or an X.25 network instead of the public switched network. The monitoring of the calls coming into a specific trunk group is performed transparently.
The trunk group comes into a bridging switch which diverts calls to an intelligent network.
The intelligent network detects if the call is being directed to a particular country or city that is targeted for special routing treatment over the Internet or another data network instead of the PSTN. If the call is not targeted for one of the country or city codes of interest the call is routed normally across the PSTN to its destination.
1 o Dropping down one more level of detail, when the call comes into an MCI
switch, the switch launches a DAP query requesting a route for the call. The DAP analyzes the call based on the number dialed and other profile information, and routes the call to a fax done detection system. The fax tone detection system listens for fax CNG tone and if it detects a CHG tone, then a second phone call is placed to a fax Internet gateway. When the fax Internet gateway ~ 5 answers, the first and second call are bridged together at a bridging switch.
The required modification is to screen incoming calls by destination, For predetermined target destinations, the intelligent network holds the call for additional processing. This is accomplished according to a preferred embodiment illustrated in Figure 52B. In that figure, an 20 originating user's fax machine F 1, i s connected via'switch 5260 to the phone line. Switch 5260 connects the call via switch 5261 and places a routing request to the DAP 5262 for routing data query purposes. The DAP is connected to a routing database such as a Long Term Regulatory Routing Database. The trunk is also connected to appropriate logic, only the Fax Tone Detector (FTD) is shown, at 5263. That logic includes logic to route fax calls destined for predetermined 25 countries to a fax gateway 5264 via switches 5261and 5265 to an alternate data network 5266 to a fax gateway 5267 in the predetermined country. For countries other than the predetermined country, the switch 5261 will send the call by vyay of the PSTN.
Operation of the above embodiment of Figure 52B is seen with respect to the flow chart of 3o Figure 52C. At step 5270 of the flow chart, the originating switch 5261 of Figure 52B receives the call. The call can be from a telephone, a PC, a fax machine F 1, or other suitable device.
Using the destination information associated with the call, the DAP is queried via Switch 5261 at step 5271. The DAP looks up the routing information and a decision is made at step 5273 whether the destination is one of the predetermined countries, cities, or other locations of interest. If not, the call is handled through normal routing as in step 5274.
If the call is for a predetermineddestination of interest it is routed to the FTP as in step 5275.
s The FTP then determines whether this call is a fax call at step 5276. This may be done by attempting to detect a CNG tone by well known means. In one method of accomplishing this a timer can be used. If a CNG tone is not detected within a specified time period the call is assumed not to be a fax call. It is then released and bridged through normal routing over the PSTN as at step 5277. If a CNG tone is detected, the call is released and bridged to fax gateway 5264 as at step 5278, the call is collected and the fax is transmitted over the alternate data network 5266 over which it is sent to fax gateway 5267 and then on to fax machine F2 at the destination point.
This may have further routing vii a domain name that may have several countries. The ~ s Domain Name Server will distribute calls amongst several destinations via a lookup table. A
gateway will be located in a destination country and a TCP/IP session is set up with the gateway for control purposes. The data may be passed TCP or UDP based on the particular network characteristics. In any case, the dialed digits are passed to the origin gateway which forwards the digits to the destination gateway where the phone number is dialed.
The destination gateway then dials the destination number and engages a fax machine at the other end. The system utilizes two pairs of fax modems to convert a telephony signal to packets and back. Fax modems like any other modems negotiate for baud rate, but they do it each time a page is transmitted. Each side specifies its capabilities and they negotiate what 2s speed they can support. First) start the transfer of fax information, then an ACK is transmitted after each page and finally the baud rate is renegotiated at 300 baud (LCD).
Finally, the messages are received at the distant modem and the packet is repackaged as a fax package. At the end of every page, there is a renegotiating of baud rate based on error rate, and, if there are too many errors, the faxes will renegotiate to a lower speed before resending 3o and/or retransmitting the page.

WO 98/2,3880 PCT/US97/21I74 In accordance with a preferred embodiment, the system detects that the destination telephone circuit has been connected before transmitting fax information. The overhead associated with this processing requires the following detriments to normal fax processing.
- 1 ) Increased postdial delay; and 2) Actual transmission of the fax may take five percent longer.
XX. INTERNET SWITCH TECHNOLOGY
A. An Embodiment The problem with current switched networks is that when you have a LEC
connected via legislated feature group D trunks, providing inexpensive access is difficult because access charges are dictated by the LEC. Therefore, if the Internet access is provided via a service which utilizes feature group D trunks, the cost passed on to the consumer is exorbitant. If the feature group D trunks are bypassed, and a dedicated network is provided, ie., the LEC is connected directly to a modem pool which provides access to the Internet, a second tier of problems arises. These problems include: scalability, survivability and inefficiency of design. Further, a modem would be necessary for each DSO purchased from the LEC. All of these problems are solved by the architecture discussed below.
Scalability is addressed by the CBLs described in Figure 1C because the modem pool can be adjusted to meet the network traffic requirements. The CBLs can be adjusted to meet the 2o requirements of the particular community of interest. In a dedicated network, a one-to-one relationship exists between CBLs and entries in a modem pool. Then, if a modem fails, the ability to service users is directly affected by the ability to utilize modems. By eliminating the direct correlation between the modem pools and the CBLs, the DAP can map calls to dynamic resources obtained through the network wherever they reside. This design is more efficient than any current architecture. A detailed discussion of this architecture ensues below.
The third problem which was overcome by a preferred embodiment was a direct result of solving the previous two problems. A method for routing a call in the network was required 3o when only an origination indication is provided by a LEC. An embodiment incorporating the functionality of a hotline provides a solution to this problem. When an origination is detected on an incoming trunk (circuit) for which the hotline functionality is enabled, a database lookup is performed as an internal process of a switch's routing database.
This database lookup results in a preliminary dialing plan (i.e. a 7 or 10 digit number) that will be used to determine the destination of the call. The hotline function resides in the switch, but it was not integrated into routing capability which exploited the DAP and allowed a switch to formulate a DAL procedure request without any calling information (ADF transaction) to the DAP.
The request is transmitted over an X.25 protocol link, a local area network, an Optical Connection Three (OC3) ATM network, a frame relay, SMDS or other communication link to the DAP for processing. The DAP performs additional database lookups to determine the 0 appropriate destination (in this case, it would be the Switch ID (SWID) and Terminating Trunk Group (TTG) that corresponds with the trunk connection to the Modem Pool). The hotline is a foundation in the design that overcame the problems described above.
Figure 71 depicts a typical customer configuration of a hybrid network for carrying private network services, such as VNET, Vision or other media while providing local dial access, private dialing plans over shared or dedicated access. The combination of the FDDI LAN
10201, the transaction servers 10205, and the communication servers 10215 and 10225 are collectively referred to as a DAP. A local area network such as Fiber Distributed Data 2o Interface (FDDI) LAN 10201 is used to connect various communication devices. In the configuration depicted, Transaction Server (TS) 10205 is connected to the LAN
10201.
Telephony switches such as switch 10210 and switch 10220 are connected to LAN

through Communication Servers (CS) 10215 and 10225, respectively. In the example shown, CS 10225 communicates with the switches utilizing a protocol termed Application Data Field (ADF) 10245. Gateway 10230 connects to the LAN 10201 and provides communication between the Customer Access Processor (CAP}. The CAP 10235 is typically a microprocessor such as the Intel Pentium, RISC or Motorola 68xxx family. The DAP would send a transaction query to the CAP. The CAP performs a database lookup to return routing instruction based upon, for example, the status of how many operators are available at a 3o particular customer service center. The CAP returns a response that indicates how a call should be routed based upon that database lookup. The DAP uses that information basically as an extension of its own database. The DAP would then interpret the information received from the CAP 10235 and translate it into routing information that the switch requires to.route the call to where the customer required.
Figure 72 depicts the operation of DAPs 10240, individually labeled as DAPS
10241. 10242 and 10243. Routing and customer profile information is entered into the order entry system 10235 after validation and the information is routed to the Service Control Manager (SCM) 10230. SCM 10320 sends the routing and customer profile information to each of the DAPS
in the network.
For example, if a problem arises with Windows95, a customer would call I-800-FIX-WIN95.
The call enters the network at Originating Switch 10350 which would initiate a transaction to a DAP 10241-3 querying for appropriate routing information for the call. The queried DAP
recognizes the number, creates a transaction and routes it to the appropriate gateway 10230 that is connected to the appropriate CAP 10235 (in this case the CAP as.~ociated with the Microsoft t 5 company). The CAP 10235 receives the transaction and determines that the customer service center in New York is swamped, but the customer service center in California is not very busy (time of day could account for the reason in this case). The CAP 10235 would send a response back to the queried DAP 10241-3 (via the gateway 10230) indicating that this particular 1-800-FIX-WIN95 call should be routed to the California customer service center. The selected 2o DAP 10241-3 translates the transaction information into a specific Switch ID (SWID) and a specific Terminating Trunk Group (TTG) that corresponds to the route out of the MCI network necessary to arrive at the California customer service center. The selected transmits this response information to the originating switch 10350 which routes the original call to 1-800-FIX-WIN95 to the correct Terminating switch 10351, as indicated in the DAP
25 response via the SWID.
The terminating switch 10351 then determines the correct Terminating Trunk Group (TTG}
utilizing information transmitted via SS7 network created from a parameter in the original DAP
response, and routes the call to the California customer service center. When a call is routed 3o through a switch, it is passed via a Direct Access Line' (DAL) connection such as DAL 10386 to the customer PBX 10387 which delivers the call to the target telephone 10361.

wo ~~oso rc~rrtJS9~nm~4 Figure 73 depicts the process by which a telephone connects to a release link trunk for I -800 call processing. A telephone such as telephone 10410 is connected to local exchange carrier (LEC) 10415. The user of telephone 10410 uses the telephone keypad to enter a number, which causes LEC 10415 to route the call to MCI Originating switch 10420. In order to process the 1-800 request, switch 10420 must communicate with ISN
10480. Switch 10420 therefore connects the call to bridging switch 10440, which is connected to Intelligent Service Network 10480 via a release link trunk 10490. Bridging switch 10440 passes the DAP request with the I-800 information to ISN 10480, which passes it to the addressed DAP
10241. DAP 10241 examines the 1-800 request and selects the appropriate release link trunk t o 10490, which it connects to MCI D switch 10420, which in turn is connected to the LEC
10415 which is ultimately connected to telephone 10410, thereby completing the call. ANI
is a standard term in the industry that refers to Automatic Number Identification (ANI). ANI
can be used to complete the call. This is the information that the MCI network receives from the LEC To identify where the call originated from. In simple terms, it would be your home t 5 phone number if you originated the call. It could also be the payphone number that a credit card caller originated from, so it is not always used to determine to whom to bill the call.
A similar process may be used to connect telephone 10450 through LEC 10455 to a switch 10460 utilizing a bridging switch 10440 to bridge the call to the release link trunk 10490 2o through ISN 10480.
Figure 74 depicts the customer side of a DAP procedure request. In the home and small office environment, devices such as modem 10510, telephone 10515 and fax 10510 are plugged into a standard RJl 1 jack 10520, which is connected to the local exchange Garner.
25 Local exchange carrier 10525 connects to switch 10530 via common business lines 10527.
In a large office environment, an office equipped with a PBX 10540 may connect to switch 10530 via dedicated access line (DAL) 10547, without the involvement of the local carrier.
Switch 10530 issues DAL procedure request to DAP 10560, which selects routing 10570 for the call, as will be more fully described with respect to Figure 75.
Figure 75 depicts operation of the switch 10530 to select a particular number or "hotline" for a caller. Switch 10530 accepts an incoming call from CBL 10527 or DAL 10547, and contacts DAP 10560 for instructions on routing the call. DAP 10560 returns routing w° ~ar23oso rc~rrt~s9~nm7a information encoded in the form of a pseudo-telephone number. The pseudo telephone number has the same format as an ordinary telephone number but instead encodes a 3-digit switch identifier (SWID) and a file number of a file that identifies a desired Terminating Trunk Group (TTG) . Switch 10530 contacts the switch 10610 identified by the S
WID and passes to it the file number. Switch 10610 uses the TTG to select the appropriate modem pool 10620 to complete the connection. The modem pool in turn provides an Internet Protocol (IP) connection 10630 to such services as authentication service 10640 and to Basic Internet Protocol Platform (BIPP) 10650. The BIPP 1065.0 is composed of packet switches, such as ATM switches, that transfer IP packets from one node to another.
Authentication service 10640 optionally performs security functions to authenticate the calling party and to prevent unauthorized access to the Internet. It may also be used to formulate billing information necessary to ensure proper reconciliation for customers that access the Internet via the TTG hotline. The provision of this hotline function enables routing of the call through switches 10530 and 10610 without the use of expensive FGD links such as the FGD
t 5 10380 depicted in Figure 72.
Figure 76 depicts the operation of a gateway for selectively routing telephone calls through the Internet. Terminal switch 10710 connects to an ARU 10720 to request routing -information. ARU 10720 interrogates the properties of the call to determine whether it is a 2o candidate for Internet routing. If the call is a modem call, the call is routed to modem pool 10730. From modem pool 10730, the call may then tie routed to Basic Internet Protocol Platform 10750 to provide Internet access to the modem call. The modem call is optionally authenticated by authentication service 10760. If the call is a fax call, the call is routed to modem pool 10730. From modem pool 10730, the call may then be routed to Basic Internet 25 Protocol Platform 10750 and from there to fax gateway 10770. As with a modem call, a fax call is optionally authenticated by authentication service 10760.
If the call to be routed is a voice call, ARU 10720 waits for the user to dial a calling card number and a destination telephone number. ARU 10720 interrogates the destination number 3o to determine whether the destination telephone is an international call or a domestic call.
Domestic calls are returned to the termination switch 10710 for conventional routing.
International calls are encoded as data by providing the analog voice signal to coder/decoder (or "codec") 10725. Codec 10725, having encoded the signal as digital data then routes the call through modem pool 10730 and Basic Internet Protocol Platform 10750.
In an alternate embodiment, when the call is delivered to the ISN by the network switch, an s SS7 ISUP message is routed to the resident ISN switch. That switch is called a DMS-ACD.
ACD stands for Automatic Call Distributor. The ACD takes an incoming SS7 ISUP
message and converts it to SCAI (Switch/ComputerApplication Interface). On the opposite side of the ACD is a device called an ISN-AP {Intelligent Services Network - Adjunct Processor). SCAI
is the language spoken between the ACD and the ISN-AP. So, there are two interfaces: on the to inbound side from the network to the ACD a SS7 ISUP, and on the outbound side from the ACD to the ISN-AP a SCAI. These are simply two different signaling protocols.
When the call arrives at the ACD from the network, the ACD doesn't automatically know where to route the call. The ACD receives its instructions from the ISN-AP. To do that, the 15 ACD takes the ISUP
signaling parameters received from the network and converts them to SCAI
protocol format and sends a SCAI message to the ISN-AP.
Specifically, the SCAI message is called DV Call Received (DV means Data/Voice. When 2o the ISN-AP receives this message it looks at the Called Party Number (CPN) field within the SCAI message and, based on that number, determines where in the ISN the ACD
should route the call. When the ISN-AP has made the decision, the ISN-AP builds a DV Call Received_RR{a response to the previous message -- RR means Return Result).
Within the RR message are instructions to the ACD regarding the. ACD port to which the call 25 should be terminated.
For this service, the ACD is instructed to terminate the call to the ACD ports connected to the ARU 10720. When the call arrives at the ARU 10720, there are two things that can happen:
1 ) If the caller has dialed the access number from an:
3o a)telephone or b)fax machine, that caller will hear a voice prompt that says "Press 1 for voice, or press 2 for fax."
_. 462 2) If the caller has dialed the access number using a 1'C modem, that caller likely won't hear any announcement. What will happen is that a ARU timer will expire. Expiration of that timer indicates to the ARU that this call is from a modem.
The call flow for these scenarios can be confusing, so let's consider them one at a time.
If a caller has called from a telephone, then at the ARL710720 voice prompt, the caller will press 1 (for voice service). At that time, the ARU 10720 will collect further information about the caller. This feature is a modified version of existing calling card services that telephone companies offer today. The ARU 10720 first collects the card number, then collects the number the caller wishes to terminate to. After capturing this information, the ARU 10720 sends the data across the ISN Local Area Network (LAN) to a validation data base. In addition to verifying the calling card number, the data base also ensures that the terminating number is within the allowed dialing plan for the card holder.

Once the card information is verified, the ARU 10720 will then determine if the terminating number is domestic or international. If the terminating number is domestic, the ARU 10720 will release the call from the ISN back into the voice network where the call will be routed to its intended destination. If the terminating number is international, the call will be routed to a 2o device called a CODEC (COde DECode) resident at a 1BIPP site. The purpose of the CODEC
is to convert the voice signal to data for routing over the Internet using UDP/IP.
In an alternate embodiment, if the caller has called from a fax machine, at the ARU 10720 voice prompt, the caller will press 2 indicative of a request for fax service.
At that time, the 25 ARU 10720 will route the call to a fax platform that is a guaranteed fax service 10770 for those who don't have the time or patience to wait for a terminating fax number to become available, or for those who need assistance delivering an international fax. An embodiment collects information about the caller and terminating number, then instructs the caller to begin the send process. The fax service 10770 captures the fax and stores it for delivery at a later time.
If a caller has dialed via a PC modem, then at the ARU 10720 voice prompt, the caller will likely not hear any announcement. This is intended. It is possible that the caller may hear the ARU 10720 announcement via the PC speaker or modem, but the caller is unable to make an __ W~p 9813080 PCTIUS97/21174 entry at the ARU 10720 and will ultimately time-out (as described above), indicating to the ARU 10720 that this call originated from a PC modem. The ARU 10720 releases the call back.
into the network for termination to a Modem Pool (MP) 10730 at one of MCI's sites.
Figure 77 depicts the operation of the ARU of Figure 76 deployed in a centralized architecture. Telephone 10810 communicates through local exchange 10820 to switch 10710. Switch 10710 connects through bridge switch 10830 to Intelligent Services Network (ISN) 10840 to ARU 10720. ARU 10720 controls the call routing either directly to the o modem pool 10730, via codec 10725 to the BIPP 10750 or to a fax server.
Figure 78 depicts the operation of the ARU of Figure 77 deployed in a distributed architecture. Telephone 10910 communicates through local exchange 10920 to switch 10710. Switch 10710 connects through bridge switch 10930 to intelligent service network ~ 5 10840 to ARU 10720. ARU 10720 operates under control of voice response unit 10950, connected through switch 10911 and bridge switch 10930 to control the call routing either through switch 10912 to modem pool 10730, or via a codec. The ARU must be placed in the ISN, but the other pieces (i.e., ARUs 10850 and 10950, modem pool 10730 and codec 14725) may be placed anywhere in the network.
Figure 79A and 79B depict the operation of sample applications for Internet call routing.
Figure 79A depicts a sample application for customer service. Intranet computer 11010 connects to the Internet 11020 as described above, and thereby connects to a server computer 11025. Server computer 11025, through designation of an Internet resource, such as a packing shipping service provider 11030, via a Uniform Resource Locator permits a user of Intranet computer 11010 to query the provider 11030. Through internal functions shown as 11032, provider 11030 may provide in response to user interactions such resources as a full motion video display 11035 from its customer service department, or direct interactive conversations with a customer service representative 11037.
Figure 79B depicts a number of applications for caller-initiated consumer transactions. A
consumer calling a predetermined number 11040 (such as 555-IMCI, 555-PAGE or RNET) may be routed to a particular transaction processor through the use of common PL~YUS9fil21t<74 business line (CBL) 11050. CBL 11050 connects to switch 11060. Switch 11060 calls DAP
11065, which analyzes the incoming call using Automatic Number Identification (ANI) to determine the identity of the caller. Based on the identity of the caller in combination with the number called, DAP 11065 directs switch 11060 to direct calls to 555-IMCI, for example, to Data Network Interface (DNI) 11070. DNI 11070 serves as an interface between the . switch network and a database host 11075 capable of processing point-of sale debit and ~ credit card transactions. In addition to routing the call based on the target telephone number, the ANI data is used to identify the caller to the database host 11075.
Similarly, a call to S55-PAGE may be routed to the PBX of a paging service company 11080, and the ANI
data used to to select a particular paging service 11085 offered by the company.
Finally, calls to ~~5-RNET may be used to provide connection to the Basic Internet Protocol Platform 11090, as previously described.
Figure 80 illustrates a configuration of a switching network offering voice mail and voice t 5 response unit services, as well as interconnection into a service provider, in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Telephones 11111 and 11112 enter the network via switches 11120 and 11121 respectively, Switch 11121, in addition to offering network entry to telephone 11112, provides an intermediate link for switch 11120. Switch 11125 provides interconnection for switch 11121, as well as accepting direct input such as PBXs 11130.
2o Switch 11125 provides connections to voice response unit server 11140 and to voice mail server 11145. In addition, switch 11125 connects to service provider server 11150 through Dial Access Line 11155. Service provider 11150 further routes incoming calls according to service requested and authenticity to paging service 11060 or to email service 11070 using BIPP 11075 connected through modem pool 11076.
25 B. Another Embodiment Figure 81 illustrates an inbound shared Automated Call Distributor (ACD) call with data sharing through a database in accordance with a preferred embodiment. A dial-up Internet user 12000 uses a computer modem to dial a telephone number. The telephone call is routed from the RBOC/LEC Switch 12002 to MCI Switch 1 12004. MCI Switch 1 12004 queries ~3o the Network Control System (NCS) 12020 to ask for a route for the given ANI and dialed telephone number. The NCS 12020 returns a terminating address, instructing MCI
Switch 1 12004 to route the call to a trunk group on MCI Switch 2 12006.

MCI Switch 2 12006 completes the call to the Internet Access Device 12008. The modem in the dial-up user's computer 12000 and the Internet Access Device 12008 establish a data session, and data packets are exchanged according to the Point to Point Protocol (PPP). From the Internet Access Device 12008, PPP packets are translated to Internet Protocol (IP) packets -and sent on the Internet, represented by 12026. Similarly, the Internet Access Device 12008 receives IP packets from the Internet 12026 and sends them to the dial-up user 12000.
Before packets are allowed to pass freely through the Internet Access Device 12008, the dial-to up user-12000 is authenticated. This is done using the username/password method, or the challenge/response method.
In the username/password method, the Internet Access Device 12008 prompts the dial-up user 12000 to enter a user name. The dial-up user 12000 types a user name into the t 5 computer, and the user name is transported from the dial-up user 12000 to the Internet Access Device 12008. The Internet Access Device 12008 then prompts the dial-up user 12000 to enter a password. The dial-up user 12000 types a password into the computer, and the password is transported from the dial-up user 12000 to the Internet Access Device 12008.
Once the user name and password are received, the Internet Access Device 12008 sends an 2o authentication request, containing the user name and password, to the Authentication Server 12014. The Authentication Server 12014 checks the user name/password against a database of valid user name/password pairs. If the entered user name/password are in the database, the Authentication Server 12014 sends an "user authenticated" message back to the Internet Access Device 12008. If the entered user name/password are not in the database, the 25 Authentication Server 12014 sends a "user not authenticated" message back to the Internet Access Device 12008.
In the challenge/response method, the Internet Access Device 12008 prompts the dial-up user 12000 to enter a user name. The dial-up user 12000 types a user name into the computer, and 3o the user name is transported from the dial-up user 12000 to the Internet Access Device 12008. The Internet Access Device 12008 then prompts the dial-up user 12000 to with a challenge, which is a sequence of digits. The dial-up user 12000 computes a response to the challenge by entering the challenge digits and a shared secret key into response-generation program. The shared secret key is known only to the dial-up user 12000 and~the Authentication Server 12014. The dial-up user 12000 types in the computed response, and the response is transported from the dial-up user 12000 to the Internet Access Device 12008.
The Internet Access Device 12008 sends an authentication message, containing the user name, the challenge, and the response, to the Authentication Server 12014. The Authentication Server reads the user name, finds the shared secret key for that user name, and uses the shared secret key and the challenge digits to compute the response.
The computed response is compared to the response given by the dial-up user 12000. If the responses match, a "user authenticated" message is sent from the Authentication Server 12014 to the Internet Access Device 12008. If the responses do not match, a "user not authenticated"
message is sent from the Authentication Server 12014 to the Internet Access Device 12008.
Whether the user name/password or challenge/response methods of authentication are used, the rest of this description assumes a "user authenticated" message is sent from the Authentication Server 12014 to the Internet Access Device 12008, and IP packet communication is allowed to flow freely through the Internet Access Device 12008.
The dial-up user 12000 starts a web browser and browses web pages from the Corporate Web Server 12024. The Corporate Web Server 12024 records the web pages viewed by the dial 2o up user 12000 in the Call Center Server 12028 using a unique identifier.
The dial-up user 12000 may also submit information to the Corporate Web Server 12024 by filling out Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) forms and submitting the information to the Corporate Web Server 12024. The Corporate Web Server 12024 deposits this information in the Call Center Server 12028 using the same unique identifier.
The dial-up user 12000 browses another web page, upon which an icon is displayed along with text indicating that the user can talk to an agent by clicking on the icon. Clicking on the icon results in a download of a Multipart Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) file from the Corporate Web Server 12024 to the dial-up user's 12000 web browser. The MIME
file 3o contains an alphanumeric string identifying the destination for a resulting phone call, called a user-identifier. The browser invokes a helper application or browser plug-in to handle the file of the designated MIME type. The helper application reads the MIME file, and launches a query with the MIME file contents from the dial-up user 12000 to the Directory Server 12012. The Directory Server 12012 translates the alphanumeric string from the MIME file into the destination IP Address of the destination Internet Telephony Gateway 12018, and sends a message containing the IP Address back to the dial-up user's 12000 helper application. The helper application then launches an Internet telephony call to the Internet s Telephony Gateway's 12018 IP Address, providing to the Internet Telephony Gateway 12018 -the alphanumeric string from the MIME file, as a part of the call setup.
The Internet Telephony Gateway 12018 translates the given alphanumeric string into a destination telephone number, and dials the destination telephone number on it's telephone network interface to MCI Switch 2 12006. MCI Switch 2 12006 queries the NCS
12020 with the dialed telephone number, requesting routing instructions. The NCS 12020 determines the appropriate route and sends routing instructions back to MCI Switch 2 12006 to route the call to a particular trunk group on MCI Switch 1 12004. The call is routed to MCI
Switch 1 12004, and then the call is completed to the Automated Call Distributor (ACD) 12022. When ~ s the ACD 12022 answers the call, the Internet Telephony Gateway 12018 completes a constant audio path between the ACD 12022 and the Dial-up user 12000, with the audio from the ACD to the Internet Telephony Gateway being circuit-switched PCM audio, and the audio from the Internet Telephony Gateway to the Dial-up user being packetized encoded digital audio, using any audio codec.
When the call is delivered to the ACD 12022, the unique record identifier is delivered to the ACD via telephone network signaling mechanisms. When an agent in the call center 12026 receives the call, the unique record identifier is displayed for the agent, and the call information entered by the dial-up user 12000 is retrieved from the Call Center Server 12028.
-XXI. BILLING
Another embodiment in accordance with this invention relates generally to telecommunication networks, and more specifically, to switches of a telecommunication network that generate call records using a flexible and expandable record format and 3o generates a unique call identifier for each telephone call that traverses the network.
A typical telecommunication network comprises multiple telecommunication switches located throughout a geographical area. When a user makes a call, the call may be routed through one or more switches before reaching its destination.
Figure 82 illustrates an exemplary telecommunications system 30102 across the United States. For purposes of illustration, a caller 30104 places a call from Los Angeles, California to a party 30112 located in New York City, New York. Such a call is typically transmitted across three (3) switches: the Los Angeles, California switch 30106; the Chicago, Illinois switch 30108; and the New York City, New York switch 30110. In this scenario, the originating switch is the Los Angeles, California switch 30106, and the terminating switch is the New York City, New York switch 30110.
Each of the switches, 30106-30110, is connected to two (2) or more Data Access Points (DAP) 30116-30120, for instance a primary DAP 30116-30120 and a backup DAP

30120. A DAP 30116-30120 is a facility that receives requests for information from the switches 30106-30110, processes the requests, and returns the requested information back to the requesting switch 30106-30110. The switches 30106-30110 use information from the DAPs 30116-30120 to process calls through the network.
When a call passes through one of the switches, 30106-30110, that switch creates a call 2o record. The call record contains information on the call, including but not limited to: routing, billing, call features, and trouble shooting information. After the call is terminated, each switch 30106-30110 that processed the call completes the associated call record. The switches 30106-30110 combine multiple call records into a billing block.
2s When a switch 30106-30110 fills the billing block, the switch 30106-30110 sends the billing block to a billing center 30114. Thus, the billing center 30114 receives one billing block from each switch 30106-30110 that handled the call, which in this case would be three billing blocks. The billing center 30114 searches each billing block and retrieves the call record associated with the call, thereby retrieving one call record per switch 30106-30110 that 3o handled the call. The billing center 30114 then uses one or more of the retrieved call records to generate a billing entry. The billing center 30114 is also connected to each DAP 30116-30120 to retrieve information regarding a switch 30106-30110 or call record.

To better understand the invention, it is useful to describe some additional terminology relating to a telecommunication network. A telephone call comes into a switch on a transmission line referred to as the originating port, or trunk. The originating port is one of many transmission lines coming into the switch from the same location of origin. This group of ports is the originating trunk group. After processing an incoming call, the switch transmits the call to a destination location, which may be another switch, a local exchange carrier, or a private branch exchange. The call is transmitted over a transmission line referred to as the terminating port, or trunk. Similar to the originating port, the terminating port is one of a group of ports going from the switch to the same destination. This group of ports is the I o terminating trunk group.
Contemporary telecommunication networks provide customers with the capability of using the general public network as well as the capabiiity of defining a custom virtual network (VNet). With a VNet, a customer deFnes a private dialing plan, including plan telephone -t 5 numbers. A VNet customer is not limited to the default telephone numbers allocated to a public telecommunication system dedicated to a specific geographic region, but can define custom telephone numbers.
Upon processing a telephone call, a switch must generate a call record large enough to 2o contain all of the needed information on a call. The call record, however, must not be so large that the typical call results in the majority of the record fields in the call record to be unused. In such a case, storing such call records results in large amounts of wasted storage, and transmitting such a call record causes unnecessary transmissions.
2s One solution for creating and processing call records is to implement a fixed length call record format, such as a 32-word call record. A word is two (2) bytes, or sixteen ( 16) bits. A
fixed length record format, however, cannot expand when new call features are implemented.
More importantly, fixed call record formats cannot handle expanded data fields as the telecommunications network becomes more complex with new features and telephone 30 numbers.
Contemporary fixed length record formats include time point fields recording local time in three (3) second increments where local switch time represents the time of day at a switch.

wo 9sn3aso _ rcrrtrssr~nma The timepoint fields are used by the network switches, billing center, and other_network subsystems. Each subsystem, however, may require the time period for a different use and in a different format, such as in an epoch time format. Epoch time is the number of one ( 1 ) second increments since a particular date and time in history. For example, the billing center requires epoch time for its billing records whereas switch reports and error logs require local switch time.
A problem also arises when using only local switch time in that there is no accommodation for time changes due to daylight savings time. In addition, each subsystem may require a finer granularity of precision than the current three (3) second increments.
By providing only local switch time at three (3) second increments, the switches have passed the burden of translating the time into a usable format to the network subsystems. The fixed record format cannot accommodate the various time period requirements because it only contains the time periods in local switch time at a low level of precision. Because of its fixed nature, the fixed 15 record format cannot expand to include different time formats, nor to include a finer granularity of precision, such as a one ( 1 ) second increment.
Therefore, there is a need for switches of a telecommunications network to store call record information in a flexible and expandable format. There is a further need to provide time 2o point fields with one (1) second granularity in a flexible format that easily and efficiently responds to daylight savings time and time zone changes.
There is also a need to match all of the call records associated with a specific telephone call.
For example, for proper billing and cost control, it is~ necessary for the billing center to match 25 the originating switch's call record to the terminating switch's call record. Also, for troubleshooting and security purposes, it may be necessary to trace a specific telephone call through the network with ease in order to isolate problem areas.
Therefore, there is a need for switches of a telecommunications network to uniquely identify 30 each telephone call that traverses the network, thereby uniquely identifying all of the call records associated with a specific telephone call.

A. An Embodiment 1. Call Record Format An embodiment solves the problem of providing a flexible and expandable call record format by implementing both a small and a large call record format. In particular, the embodiment implements a default 32-word call record format, plus an expanded 64-word call record format. An embodiment uses a 32-word call record format for the typical telephone call, which comprises the majority of all telephone calls, and uses a 64-word call record format when additional information is needed regarding the call. This implementation provides the flexibility needed to efficiently manage varying data requirements of a given call record.
1 o New call features can _be developed and easily incorporated into the variable call record format of the present invention.
This embodiment also records timepoints in the epoch time format. The embodiment records the origination time of a call in epoch time format, and the remaining timepoints are offsets, or the number of seconds, from that origination time. This embodiment solves the problems associated with converting to and from daylight savings time because daylight savings time is a local time offset and does not affect the epoch time. Furthermore, the timepoints in epoch time format require less space in the call record than they do in local switch time format.
2o The epoch time format may represent coordinated universal time (UTC), as determined at Greenwich, England, which has a time zone of zero (0) local switch time, or any other time.
Epoch time is only a format and does not dictate that UTC must be used. The billing time and the local switch time may be in UTC or local time, and the local switch time may not necessarily be the same time that is used for billing. Therefore, the switch must keep billing time and local switch time separate in order to prevent the problems that occur during daylight savings time changes.
2. Network Call Identifier This embodiment solves the problem of uniquely identifying each telephone call and all of 3o the call records associated with a specific telephone call by providing a unique identifier to each call record. It generates a network call identifier (NCID) that is assigned to each call _ 472 record at the point of call origination, that is, the originating switch generates an NCID for each telephone call. The NCID accompanies the associated telephone call through the telecommunications network to the termination point at the terminating switch.
Therefore, at any point of a telephone call in the network, the associated NCID identifies the point and time of origin of the telephone call. Each switch through which the telephone call passes records the NCID in the call record associated with the call. The NCID is small enough to fit in a 32-word call record, thereby reducing the data throughput and storage.
The NCID
provides the billing center and other network subsystems with the ability to match originating and terminating call records for a specific telephone call.
This embodiment also provides the switch capability of discarding a received NCID and generating a new NCID. A switch discards a received NCID if the NCID format is invalid or unreliable) thereby ensuring a valid unique identifier to be associated with each call going through the network. For instance, an NCID may be unreliable if generated by third party t 5 switches in the telecommunications network.
This embodiment relates to switches of a telecommunication network that generate call records using a flexible and expandable record format. The call record formats includea-small (preferably 32-word) and a large (preferably 64-word) expanded format.
It would be 2o readily apparent to one skilled in the relevant art to implement a small and large record format of different sizes.
The embodiment also relates to switches of a telecommunication network that generate a unique NCID for each telephone call traversing the network. The NCID provides a 25 mechanism for matching all of the call records associated with a specific telephone call. It would be readily apparent to one skilled in the relevant art to implement a call record identifier of a different format.
The chosen embodiment is computer software executing within a computer system.
Figure 30 83 shows an exemplary computer system. The computer system 30202 includes one or more processors, such as a processor 30204. The processor 30204 is connected to a communication bus 30206.

The computer system 30202 also includes a main memory 30208, preferably random access memory (RAM), and a secondary memory 30210. The secondary memory 30210 includes, for example, a hard disk drive 30212 and/or a removable storage drive 30214, representing a floppy disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, a compact disk drive, etc. The removable storage drive 30214 reads from and/or writes to a removable storage unit 30216 in a well known manner.
Removable storage unit 30216, also called a program storage device or a computer program product, represents a floppy disk. magnetic tape, compact disk, etc. The removable storage 1 o unit 30216 includes a computer usable storage medium having therein stored computer software and/or data.
Computer programs (also called computer control logic) are stored in main memory 30208 and/or the secondary memory 30210. Such computer programs, when executed, enable the ~ 5 computer system 30202 to perform the functions of the present invention as discussed herein.
In particular, the computer programs, when executed, enable the processor 30204 to perform the functions of the present invention. Accordingly, such computer programs represent controllers of the computer system 30202.
- 2o B. /Another Embodiment) Another embodiment is directed to a computer program product comprising a computer readable medium having control logic (computer software) stored therein. The control logic, when executed by the processor 30204, causes the processor 30204 to perform the functions as described herein.
Another embodiment is implemented primarily in hardware using, for example, a hardware state machine. Implementation of the hardware state machine so as to perform the functions described herein will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant arts.
1. Call Record Format This embodiment provides the switches of a telecommunication network with nine (9) different record formats. These records include : Call Detail Record (CDR), Expanded Call Detail Record (ECDR), Private Network Record (PNR), Expanded Private Network Record -(EPNR), Operator Service Record (OSR), Expanded Operator Service Record {EOSR}, Private Operator Service Record (POSR), Expanded Private Operator Service Record (EPOSR), and Switch Event Record (SER). Each record is 32 words in length, and the expanded version of each record is b4 words in length.
Example embodiments of the nine (9) call record formats discussed herein are further described in Figures 82-86. The embodiments of the call records of the present invention comprise both 32-word and 64-word call record formats. It would be apparent to one skilled in the relevant art to develop alternative embodiments for call records comprising a different number of words and different field definitions. Table 301 of the Appendix contains an example embodiment of the CDR and PNR call record formats. Figure 84 shows a graphical representation of the CDR and PNR call record formats. Table 302 of the Appendix contains 15 an example embodiment of the ECDR and EPNR call record formats. Figures 85A
and 85B
show a graphical representation of the ECDR and EPNR call record formats.
Table 303 of the Appendix contains an example embodiment of the OSR and POSR call record formats.
Figure 86 shows a graphical representation of the OSR and POSR call record format. Table 304 of the Appendix contains an example embodiment of the EOSR and EPOSR call record 2o formats. Figures 87(A) and 87(B) show a graphical representation of the EOSR and EPOSR
call record formats. Table 305 of the Appendix contains an embodiment of the SER record format. Figure 88 shows a graphical representation of the SER record format.
The CDR and PNR, and thereby the ECDR and EPNR, are standard call record formats and 25 contain information regarding a typical telephone call as it passes through a switch. The CDR is used for a non-VNET customer, whereas the PNR is used for a VNET
customer and is generated at switches that originate VNET calls. T'he fields of these two records are identical except for some field-specific information described below.
3o The OSR and POSR, and thereby the EOSR and EPOSR, contain information regarding a telephone call requiring operator assistance and are generated at switches or systems actually equipped with operator positions. A switch completes an OSR for a non- VNET
customer and completes a POSR for a private VNET customer. These records are only generated at switches or systems that have the capability of performing operator services or network audio response system (MARS) functions. The formats of the two (2) records are identical except for some field-specific information described below.
A SER is reserved for special events such as the passage of each hour mark, time changes, system recoveries, and at the end of a billing block. The SER record format is also described in more detail below.
Figures 89(A) and 89(B) collectively illustrate the logic that a switch uses to determine when to use an expanded version of a record format. A call 30202 comes into a switch 30106-30110 (called the current switch for reference purposes; the current switch is the switch that is currently processing the call), at which time that switch 30106-30110 determines what call record and what call record format (small/default or large/expanded) to use for the call's 30802 call record. In this regard, the switch 30106-30110 makes nine (9) checks for each call 30802 that it receives. The switch 30106-30110 uses an expanded record for a call 30802 15 that passes any check as well as for a call 30802 that passes any combination of checks.
The first check 30804 determines if the call is involved in a direct termination overflow (DTO) at the current switch 30106-30110. For example, a DTO occurs when a customer makes a telephone call 30802 to an 30800 number and the original destination of the 800 2o number is busy. If the original destination is busy, the switch overflows the telephone call 30802 to a new destination. In this case, the switch must record the originally attempted destination, the final destination of the telephone call 30802. and the number of times of overflow. Therefore, if the call 30802 is involved in a DTO, the switch 30106-30110 must complete an expanded record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 30816.
The second check 30806 made on a call 30802 by a switch 30106-30110 determines if the calling location of the call 30802 is greater than ten ( 10) digits. The calling location is the telephone number of the location from where the call 30802 originated. Such an example is an international call which comprises at least eleven (11 ) digits. If the calling location is greater than ten ( 10) digits, the switch records the telephone number of the calling location in an expanded record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR} 30816.
A switch 30106-30110 makes a third check 30808 on a call 30802 to determine if the destination address is greater than seventeen ( 17) digits. The destination address is the number of the called location and may be a telephone number or trunk group. If the destination is greater than seventeen ( 17) digits) the switch records the destination in an expanded record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 30816.
A switch 30106-30110 makes a fourth check 30810 on a call 30802 to determine if the pre-translated digits field is used with an operated assisted service call. The pre-translated digits are the numbers of the call 30802 as dialed by a caller if the call 30202 must be translated to another number within the network. Therefore, when a caller uses an operator service, the to switch 30106-30110 records the dialed numbers in expanded record (EOSR, EPOSR) 30816.
In a fifth check 30812 on a call 30802, a switch 30106-30110 determines if the pre-translated digits of a call 30802 as dialed by a caller without operator assistance has more than ten ( 10) digits. If there are more than ten ( 10) pre-translated digits, the switch 30106-30110 records the dialed numbers in expanded record (ECDR, EPNR) 30816.
In a sixth check 30814 on a call 30802, a switch 30106-30110 determines if more than twenty-two (22) digits, including supplemental data, are recorded in the Authorization Code field of the call record. The Authorization Code field indicates a party who gets billed for 2o the call, such as the calling location or a credit card call. If the data entry requires more than twenty-two. (22) digits, the switch 30106-30110 records the billing information in an expanded record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 30816.
In a seventh check 30820 on a call 30802, a switch 30106-30110 determines if the call 30802 is a wideband call. A wideband call is one that requires multiple transmission lines, or channels. For example, a typical video call requires six (6) transmission channels : one ( 1 ) for voice and five (5) for the video transmission. The more transmission channels used during a wideband call results in a better quality of reception. Contemporary telecommunication systems currently provide up to twenty-four (24) channels.
Therefore, to 3o indicate which, and how many, of the twenty-four channels is used during a wideband call, the switch records the channel information in an expanded record (ECDR, EPNR) 30828.
In an eighth check 30822 on a call 30802, a switch 30106-30110 determines if the time and wo ~3oso rc~rrt~s~~nma charges feature was used by an operator. The time and charges feature is typically used in a hotel scenario when a hotel guest makes a telephone call using the operator's assistance and charges the call 30802 to her room. After the call 30802 has completed, the operator informs _ the hotel guest of the charge, or cost, of the call 30802. If the time and charges feature was used with a call 30802, the switch 30106-30110 records the hotel guest's name and room number in an expanded record (EOSR, EPOSR) 30832.
The ninth, and final, check 30824 made on a call 30802 by a switch 30106-30110 determines if the call 30802 is an enhanced voice service/network audio response system (EVS/NARS) o call. An EVS/NARS is an audio menu system in which a customer makes selections in response to an automated menu via her telephone key pad. Such a system includes a NARS
switch on which the audio menu system resides. Therefore, during an EVS/NARS
call 30802, the NARS switch 30106-30110 records the customer's menu selections in an expanded record (EOSR, EPOSR) 30832.
is If none of the checks 30804-30824 return a positive result, then the switch 30106-30110 uses the default record format (OSR, POSR) 30830.
Once the checks have been made on a call, a switch generates and completes the appropriate call record. Call record data is recorded in binary and Telephone Binary Coded Decimal 20 (TBCD) format. TBCD format is illustrated below:
0000 = TBCD-Null 0001 = digit 1 0010 = digit 2 0011 = digit 3 25 0100 = digit 4 O 1 O I = digit 5 0110 = digit 6 Ol 11 = digit 7 1000 = digit 8 30 1001 = digit 9 1010 = digit 0 1011 = special digit 1 (DTMF digit A) 1100 = special digit 2 (DTMF digit B) 1101 = special digit 3 (DTMF digit C) 1110 = special digit 4 (DTMF digit D) 11 I 1 = special digit 5 (Not Used) All TBCD digit fields must be filled with TBCD-Null, or zero, prior to data being recorded.
Where applicable, dialed digit formats conform to these conventions N = digits 2-9 _ X = digits 0-9 Y = digits 2-8 Thus, if the specification for a call record field contains a N, the valid field values are the digits 2-9.
Each call record, except SER, contains call specific timepoint fields. The timepoint fields are ~ 5 recorded in epoch time format. Epoch time is the number of one second increments from a particular date/time in history. The embodiment of the present invention uses a date/time of midnight (00:00 am UTC) on January 1, 1976, but this serves as an example and is not a limitation. It would be readily apparent to one skilled in the relevant art to implement an epoch time based on another date/time. In the records, Timepoint 1 represents the epoch time 2o that is the origination time of the call 30802. The other timepoint stored in the records are the number of seconds after Timepoint 1, that is, they are offsets from Timepoint 1 that a particular timepoint occurred. All of the timepoint fields must be filled in with "0's" prior to any data being recorded. Therefore, if a timepoint occurs, its count is one ( 1 ) or greater.
Additionally, timepoint counters. not including Timepoint 1, do not rollover their counts, but 25 stay at the maximum count if the time exceeds the limits.
The switch clock reflects local switch time and is used for all times except billing. Billing information is recorded in epoch time. which in this embodiment is UTC. The Time offset is a number reflecting the switch time relative to the U'rC, that is) the offset due to time zones 3o and, if appropriate, daylight savings time changes. There are three factors to consider when evaluating time change relative to UTC. First, there are time zones on both sides of UTC, and therefore there may be both negative and positive offsets. Second. the time zone offsets count down from zero (in Greenwich, England) in an Eastward direction until the WO 98/23080 _ PGT/US97/21174 International Dateline is reached. At the Dateline, the date changes to the next day, such that the offset becomes positive and starts counting down until the zero offset is reached again at Greenwich. Third, there are many areas of the world that have time zones that are not in exact one-hour increments. For example, Australia has one time zone that has a thirty (30) minute difference from the two time zones on either side of it, and Northern India has a time zone that is fifteen (15) minutes after the one next to it. Therefore, the Time Offset of the call records must account for variations in both negative and positive offsets in fifteen (15) minute increments. The embodiment of the present invention satisfies this requirement by providing a Time Offset representing either positive or negative one minute increments.
to There are two formulas used to convert local switch time to epoch time and back.
i) Epoch Time + (Sign Bit * Time Offset) = Local Switch Time ii) Local Switch Time - (Sign Bit * Time Offset) = Epoch Time The switch records the Time Offset in the SER using a value where one ( 1 ) equals one ( 1 ) minute, and computes the Time Offset in seconds and adds this value to each local Timepoint 1 before the call record is recorded. For example, Central Standard Time is six (6) hours before UTC. In this case, the Sign Bit indicates " 1 " for negative offset and the Time Offset value recorded in the SER would be 360 (6 hours * 60 minutes/hour = 360 minutes). See Figure 86 for more details on the SER record format. When recording Timepoint I in the call record, the switch multiplies the Time Offset by 60, because there is 60 seconds in each 1 minute increment, and determines whether the offset is positive or negative by checking the Sign Bit. This example results in a value of -21,600 (-1 * 360 minutes* 60 seconds/minute = -21,600 seconds). Using equation (ii) from above, if the local switch time were midnight, the corresponding epoch time might be, for example, 1,200,000,000. Subtracting the Time Offset of -21,600 results in a corrected epoch time of 1,200,021,600 seconds, which i s the epoch time for 6 hours after midnight on the next day in epoch time. This embodiment works equally as well in switches that are positioned on the East side of Greenwich where the Time 3o Offset has a positive value.
Two commands are used when changing time. First, Figure 90 illustrates the control flow of the Change Time command 30900, which changes the Local Switch Time and the Time WO 98/Z30$0 PCT/(1S97/21174 Offset. In Figure 90, after a switch operator enters the Change Time command, the switch enters step 30902 and prompts the switch operator for the Local Switch Time and Time Offset from UTC. In step 30902 the switch operator enters a new Local Switch Time and Time Offset. Continuing to step 30904, the new time and Time Offset are displayed back to the switch operator. Continuing to step 30906, the switch operator must verify the entered time and Time Offset before the actual time and offset are changed on the switch. If in step 30906 the switch operator verif es the changes, the switch proceeds to step 30908 and generates a SER with an Event Qualifier equal to two which identi .fees that the change was made to the Local Switch Time and Time Offset of the switch. The billing center uses the SER for its bill processing. The switch proceeds to step 30910 and exits the command.
Referring back to step 30906, if the switch operator does not verify the changes, the switch proceeds to step 30910 and exits the command without updating the Local Switch Time and Time Offset. For more information on SER, see Figure 86.
~ 5 Figure 91 illustrates the control flow for the Change Daylight Savings Time command 31000 which is the second command for changing time. In Figure 91, after a switch operator enters the Change Daylight Savings Time command, the switch enters step 31002 and prompts the switch operator to select either a Forward or Backward time change. Continuing to step 31004, the switch operator makes a selection. In step 31004, if the switch operator selects the zo Forward option, the switch enters step 31006. In step 31006, the switch sets the Local Switch Time forward one hour and adds one hour (count of GO) to the Time Offset. The switch then proceeds to step 31010. Referring back to step 31004, if the switch operator selects the Backward option, the switch sets the Local Switch Time back one hour and subtract one hour (count of 60) from the Time Offset. The switch then proceeds to step 31010.
In step 31010, the switch operator must verify the forward or backward option and the new Local Switch Time and Time Offset before the actual time change takes place.
If in step 31010, the switch operator verifies the new time and Time Offset, the switch proceeds to step 31012 and generates a SER with an Event Qualifier equal to nine which changes the Local 3o Switch Time and Time Offset of the switch. The switch proceeds to step 31014 and exits the command. Referring back to step 31010, if the switch operator does not verify the changes, the switch proceeds to step 31014 and exits the command without updating the Local Switch Time and Time Offset.

After the successful completion of a Change Daylight Savings Time Command, the billing records are affected by the new Time Offset. This embodiment allows the epoch time, used as the billing time, to increment normally through the daylight savings time change procedure, and not fo be affected by the change of Local Switch Time and Time Offset.
2. Network Call Identifier An embodiment provides a unique NCID that is assigned to each telephone call that traverses through the telecommunications network. Thus, the NCID is a discrete identifier among all t o network calls. The NCID is transported and recorded at each switch that is involved with the telephone call.
The originating switch of a telephone call generates the NCID. The chosen embodiment of the NCID of the present invention is an eighty-two (82) bit identif er that is comprised of the t 5 following subfields:
i) Originating Switch ID ( 14 bits) : This field represents the NCS Switch ID
as defined in the Office Engineering table at each switch. The SER call record, however, contains an -alpha numeric representation of the Switch ID. Thus, a switch uses the alphanumeric Switch 2o ID as an index into a database for retrieving the corresponding NCS Switch ID.
ii) Originating Trunk Group ( 14 bits) : This field represents the originating trunk group as defined in the 32/64-word call record format described above.
25 iii) Originating Port Number ( 19 bits) : This field represents the originating port number as defined in the 32/64-word call record format described above.
iv) Timepoint 1 (32 bits) : This field represents the Timepoint 1 value as defined in the 32/64-word call record format described above.
v) Sequence Number (3 bits) : This field represents the number of calls which have occurred on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 (second} value. The first telephone call will have a sequence number set to '0.' This value increases incrementally for each successive call which originates on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 value.
It would be readily apparent to one skilled in the relevant art to create an NCID of a different format. Each switch records the NCID in either the 32 or 64-word call record format.
Regarding the 32-word call record format, intermediate and terminating switches will record the NCID in the AuthCode field of the 32-word call record if the AuthCode filed is not used to record other information: In this case, the Originating Switch ID is the NCS Switch ID, to not the alphanumeric Switch ID as recorded in the SE;R call record. If the AuthCode is used for other information, the intermediate and terminating switches record the NCID in the 64-word call record format. In contrast, originating switches do not use the AuthCode field when storing an NCID in a 32-word call record. Originating switches record the subfields of the NCID in the corresponding separate fields of the 32-word cal t record.
That is, the ~ 5 Originating Switch ID is stored as an alphanumeric Switch ID in the Switch ID field of the SER call record; the Originating Trunk Group is stored in the Originating Trunk Group field of the 32-word call record; the Originating Port Number is stored in the Originating Port field of the 32-word call record; the Timepoint I is stored in the Timepoint 1 field of the 32-word call record; the Sequence Number is stored in the NC1:D Sequence Number field of the 32-20 word call record. The 32-word call record also includes an NCID Location (NCIDLOC) field to identify when the NCID is recorded in the AuthCode field of the call record. If the NCID
Location field contains a 'l,' then the AuthCode field contains the NCID. If the NC1D
Location field contains a '0,' then the NCID is stored in its separate sub-fields in the call record. Only intermediate and terminating switches set the NCID Location field to a ' 1' 25 because originating switches store the NCID in the separate fields of the 32-word call record.
Regarding the 64-word call record format, the expanded call record includes a separate field, call the NCID field, to store the 82 bits of the NCID. 'This call record is handled the same regardless of whether an originating, intermediate, or germinating switch stores the NCID. In 3o the 64-word call record format, the Originating Switch ID is the NCS Switch ID, not the alphanumeric Switch ID as recorded in the SER call record.
- Figure 92 illustrates the control flow of the Network Call Identifier switch call processing. A

call 30202 comes into a switch 30106-30110 (called the current switch for reference purposes; the current switch is the switch that is currently processing the call) at step 31104.
In step 31104, the current switch receives the call 30202 and proceeds to step 31106. In step 31106, the current switch accesses a local database and gets the trunk group parameters associated with the originating trunk group of the call 30202. After getting the parameters, the current switch proceeds to step 31108. In step 31108) the current switch determines if it received an NCID with the call 30202. If the current switch did not receive an NCID with the call 30202, the switch continues to step 31112.
In step 31112, the switch analyzes the originating trunk group parameters to determine the originating trunk group type. If the originating trunk group type is an InterMachine Trunk (IMT) or a release link trunk (RLT), then the switch proceeds to step 31116.
An IMT is a trunk connecting two normal teiecommunication switches, whereas a RLT is a trunk connecting an intelligent services network (1SN) platform to a normal telecommunication t 5 switch. When the current switch reaches step 31116, the current switch knows that it is not an originating switch and that it has not received an NCID. In step 31116, the current switch analyzes the originating trunk group parameters to determine whether it is authorized to create an NCID for the call 30202. In step 31116, if the current switch is not authorized to create an NCID for the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31118.
When in step 20 31118, the current switch knows that it is not an originating switch, it did not receive an NCID for the call 30202, but is not authorized to generate an NCID. Therefore, in step 31118, the current switch writes the call record associated with the call 30202 to the local switch database and proceeds to step 31120. In step 31120, the current switch transports the call 30202 out through the network with its associated NCID. Step 31120 is described below 25 in more detail.
Referring again to step 31116, if the current switch is authorized to create an NCID for the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31114. In step 31114, the current switch generates a new NCID for the call 30202 before continuing to step 31136. In step 31136, the 3o current switch writes the call record, including the NCID, associated with the call 30202 to the local switch database and proceeds to step 31120. In step 31120, the current switch transports the call 30202 out through the network with its associated NCID.
Step 31120 is described below in more detail.

Referring again to step 31112, if the current switch determines that the originating trunk group type is not an IMT or RLT, the current switch proceeds to step 31114.
When reaching step 31114, the cun:ent switch knows that it is an originating switch and, therefore, must generate a NCID for the call 30202. Step 31114 is described below in more detail. After generating a NCID in step 31114, the current switch proceeds to step 31136 to write the call record, including the NCID, associated with the call 30202 to the local database. After writing the call record, the current switch proceeds to step 31120 to transport the call out through the network with its associated NCID. Step 31120 is also described below in more t o detail.
Refernng again to step 31108, if the current switch determines that it received an NCID with the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31110. In step 31110, the current switch processes the received NCID. In step 31110, there are two possible results.
First, the current ~ 5 switch may decide not to keep the received NCID thereby proceeding from step 31110 to step 31114 to generate a new NCID. Step 31110 is described below in more detail. In step 31114, the current switch may generate a new NCII) for the call 30202 before continuing to step 31136. Step 31114 is also described below in more detail. In step 31136, the current switch writes the call record associated with the call 30202 to the local database. The current 2o switch then proceeds to step 31120 and transports the call 30202 out through the network with its associated NCID. Step 31120 is also described below in more detail.
Referring again to step 31110, the current switch may decide to keep the received NCID
thereby proceeding from step 31110 to step 31115. In step 31115, the current switch adds the 25 received NCID to the call record associated with the call 30202. Steps 31110 and 31115 are described below in more detail. After step 31115, the current switch continues to step 31136 where it writes the call record associated with the call 30202 to the local database. The current switch then proceeds to step 31120 and transports the call 30202 out through the network with its associated NCID. Step 31120 is also described below in more detail.
' Figure 93 illustrates the control logic for step 31110 which processes a received NCID. The current switch enters step 31202 of step 31110 when it determines that an NCID
was received with the call 30202. In step 31202, the current switch analyzes the originating trunk group WO 98/23080 PCTlUS97/21174 parameters to determine the originating trunk group type. If the originating trunk group type is an IMT or RLT, then the current switch proceeds to step 31212. When in step 31212, the current switch knows that it is not an originating switch and that it received an NCID for the call 30202. Therefore, in step 31212, the current switch keeps the received NCID and exits step 31110, thereby continuing to step 31115 in Figure 92, after which the current switch will store the received NCID in the call record and transport the call.
Referring again to step 31202, if the originating trunk group type is not an IMT or RLT, the current switch proceeds to step 31204. In step 31204, the current switch determines if the 1o originating trunk group type is an Integrated Services User Parts Direct Access Line (ISUP
DAL) or an Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN
PRI). ISUP
is a signaling protocol which allows information to be sent from switch to switch as information parameters. An ISUP DAL is a trunk group that primarily is shared by multiple customers of the network, but can also be dedicated to a single network customer. In 15 contrast, an ISDN PRI is a trunk group that primarily is dedicated to a single network customer, but can also be shared by multiple network customers. A network customer is an entity that leases network resources. In step 31204, if the current switch determines that the trunk group type is not an ISUP DAL or ISDN PRI, the current switch proceeds to step 31206. When in step 31206, the current switch knows that it received an NCID
that was not 2o generated by a switch that is part of the telecommunication network or by a switch that is a customer of the network. Therefore, in step 31206, the current switch discards the received NCID because it is an unreliable NCID. From step 31206, the current switch exits step 31110, thereby continuing to step 31114 in Figure 92 where the current switch will create a new NCID and transport that NCID with the call 30202.
Referring back to step 31204, if the current switch determines that the originating trunk group type is an ISUP DAL or ISDN PRI, the current switch continues to step 31208.
When in step 31208, the current switch knows that it received an NCID from a customer trunk group.
Therefore, the current switch analyzes the originating trunk group parameters to determine 3o whether it is authorized to create a new NCID for the call 30202. The current switch may be authorized to create a new NCID and overwrite the NCID provided by the customer to ensure that a valid NCID corresponds to the call 30202 and is sent through the network. In step 31208, if the current switch is not authorized to create a new NCID for the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31210. In step 31210, the current switch checks the validity of the received NCID, for example, the NCID length. 1f the received NCID is invalid, the current switch proceeds to step 31206. In step 31206, the current switch discards the invalid NC1D. From step 31206, the current switch exits step 31110, thereby continuing to step 31114 in Figure 92 where the current switch will create a new NCID and transport that NCID
with the call 30202.
. Referring again to step 31210, if the current switch determines that the received NCID is valid, the current switch proceeds to step 31212. In step 31212 the current switch keeps the received NCID and exits step 31110, thereby continuing to step 31115 in Figure 92 where the t o current switch will store the received NCID in the call record and transport the call.
Figure 94A illustrates the control logic for step 31114 which generates an NCID. The current switch enters step 31302 when an NCID must be created. In step 31302, the current switch will calculate a sequence number. The sequence number represents the number of t s calls which have occurred on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 value. The first call has a sequence number value of '0,' after which the sequence number will increase incrementally for each successive call that originates on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 value. After creating the sequence number in step 31302, the current switch proceeds to step 31304. In step 31304, the current switch creates a call record for the call 20 30202, including in it the call's 30202 newly created NCID. After the call record has been created, the current switch exits step 31114 and proceeds to step 31136 in Figure 92 where the current switch writes the call record to the local switch database.
Figure 94B illustrates the control logic for step 3111 which adds a received NCID to the 25 call record associated with the call 30202. Upon entering step 31115, the current switch enters step 31306. When in step 31306, the current switch knows that it has received a valid NCID from an intermediate or terminating switch, or from a customer switch. In step 31306, the current switch determines if the AuthCode field of the 32-word call record is available for storing the NCID. If the AuthCode field is available, the current switch proceeds to step 30 31310. In step 31310, the current switch stores the NCID in the AuthCode field of the 32-- word call record. The current switch must also set the NCID Location field to the value ' 1' which indicates that the NCID is stored in the AuthCode field. After step 31310, the current switch exits step 31115 and continues to step 31136 in Figure 92 where the current switch WO 98/23080 PCT/US97121l74 writes the call record to the local switch database.
Referring again to step 31306, if the AuthCode field is not available in the 32-word call record, the current switch proceeds to step 31308. In step 31308, the current switch stores the NCID in the NCID field of the 64-word call record. After step 31308, the current switch exits step 31115 and continues to step 31136 in Figure 92 where the current switch writes the call record to the local switch database.
Figure 95 illustrates the control logic for step 31120 which transports the call from the current switch. There are two entry points for this control logic: steps 31402 and 31412.
Upon entering step 31402 from step 31136 on Figure 92, the current switch knows that it has created an NCID or has received a valid NCID. In step 31402, the current switch accesses a local database and gets the trunk group parameters associated with the terminating trunk group for transporting the call 30202. After getting the parameters, the current switch proceeds to step 31404. In step 31404, the current switch determines the terminating trunk group type. If the terminating trunk is an ISUP trunk, the current switch proceeds to step 31408. In step 31408, the current switch analyzes the parameters associated with the ISUP
trunk type to determine whether or not to deliver the NCID to the next switch.
If the current switch is authorized to deliver the NCID, the current switch proceeds to step 31416. In step 31416, the current switch transports the call to the next switch along with a SS7 initial address message (IAM). The NCID is transported as part of the generic digits parameter of the IAM. The IAM contains setup information for the next switch which prepares the next switch to accept and complete the call 30202. The format of the generic digits parameter is shown below in Table 306 Generic Digits Parameter Code: 11000001 Type: 0 Byte #, Bit # Description byte 1, bits Type of Digits : Indicates the contents 0-4 of the parameter.

This field has a binary value of ' 11 O 11' to indicate that the parameter contains the NCID.

byte 1, bits Encoding Scheme : Indicates the format 5-7 of the parameter contents. This field has a binary value of '011' to indicate that the NCID is stared in the binary format.

byte 2, bits Originating Switch ID

byte 3, bits byte 3, bits Originating Trunk Group byte 4, bits byte 5, bits byte 5, bits Originating Port Number byte 6, bits byte 7, bits byte 7, bit Not Used byte 8, bits Timepoint 1 byte 9, bits byte 10, bits byte I 1, bits byte 12, bits NCID Sequence Number byte 12, bits Not Used Table 306 W0.98I23080 PG"T/US97/21174 After transporting the call 30202 and the IAM, the current switch proceeds to step 31418, thereby exiting the switch processing.
Referring again to step 31408, if the current switch is not authorized to deliver the NCID to the next switch in an IAM message, the current switch proceeds to step 31412.
In step 31412, the current switch transports the call 30202 to the next switch under normal procedures which consists of sending an IAM message to the next switch without the NCID
recorded as part of the generic digits parameter. After transporting the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31418, thereby exiting the switch processing.
Referring again to step 31404, if the current switch determines that the terminating trunk is not an ISUP, the current switch proceeds to step 31406.
In step 31406, the current switch determines if the terminating trunk group is an ISDN trunk (the terminating trunk group is dedicated to one network customer). If the terminating trunk group is an ISDN, the current switch proceeds to step 31410. In step 31410, the current switch analyzes the parameters associated with the ISDN trunk group type to determine whether or not to deliver the NCID to the next switch. If the current switch is authorized to deliver the NCID, the current switch proceeds to step 31414. In step 31414, the current switch transports the call to the next switch along with a setup message. The setup message 2o contains setup information for the next switch which prepares the next switch to accept and complete the call 30202. The NCID is transported as part of the locking shift codeset 6 _ parameter of the setup message. The format of the locking shift codeset 6 parameter is shown below in Table 307 Locking Shift Codeset 6 Parameter Code: 11000001 Type: 0 Byte #, Bit # Description WO 98/23080 _ PCT/US97121174 byte I, bits Type of Digits : Indicates the contents 0-4 of the parameter.

This field has a binary value of ' 11011' to indicate that the parameter contains the NCID.

byte 1, bits Encoding Scheme : Indicates the format 5-7 of the parameter contents. This field has a binary value of '011' to indicate that the NCID is stored in the binary format.

byte 2, bits Originating Switch ID

byte 3, bits byte 3, bits Originating Trunk Group byte 4, bits byte 5, bits byte S, bits Originating Port Number byte 6, bits byte 7, bits byte 7, bit.7 Not Used byte 8, bits Timepoint 1 byte 9, bits byte 10, bits byte 11, bits byte 12, bits NCID Sequence Number byte 12, bits Not Used Table 307 After transporting the call 30202 and the setup message, the current switch proceeds to step - 31418, thereby exiting the switch processing.
Referring again to step 31410, if the current switch determines that it does not have authority to deliver the NCID to the next switch in a setup message, the current switch proceeds to step 31412. In step 31412, the current switch transports the call 30202 to the next switch under normal procedures which consists of sending a setup message to the next switch without the NCID recorded as part of the locking shift codeset 6 parameter. After transporting the call t o 30202; the current switch proceeds to step 31418, thereby exiting the switch processing.
Referring again to step 31412, this step is also entered from step 31118 on Figure 92 when the current switch did not receive an NCID, is an intermediate or terminating switch, and is not authorized to create an NCID. In this case, in step 31412, the current switch also 15 transports the call 30202 to the next switch under normal procedures which consists of sending an IAM or setup message to the next switch without the NCID recorded as part of the parameter. After transporting the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31418, thereby exiting the switch processing.
2o A system and method for the switches of a telecommunications network to generate call records for telephone calls using a flexible and expandable record format.
Upon receipt of a telephone call, a switch in the network analyzes the telephone call to determine whether the default call record is sufficiently large to store call record information pertaining to the telephone call, or whether the expanded call record must be used to store the call information 25 pertaining to the telephone call. After determining which call record to use, the switch generates the default or expanded call record. The switch sends a billing block, comprised of completed call records, to a billing center upon filling an entire billing block.
While various embodiments have been described above, it should be understood that they 30 have been presented by way of example only, and not limitation. Thus, the breadth and scope of a preferred embodiment should not be limited by any of the above described exemplary embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents.

WO 9880 PCT/US97I211'74 - APPENDIX
Table 301 - CDR/PNR Record Fot~mat~
Word #) Bit # Description Word 0, bits 0-3 Call Record Id (GRID): Identifies the record type.

0 = Default 1 = CDR

2 = SER

3 = PNR

4 = OSR

5 = POSR

6 = ECDR

7 = EPNR

8 = EOSR

9 = EPOSR

10-IS = Not Used Word 0, bits 4-15 Call Disconnect ID (CDID): Identifies the call record. Each call record has a unique ID number. These 12 bits contain the 12 least significant bits of the CDID.

Word 1, bits 0-I S Timepoint 1 (TPI ): A binary count of the number of seconds that Word 2, bits 0-15 occurred- between midnight (UTC) on January 1) 1976, and the tithe that the incoming call was detected by the switch.

Word 3, bits 0-12 Timepoint 3 (TP3): A binary count of the number of seconds between Titnepoint 1 and the time the outgoing signalling protocol was completed; that is, the number of seconds that it took for the switch to connect to the outgoing trunk.

Word 3, bits 13-15 Titnepoint 6 (TP6;1: A binary count of the number of seconds Word 4) bits 0-9 between timepoint 1 and the time Answer Supervision was detected or received. This is the time that it took for the call to be answered by the person or audio system being called.

Word 4, bits 10-15 Timepoint 7 (TP7;1: A binary count of the nutnt>er v. seconds Word S) bits 0-15 between timepoint 1 and the time that the originating or -terminating parry disconnected vrhichever is first.

Word 6, bits 0-15 Originating Port (OP): The absolute port number of the originating Word 7) bits 0 trunk. Originating trunk is the line on which the call came to the switch.

Word 7, bits 1-15 Terminating Port (TP): The absolute port number of the last Word 8) bits 0-1 terminating trunk seized for an outgoing call attempt. The terminating trunk is the last line on which the call is transmitted.

Word 8, bits 2-14 Originating Trunk Gmup (OTG): A binary number expressing the Originating Trunk Group number of the ot~iginating trunk. An originating trunk group is a group of ports coming from the same I location.

Word 8, bits l5 Terminating Trunk Group (TTG): A binary number expressing the Word 9, bits 0-11 Terminating Trunk: Group number of the Terminating trunk. A

terminating trunk group is a group of ports going to the same location. If a call fails because no trunks are available) record the last trunk group number that was attempted.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word 1I) Bit ~ Description Word 9, bits 12-15 Timepoint 3 qualifier (TP3Q): Contains the outpulsed call disposition qualifier which provides the telephone number of the person making the call to the person being called. The person being called needs to have signed up for the "ANI Delivery"

service and have a display device for displaying the caller's telephone number.

0 = Default 1 = ANI/CSI was delivered 2 = DNIS was delivered--3 = ANI/CSI and DNIS were delivered 4-S = Not Used 6 = NCT

7 = NCT, ANI/CSI was delivered 8 = NCT) DNIS was delivered 9 = NCT, ANI/CSI and DNIS was delivered 10 = NCT Tandem 11-15 = Not Used Word 10) bits 0-1 Titnepoint 6 qualifier (TP6Q): Contains the answer supervision qualifier indicating the way in which the telephone call was answered.

0 = Hardware detected an Answer _ 1 = Software detected Voice 2 = Not Used 3' = Operator/NARS detected an Answer * Not Used in CDR/PNR

Word 10, bits 2-7 Action Code (AC): The switch provides an action code which indicates the type of destination address, or what type of telephone number was called) or an error code.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) ~.
Word ~Y, Bit ~ Description 0 = Default 1 = 7-digit number without overflow 2 = 7-digit number with overflow 3 = DDD number 4 = IDDD number 5 = Switch generated Action Code 6 = Incoming exclusion failure 7 = ID code failure 8 = Unexp~ted error occurs in the NCS/DAP

9 = Misdialed number and the NCS/DAP is unable to translate the dialed number 10 = 10-digit number without overflow 11 = 10-digit number with overflow 12 = National with overflow 13 = International with overflow 14 = ANI not fowid 15 = NPA-NXXX not found 16 = Pilot number not found 17 = Associated partition not found 18 = ADF format error 19 = Switch ID not found 20 = 800 number not found 21 = 800 number out of band 22 = 800 number no longer in service 23 = Invalid ID code 24 = Range privilege 25 = ?-digit number not in database 26 = 10-digit exclusion feature 27 = 900 number not found 28 = 900 number out of band 29 = 900 number no longer in service 30 = NCS network management blocked 31 = NCS Gate Denial 32 = FIexSTC) Overflow Not Allowed 33 = FIexSTC, Overflow Allowed 34 = SAC Number Not Found 35 = SAC Number Out of Band 36 = 700 Number Not Found 37 = 700 Number Out of Band 38 = ICR designated Out of Band 39 = NCT - Reversed CaII Direction 40-49 = Not Used SO = Flexible Direct Termination CaII
without overflow _- 51 = Flexible Direct Termination Call with overflow 52 = Outbound VNet without overflow 53 = Outbound IVNet with overflow 54 = Global Switch Profile Not Found 55 = ANI Index Provided by DAP

56-62 = Not Used 63 = Intcrnacional Inbound AAP

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word, Bit # Description Word 10, bits 8-11 Originating Trunk Class (OTC): Indicates what type of originating trunk was accessed.

0 = ONAL (FG-A) 1 = GNAT (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D) CAMA, LAMA) 2 = DAL, VNET CAMA, FGS-DAL) 3 = IMT (Inband or SS7) -4 = International Circuit (R1) R2, #5) #6, #7).

5 = ISDN PRI

6 = OST

7-15 = Not Used FG = Feature Group Word 10, bits 12-15 Terminating Trunk Class (TTC): Indicates what type of terminating trunk was accessed.

0 = ONAL (FG-A) I = GNAT (FG-B) FG-C) FG-D) CAMA) LAMA) 2 = DAL, VNET CAMA, FGS-DAL) 3 = IMT (Inband or SS7) 4 = International Circuit (R1) R2) #5) #G, #7) 5 = ISDN PRI

6 = OST

7-15 = Not Used FG = Feature Group Word 11, bits 0-7 Information Digits (ID): The switch receives these digits from the originating trunk group indicating the type of telephone on which the telephone call originated) such as a home telephone, pay telephone, or prison telephone.

I
FG-B Direct) LAMA FG-D MCIIMT #5 #6 bits 0-3:TBCD Null X X TBCD Null X

bits 4-7: X X X X - X

Word l l ) bits Automatic Number Identification (ANI) 8-15 Index Number: The index number is obtained from the ANI Index Table for all calls except 800 calls. The ANI number is looked up to determine whether the caller is a VNet customer or not. If the caller is a VNet caller) the index number is used to look up the destination address.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2B) Word ~Y) Bit ~ Description Word 12, bits 0-15 Call Location ID (CLI): Represents the 10 digits from where the Word 13, bits 0-15 call came. If switch receives more than l0 digits, record them in Word 14, bits 0-7 the ECDR/EPNR. There are nine (9) types of calling locations:

1. VNet CAMA DAL originations: If CSI
is available) prefix the CSI with filed HNPA and HNXX information, if available, and record. Use NOCL.1 value of 7.

2. FG-C originations: if ANI. or' CSI
information is not available and the number is in the OOY+NXX+XXXX
format) record the OOY in CLIl-3) and record the OSID/OTG
in CL14-10. Use NOCLI value of 8.

3. Inband FG-D Originations: Record the ANI that was received starting with CLI1. Use NOCLI value of 1.

4. SS7 FG-D Originations: Record the charge number, if available. If not available, record the tailing party number. Use NOCLI value of 2 or 3.

S. International otiginations: Record the country code and the national number of the calling patty.
Use NOCLI of 9.

6. SS7 IMTs Originations: Record the following infotTnation in this order of importance: l) charge number, 2) calling patty number, 3) OSID/OTG from generic digits.
Use NOCLI of 2) 3, or 8.

7. SS7 Reseller Originations: The CLI
field is filled with TBCD-Nulls.

8. SS? Private Network Originations: The I CL.I field is filled with-TBCD-Nulls.
I

9. PRI Organizations: Record the calling parry number received in the ISDN setup message.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word b, Bit Jf Description The format:

1-10 digit Incoming ANI OSID/OTG lnt'1 Word 12, bits 0-3 CLI1 TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12) bits 4-7 CLI2 TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 8-11 CLI3 TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 12-15 CL14 X(OSID) X'(NN) Word 13, bits 0-3 CLIS X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 4-7 CLI6 X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 8-11 CLI7 X(OTG) X(NN) Word 13) bits 12-15 CLI8 X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 0-3 CLI9 X(O?G) X(NN) Word 14, bits 4-7 CLI10 X(OTG) X(NN) CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number OSID = Originating Switch NSC 1D (000-999) OTG = Originating Trunk Group (0000-8191 ) Word 14) bits 8-15 Authorization Codes: Represents 22 digits of who gets billed for Word 15, bits 0-15 the call which includes one or more of the following and/or an '~ Word 16) bits optional Supplementary Code:

Word 17) bits 0-15 Word 18, bits 0-15 1. Authorization Code - Contains the authorization code digits.

Word 19, bits 0-15 AUTH 1-AUTHS records the dialed or filed authorization codes, afterwhich is recorded an optional variable 1-4 digit security code, SECI-SEC4, comprised of TBCD digits 0-9 and A-D. After the I last digit) record a TBCD-Null) afterwhich record any supplementary code digits) SUPP1-SUPP12.
Record TBCD-Null in any unused byte. Authorization Code format:

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) wo 9sn3oso rc~r~rs9~nma Word A~, Bit ~ Description ._~

_ 5 digit 6 digit 7 digit Auth Code Auth Auth Code Code Word 14) bitsAl AUTHI AUTHI AUTH1 Word 14, bitsAZ AUTH2 AUTH2 AUTH2 Word 15, bitsA3 AUTH3 AUTH3 AUTH3 Word 15, bitsA4 AUTH4 AUTH4 AUTH4 Word 15, bitsAS AUTHS AUTHS AUTHS
8-1 l Word I5) bitsA6 SEC1 AUTH6 AUTH6 12:-15 Word 16, bitsA7 SEC2 SEC1 AUTH7 Word 16, bitsA8 SEC3 SEC2 SEC1 Word 16, bitsA9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2.

Word 16) bitsA10 TBCD-NuilSEC4 SEC3 Word 17, bitsA11 SUPPl TBCD-NullSEC4 Word 17, bitsA12 SUPP2 SUPPI TBCD-Null Word 17) bitsA13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPPI

Word 17, bitsA14 SUPP4 SUPP3 SUPP2 Word 18) bitsA15 SUPPS SUPP4 SUPP3 0-:3 Word 18) bitsA16 SUPP6 SUPPS SUPP4 4=1 Word 18, bitsA17 SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPPS
8-:l l Word 18, bitsA18 SUPPS SUPP7 SUPP6 Word 19) bitsA19 SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 0-a Word 19) bitsA20 SUPPIO SUPP9 SUPP8 4-;l Word 19, bitsA21 SUPPI SUPPIO SUPP9 8-'.l l l Word 19) bitsA22 SUPPI2 SUPPI1 SUPP10 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26~

Word ~, Bit ~Y Description 2. Calling (CSI) -Station ID Contains the digits of the calling station identifier. recorded starting The CSI digits at Al. A
will be TBCD-Null is recorded after the last CSI
digit, followed by Supplemental igits. Unusedcontain a TBCD-Null.
Code d bytes Calling Station ID format:

7 digit 10 digit CSI CSI

Word 14, bitsA1 X X

Word 14, bitsA2 X X

Word 15) bitsA3 X X

Word 15, bitsA4 X X

Word 15, bitsAS X X

Word 15) bitsA6 X X

_ Word 16, bitsA7 X X

Word 16, bitsA8 TBCD-NullX

Word 16, bitsA9 SUPPI X

Word 16) bitsA10 SUPP2 X

Word 17) bitsA11 SUPP3 TBCD-Null Word 17) bitsA12 SUPP4 SUPP1 Word 17) bitsA13 SUPPS SUPP2 Word 17, bitsA14 SUPP6 SUPP3 Word 18, bitsA15 SUPP7 SUPP4 Word 18, bitsA16 SUPP8 SUPPS

Word 18, bitsA17 SUPP9 SUPP6 Word 18, bitsA18 SUPP10 SUPP7 Word 19) bitsA19 SUPPI SUPP8 0-3 l Word 19, bitsA20 SUPP12 SUPP9 Word 19) bitsA21 SUPPI SUPP10 4-11 l Word 19, bitsA22 SUPP12 SUPP11 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) rc~rrtrs9~nma Word !!, Bit ~ Description ...~

__ 3. Supplementary emental Codes are Codes - Suppl recorded starting in bytes A1. Unused contain TBCD-Null.
Supplementary Code format:

_ 800/900 VNet Supp. Codes Word 14) bits A1 SUPP1 8-11.

Word 14) bits A2 SUPP2 12-1.5 Word !5) bits A3 SUPP3 Word 15, bits A4 SUPP4 Word 15, bits AS SUPPS
8-t 1 Word 15, bits A6 SUPP6 Word 16) bits A7 SUPP7 Word 16, bits A8 SUPP8 Word 16, bits A9 SUPP9 _ Word 16, bits A10 SUPP10 Word 17, bits Al SUPPl l 0-3 l Word 17, bits A12 SUPPI2 Word t7, bits A13 SUPP13 Word 17, bits A14 SUPP14 Word 18) bits AIS SUPP15 Word 18, bits A16 SUPP16 Word 18, bits A17 SUPP17 Word 18, bits A18 SUPP18 Word 19, bits A19 SUPP19 Word 19) bits A20 SUPP20 4-?

Word 19) bits A21 SUPP21 Word 19) bits A22 SUPP22 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/Z3080 PGT/tTS97/Z1I74 Word ~Y) Bit # Description I

4. VNet Remote caller accesses VNet Access - If services the through the Remote Access Service) the access number is recorded starting at recorded after the A 1. A TBCD-Null last digit is followed by any Supplemental Codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null.
VNet Remote Access format:

Word 14) bits A1 X
8-l I

Word 14, bits A2 X

Word 15) bits A3 X

Word 15, bits A4 X

Word 15, bits AS X

Word 15, bits A6 X

Word 16, bits A7 X

Word 16, bits A8 X

Word 16) bits A9 X

Word 16) bits A10 X

Word 17) bits A11 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits A12 SUPP1 Word 17, bits A13 SUPP2 Word 17, bits A14 SUPP3 Word 15) bits A15 SUPP4 Word 18, bits A16 SUPPS

Word 18, bits A17 SUPP6 Word 18) bits A18 SUPP7 Word 19, bits A19 SUPP8 Word 19) bits A20 SUPP9 Word 19) bits A21 SUPP10 Word 19, bits A22 SUPP11 12-15 __ SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word 11, Bit ~ Description 5. Calling calling party number Parry Number is recorded - The for SS7 FGD inations call orig received with a charge number and a calling party. the SS7 calling party number Recordnumber in A1-I0. A TBCD-Nullis recorded after the last digit, followed by supplementary codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null.
Calling parry number format:

Word 14, bits AI N

Word 14, bits A2 X

Word 15) bits A3 X

Word 15) bits A4 N

Word 15) bits AS X

Word 15, bits A6 X
12-~15 Word 16, bits A7 N

Word 16, bits A8 X

Word 16) bits A9 X

Word 16, bits A10 X

Word 17) bits Al TBCD-Null 0-3 l Word 17, bits A12 SUPP1 Word 17, bits A13 SUPP2 Word 17) bits A14 SUPP3 Word 18, bits A15 SUPP4 Word 18, bits A16 SUPPS

Word 18, bits A17 SUPP6 Word 18) bits A18 SUPP7 Word 19, bits A19 SUPP8 Word 19) bits A20 SUPP9 Word 19, bits A21 SUPP10 Word 19) bits A22 SUPPl l SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word A~, Bit 7! Description 6. Credit Card Number - Record the commercial credit card or presubcribed credit card number starting in Al. The PIN digits of a valid presubscribed credit card number are masked out by writing TBCD-A over the 4 PIN digits.
A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit, followed by supplementary codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Credit card number format:

Word 14, bits 8-11 A1 X

Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X

Word 15) bits 0-3 A3 X

Word 15) bits 4-7 A4 X

Word 15, bits 8-11 AS X

Word 15) bits 12-15 A6 X

Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X

Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X

Word 16) bits 8-11 A9 X

Word 16) bits 12-15 A10 X

-- Word 17) bits 0-3 Al l X

Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 X

Word 17) bits 8-lI- A13 X

Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 X

Word 18) bits 0-3 A15 X

Word I8, bits 4-7 A16 X

Word 18) bits 8-11 A17 X

Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 X

Word 19, bits 0-3 A9 X

Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19) bits 8-I1 A21 SUPP1 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/23080 PCT/US97l21174 .....
Word) Bit A' Description 7. 14 Digit Cards MCI/VNet -The digit calling card/VNet card number is recorded starting in A1 with the last 4 PIN
digits masktd out TBCD-Afor those digits.
by writing A TBCD-Null is written after the last digit) followed by supplemental codes.

Unused bytes ll. Calling card/VNet contain TBCD-Nu card format:

Word I4, bits A1 X

Word 14, bits A2 X

Word 15, bits A3 X

Word 15) bits A4 X

Word 15, bits AS X

Word I5) bits A6 X

Word 16, bits A7 X

Word 16, bits A8 X

Word 16) bits A9 X

Word 16, bits A10 X

Word 17, bits A11 TBCD-A

Word 17) bits A 12 TBCD-A

Word 17) bits A13 TBCD-A
g-11 Word 17, bits A14 TBCD-A

Word 18, bits A15 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits A16 SUPP1 Word 18) bits A17 SUPP2 Word l8,bits A18 SUPP3 Word 19, bits A19 SUPP4 Word 19, bits A20 SUPPS

Word 19, bits A21 SUPP6 Word 19, bits A22 SUPP7 SUBSTfTUTE SHEET (RULE 28) WO 98/230 PG"f/US97/21174 Word ~) Bit TI Description 8. Telecommunications/P'TT
Cards - The 23 digits) or less, of the telecommunications card is recorded starting in A1. A TBCD-Null is recorded , followed by supplemental after the last codes.
digit Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null.
Telecommunications card format:

Word 14) bits A1 X

Word 14, bits A2 X

Word 15, bits A3 X

Word 15, bits A4- X

Word 15, bits AS X

Word 15, bits A6 X

Word 16) bits A7 X

Word 16, bits A8 X

Word I6) bits A9 X

Word 16) bits A10 X

Word 17) bits A X

WoM 17, bits A12 X

Word 17, bits A13 X

Word 17, bits A14 X

Word 18, bits A X

Word 18) bits A16 X

Word 19) bits A17 X

Word 19, bits AI8 X

Word 19) bits A19 X

Word 19, bits A20 X

Word 19, bits A21 X

Word 19, bits A22 X

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) wo 9snn3oso rc~rnrs9~mma Word-JI) Bit A~ Description' 9. OSID and OTG - For international inbound VNet or SAC calls, the OSID and OTG are recorded as received from the SS7 Generic Digits parameter.
After the parameters are recorded, the remaining bytes contain TBCD-Null.
OSID and OTG
format:

Word 14) bits A1 X (OSID) 8-1 l Word 14, bits A2 X (OSIDj Word 15) bits A3 X (OSID) Word 15, bits A4 X (OTG) 4=7 Word 15) bits AS X (OTG) 8-1 l Word 15) bits A6 X (OTG) 12-:IS

Word 16, bits A7 X (OTG) Word 16, bits A8 TBCD-Null Word 16, bits A9 TBCD-Null 8-i:l Word 16, bits A10 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits A11 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits A12 TBCD-Null Word 17) bits A13 TBCD-Null 8-l:l Word I7) bits A14 TBCD-Null l2-15 Word I8, bits A15 TBCD-Null Word 18) bits A16 TBCD-Nult Word I8) bits A17 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits A18 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits A19 TBCD-Null Word I9, bits A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits A21 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits A22 TBCD-Null I
OSID ~ Originating Switch ID

i OTG = Originating Trunk Group SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/Z3080 PG"T/US97/Z1174 Word b, Bit ll Description 10. Business Group ID -For some SS7 trunk groups, a business group ID is received in a SS7 parameter and is recorded in Al-A6.

After the last digit) a TBCD-Null is recorded followed by any supplemental nused codes. U bytes contain TBCD-Null.

Word 14, bits A1 X

Word 14) bits A2 X

Word 15, bits A3 X

Word 15, bits A4 X

Word 15, bits AS X

Word 15, bits A6 X

Word 16, bits A7 TBCD-Null Word 16, bits A8 SUPP1 Word 16, bits A9 SUPP2 Word 16, bits A10 SUPP3 Word 17, bits A11 SUPP4 Word 17, bits A12 SUPPS

Word 17, bits A13 SUPP6 Word 17, bits A14 SUPP7 Word 18) bits A15 SUPP8 Word 18) bits A16 SUPP9 Word 18) bits A17 SUPP10 Word 18, bits A18 SUPP11 Word 19, bits A19 SUPP12 Word 19, bits A20 SUPP13 Word 19) bits A21 SUPP14 Word 19) bits A22 SUPP15 11. Network Information - For some SS7 trunk groups) a network information ID is received in a SS7 parameter and is recorded in A1-A4. After igit) the last d a TBCD-Null is recorded followed by any supplemental. bytes contain TBCD-Null.
codes Unused Word 14) bits Al N

Word 14, bits A2 X

Word 15, bits A3 X

Word 15, bits A4 N

Word 15) bits AS TBCD-Null Word 15, bits A6 SUPPI

Word 16) bits A7 SUPP2 Word 16) bits AS SUPP3 Word 16) bits A9 SUPP4 Word 16) bits A10 SUPPS

Word 17) bits A11 SUPP6 0-3 ~

Word 17,~its A12 SUPP7 Word 17, bits A13 SUPP8 Word 17, bits A14 SUPP9 Word 18) bits A15 SUPP10 Word 18) bits A16 SUPPl l Word 15) bits A17 SUPP12 Word 18) bits A18 SUPP13 12-1:5 Word 19) bits A19 SUPP14 Word 19, bits A20 SUPP15 Word 19, bits A21 SUPP16 Word 19) bits A22 SUPP17 12-1:5 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98rZ3080 PCT/LJS97/21174 Word A~, Bit ll Description 12. Network Call Identifier (NCID) - If the NCID is recorded in the 'A' field, it will be recorded in binary beginning with A1.

The Entry Code field will be indicative of the call processing associated with the particular call or "0". If the NCID is recorded in the NCID field of a 64 word call record, the Entry Code will also be indicative of the call processing associated with the particular call or "0". The NCID is comprised of the following:

Originating Switch ID

Originating Trunk Group Originating Port Number Timepoint One NCID Sequence Number Word 20) bits 0-15 Destination Address: This is the seventeen digits of the destination Word 21, bits 0-15 address which is the number being called.
If more than 17 digits is Word 22, bits 0-15 required, use ECDR/EPNR format. Unused bytes contain~BCD-Word 23, bits 0-15 Null.

Word 24) bits 0-3 7-digit 10-digit DDD IDDD

Word 20, bits 0-3 D1 N N N CC

Word 20, bits 4-7 D2 X X X CC

Word 20, bits 8-1 F D3 X X X CC

Word 20) bits 12-IS D4 X N N NN

Word 21, bits 0-3 DS X X X NN

Word 21) bits 4-7 D6 X X X NN

Word 21) bits 8-11 D7 X X X NN

Word 21,- bits 12-15 DS X(TSID) X NN

Word 22, bits 0-3 D9 X(TSID) X NN

Word 22, bits 4-7 D10 X(TSID) X NN

Word 22) bits 8-l l D11 XfT'TG) X(TSID) T-Null NN

Word 22) bits 12-15 D12 X('T'TG) X(TSID) T-Null NN

Word 23, bits 0-3 D13 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN

Word 23) bits 4-7 D14 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN

Word 23, bits 8-11 D15 T-Null X('ITG) T-Null NN

Word 23) bits 12-15 D16 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null Word 24) bits 0-3 D17 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null CC = Customer (:arrier -NN = National Number TSID = Terminating Switch ID

TTG = Terminating Trunk Group SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word ff, Bit ~ Description Word 24) bits 4-15 Pretranslated Digits: This represents the digits as dialed by the Word 25, bits 0-IS caller which may or may not be the Destination Address. The Word 26, bits 0-11 pretranslated digits are only recorded if a translation of the number occurs. if the dialed number is the destination number) and is not translated to another number, this field contains TBCD-Nulls. If there are more than 10 digits, use the ECDR/EPNR format.

10 digit VNet, SAC OOY 7 digit IDDD

DNIS) or SAC VNet or 10 digit Hotline Code Hotline (example) Word 24, bits 4-7 PTD1 N 0 N N

Word 24) bits 8-1 l PTD2 X 0 X N

Word 24) bits 12-15 PTD3 X Y X N

Word 25, bits 0-3 PTD4 N N X N

Word 25, bits 4-7 PTDS X X X N

Word 25) bits 8-11 PTD6 X X X N

Word 25, bits 12-15 PTD7 X X X N

Word 26) bits 0-3 PTD8 X X TBDC-Nul! .
N

Word 26) bits 4-7 PTD9 X X TBDC-Null N

Word 26, bits 8-11 PTD10 X X TBDC-Null N

Word 26) bits 12-15 Not Used.

Word 27, bits 0-3 Feature Code (FC): The switch determines a feature code for the call which indicates whether a specific type of data line is required for the call such as a higher quality line for facsimile transmissions.

0 = Default 1 = FAX

2 = NABS

3 = Data Call 4 = Switched DS 1 (HSCS) 5 = Switched DS3 (HSCS) 6-8 = Not Used 9 = NX64 10 = Offset Routing I1 = AAP Cal! (Used in Gateway Toll Ticket Conversion) 12 = Card Gate Denial 13 = Forum Dia! In audio/video conference 14 = Concert Freephone 15 = Not Used Word 27) bits 4-7 Terminating Network Code (TNC): Indicates the terminating -- facilities to be used for the remainder of the path of the call. For example) an indicator for no satellite transmission.

0 = Default I = No Routing Restrictions 2 = Avoid Satellite 3 = Route via DSI

4 = Route via DS1 and avoid satellite 5 = Route via Protected Facilities Required 6 = Route via Protected Facilities Preferred 7-15 = Not Used SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/23080 PCT/USg7IZI174 Word A~, Bit k Description Word 27, bits 8-11 Network Access Type (NAT): Indicates which type of network access was used as defined at the originating switch on the network; that is, how the caller gained access to the network. The types of access are:

0 = Default 1 = 800 call 2 = Credit Card Access 3 = Operator Assistance Access 4 = VNET Remote Access 5 = BPP Access 6 = FGD Cut-Through Access 7-15 = Not Used Word 27, bits 12-15 Titnepoint 7 Qualifier (TP7Q): Contains the call's first disconnect qualifier, that is, how the call was terminated. The types of ditconnectit)n 8IC:

0 = Calling parry discotmects 1 = Called parry disconnects 2 = Calling parry reorigination 3 = Switch initiated (ez. switch error cut off the call) 4 = All Routes Busy 5 = Disconnected due to a long ring;
ring timer exceeded 6 = Cali disconnected due to network invoked transfer 7 = Feature/Service Interaction 8-15 = Not Used Word 28, bits 0-6 Entry Code (EC): Indicates the type of call processing that took place and what type of information is recorded in the --Authorization Code field. If more than one entry code is received, record the last one.. The following codes are valid:

suesriTUrE sHeEr ~RU~ 2s~

Word #) Bit # L)escription 0 = Default 1 = Person-to-Person (P-P) 2 = Station-to-Station (S-S) 3 = Third Party Billing (3rd parry number recorded) 4 = P-P collect (bill to called parry) 5 = S-S collect (bill to called patty) 6 = MCI card or VNet card (S-S) 7 = BOC inward dialing without call completion 8 = general assistance 9 = BOCILEC card 10 = Presubsribed credit card 11 = PTT card 12 = Directory Assistance 13 = Commercial Credit Card 14 = BOC inward dialing with call completion 15 = MCI card or VNet card (P-P) -16-19 = Not Used 20 = ANl validation (screened pass/fail) 21 = Auth Validation (filed or dialed) 22 = Not Used 23 = 700 Service Access Code (overrides #20) 24 = 500, 800 Service Access Code (overrides #20) 25 = 900 Service Access Code (overrides #20) 26-28 = Not Used 29 = Operator Release Timer Expired 30 = EVS/NARS - Disconnect message referral (DMR) without referral 31 = EVSINARS - DMR with refetrai to MCI
number 32 = EVSINARS - DMR with referral to non-MCI
number 33 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral and call extension (CE) to MCI number 34 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral and CE to non-MCI

number 35 = EVS/NARS - Customized Message Announcement (CMA) with CE

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word ~) Bit Il Description 36 = EVS/NARS - CMA without CE

37 = EVS/NARS - Enhanced Calt Routing (ECR) 38-41 = EVS/NARS - Reserved 427 = Not Used 48 = GETS card 49 = Not Used 50 = Billed to intctnational number 51 = Calling station ID information recorded 52 = Supplemental code only recorded 53 = VNet remote access number recorded 54 = SS7 calling party number recorded 55 = OSID and OTG recorded 56 = DNIS recorded 57 = Business graup ID recorded 58 = Network information recorded 59 = BG + Null + OSID/OTG

60 = Card Number + Null + OSID/OTG

61 = VNet RA + Null + OSID/OTG

62 = VNet RA + Nuil + OSIDIOTG

63 = Network CaII Transfer (NC:'I~

64-79 = Reserved 80-89 = Reserved 90-99 = Reserved 100 = 18C It's Me PIN S/S

101 = 18C It's Me Global S/S

102 = 18C It's Me ANI S/S

103 = 18C lt's Me NPA S/S

104 = 18C It's Me: Messenger S/S

105 = I8C It's Me Messenger PIN S/S

106 = 18C It's Ma Messenger Global S/S

107 = 18C BOC Card S/S

-. 108 = 18C MCI Card S/S

109 = Aos Messenger S/S

110 = lntetuational Messenger S/S

111 = International Speed Dial 112-127 = Not Used Word 28, bits 7-9 Prefix Digits (PD): Represents the prefix digits of the called number. These digits tell the switch how to process the call.

0 = No prefix digits received 1 = 0- (operator assisted) 2 = 0+ (domestic CDOS) 3 = O1 + (international CDOS) 4 = 01.1 +IDDD .

5 = 1 +DDD

6 = 0+opcrator assisted, subscriber address 7 = *XX when XX = 0-9, Star Card SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RUr.E 26) WO 98/23080 PCT/US97l21174 Word b) Bit A~ Description Word 28, bits 10-12 NDID (NCS/DAP ID): Indicates whether the switch processed the call or if one of the databases) such as NCS/DAP) was queried for information for services) including but not limited to, VNET) Calling Card, 800) and 900 calls. The NDID further indicates the ID of the NCS/DAP that was involved in the last transaction attempt.

0 = Switch call processing 1 = NCS/DAP 1 2 = NCS/DAP 2 3 = NCS/DAP 3 4-S = Not Used 6 = Received fmm operator platform via RLT

7 = TCAP to NCS/DAP

Word 28, bits 13-15 Division ID (DIV1D): Contains the division ID for credit card calls, including the telecommunication system's card. The DIVID

is received from the NCS/DAP for the card number validation. If no infotatation is received by the switch, record the default value of '0.' 0 = No division ID specified 1 = Division ID I

2 = Division ID2 3 = Division ID3 4 = Division ID4 S = Division IDS

6 = Division ID6 7 = Division ID7 Word 29) bit 0 Distant Overflow (DO): When sec to 1 in the originating switch's call record, indicates that a direct termination overflow (DTO) transaction was attempted at an intermediate or terminating switch in order to get the final destination address digits for this call.

Word 29) bit 1 Not Used.

Word 29, bit 2 Customer Connect (CC): Indicates whether to use timepoint 6 or timepoint 3 to calculate the call duration.

0 = Use Time Point 6, *F to calculate the call duration 1 = Use Time Point 3. *C to calculate the call duration Word 29) bit 3 Inter-Network (IN): Indicates whether or not a call is originating from one customer/network and is terminating to a different customerlnetwork. The default setting = 0; bit sec to 1 if a business group or Netinfo parameter is received from the NCS/DAP.

Word 29, bit 4 Not Used.

Word 29, bit 5 SAC Bit (SC): This bit is used for the Flezible SAC feature. This bit will be set to "1" whenever the received number which is collected during the address digit collection phase) is identified as a SAC number in the FlezSac Indez associated with the originating trunk group. This bit will be set to "0"
in all other cases.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO ~~ - PCT/LTS97/21174 Word ~) Bit it Description Word 29) bit 6 Call Direction (CD): Indicates whether the call originated in the domestic or international network.

0 = Call origination occurred in the Domestic Network 1 = Call origination occurred in the International Network Word 29, bit 7 Destination (DE): Indicates when a call is expected to terminate to an international destination 0 = Default, NANP. Domestic VNet, or any otkter calls which are not expected to terminate to an international destination 1 = Calls expected to terminate to an international destination Word 29) bit 8 Dedicated Termination (DT): Indicates that a 10-digit shared network number was completed to a dedicated destination. If the terminating trunk class (TTC) in the call record is equal to 3 or 7, then it is considered to be a direct termination trunk.

Word 29) bits 9-10 Not Used.

Word 29, bit 11 Satellite (SA): Indicates that a satellite circuit was involved in the call. The default sating is 0; bit set to 1 indicates that a satellite was involved in the call. The bit is set when the incoming trunk gmup is classmarked as sateilite equipped, when ttte SAT digit on an incoming inband IMT call shows that a satellite circuit is invotved in the connection, or when the SS7 Nature of Connection parameter indicates that a satellite trunk was previously used. This is used for trouble-shooting purposes, and not for billing.

Word 29, bits 12-IS Nature Of Calling Location ID (NOCLI):
A binary value that identifies what data is recorded in the Call Location ID. The Calling Location ID field will contain the information that is referenced in the NOCLI.

0 = Not Used 1 = ANI from Inbound trunk 2 ~ SS7 charge number 3 = SS7 calling parry number 4 = original called number 5 = Pseudo ANI created at this switch 6 = CSI from originating trunk 7 = Filed NPA-NXX trunk group information plus CSI

8 = NNN+OSID~-OTG or OOY+OSID+OTG (N=TBCD-Null) i 9 = Country Code + national number 10 = No CLI record 11 = Redirecting Number I 12 = CLI received from Operator piatfotm via RLT

13 = ANI of NCT originator 14-15 = Not Used SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 9812308(1 PGT/US97/21174 Word 11, Bit a Description Word 30) bits 0-15 Carrier Number (CN): Represents the carrier number provided on FG-B or FG-D originations) or the carrier number received over an SS7 IMT. if only three digits are used, then they are recorded in CN2-CN4 and CN l will contain a TBCD-NuII.
This field also contains the last four digits of the specific 800 number assigned to VISA cards (9595). It will also contain the last four digits of the MCI card access number regardless of the access facility.

Ezamples of carrier numbers art: MCI
= 222) ATT ~ 288, and Friends = 333.

FGB/FGD FGB/D

3 digit 4 digit visa CIC CIC card Word 30) bits 0-3 CN 1 TBCD-Null X 9 Word 30, bits 4-7 CN2 X X 5 Word 30) bits 8-I1 CN3 X X 9 Word 30) bits 12-15 CN4 X X 5 SS7 MCI VNet TNS card card Word 30) bits 0-3 CN I X 1 I

Word 30, bits 4-7 CN2 X 0 1 Word 30, bits 8-11 CN3 X 2 I

Word 30, bits 12-15 CN4 X 2 I

Word 31, bits 0-3 Authorization Code ID Field (ACIF): Contains the Authorization -Code Identification Field for recording a card number status. This field indicates whether the card number (calling card or credit card) is good or bad.

0 = Seven digit auchcode file (default) 1 = 1st or only five digit authcode file 2 = 2nd five digit file 3 = 3rd five digit file 4 = 4th five digit file 5 = 5th five digit file 6 = Siz digit authcode file 7 = Range restriction failure (invalid address digits) 8 = Positive Commercial Credit Card/89 Card/M Card Validation 9 = Not Used 10 = MCI CardNisa Card invalid or not assigned. Disallowed.

11 = BOC billing number assigned but blocked 12 = BOC billing number usage ezceeded 13 = Not Used 14 = Default authorization of MCI Card/VISA
Card if response timeout from NCS/DAP

15 = MCI CardNISA Card authorized by NCS/DAP

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word A~) Bit ~ Description Word 31) bits 4-10 Release Code: Used with titnepoint 7 qualifier to determine from which dit~ection the release message came. The code indicates why one of the parties hung up) for example) normal release = 16, and no circuit available = 34.

- 1 = Unallocated number 2 = No route to specified network 3 = No route to destination 4 = Send special information tone 5 = Misdialed trunk prefix -16 = Normal clearing 17 = User Busy 18 = No user responding 19 = No user responding (user alerted) 21 = Call rejected 22 = Number changed 27 = Destination out of service 28 = Address incomplete 29 = Facility rejected 31 = Normal - unspecified 34 = No circuit available 38 = Network out of order 41 = Temporary failure 42 = Switching equipment congestion 44 = Requested channel not available 47 = Resource unavailable - unspecified 50 = Requested facility not subscribed 55 = Incoming calls barred within CUG

57 = Bearer capability not authorized 58 = Bearer capability not available 63 = Service -or option not available 65 = Bearer capability not implemented 69 = Requested facility not implemented 70 = Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available 79 = Service or option not implemented 87 = Called user not member of CUG

88 = Incompatible destination 91 = Invalid transit network selector 95 = Invalid message - unspecified 97 = Message type non-existent or not implemented 99 = Parameter non-existent or not implemented - discarded 102 = Recovery on timer expired 103 = Parameter non-existent or not implemented - passed on 111 = Protocol error - unspecified 127 = Interworking - unspecified Word 31, bits 11-13 NCID Sequence Number: Represents the number of calls which have occurred on the same port number with the same Timepoim 1 v alue. The first call will have the sequence number set to '0'. This value will increase incrementally for each successive call which originates on the same port number which has the same Timepoint 1 value. Range = 0-7.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2B) Word ~Y) Bit ~ Description Word 31, bit 14 NCID Location (NCIDLOC): This bit identifies when the s recorded in the Authcode field of the call record. The NCID is recorded in the Authcode field of the call record at intermediate and terminating switches if the Authcode field is not being used to record other information. If the Authcode field is being used to record other information, the NCID is recorded in the "NCID"

field of the 64 word call record.

0 = NCID is not recorded in the Authcode field (default) 1 = NCID is recorded in the Authcode field Word 31, bit IS Remote ANI Screened (RS): This bit is set to' 1' if the NPA of the ANI is not listed in the switch's Local-Service-Area table, and the ANI was sent to the DAP for ANI index screening purposes. This bit is set to '0' if the switch sent the ANI to the DAP for ANI

index screening purposes and no response is received from the DAP or if normal switch ANI screening occurs.

I 0 = ANI was not screened by the DAP (default) I = ANI was screened by the DAP

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Table 302 - ECDR/EPNR Record Format:
Word ~) Bit ~ Description - I

Words 0-11, bits Same as CDR/PNR format.

Word I2, bits 0-15 Calling Location ID: Contains I-15 digits of dte originating station Word 13, bits 0-15 line. This is the ANI number of the calling party. If 1 to 15 ANI

Word 14, bits 0-15 or CSI digits are received, they are recorded in order' starting with Word 15, bits 0-11 CLI1. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null.
If no ANI or CSI is available, record the OSID/OTG in CLI4-l0, except where noted.

if nothing is recorded in the CLI field, use a NOCLI value of 10.

This field contains 1 of the following nine fotittats:

1. VNet CAMA DAL originations: If CSI
is available, prefix the CSI with filed HNPA and HNXX information) if available, and record. Use NOCLI value of 7.

2. FG-C Originations: If ANI or CSI information is not available and the number is in the OOY+NXX-XXXX
format) record the OOY code that was received in CLI1-3) and record the OSID/OTG

in CLI4-10. Use NOCLI value of 8.

3. Inband FG-D Originations: Record the ANI that was received starting with CLI. Use NOCLI value of 1.

4. SS7 FG-D Originations: Record the charge number, if available. If the charge number is not available, record the calling party number. Use NOCLI value of 2 or 3.

S. International Originations: Record the country code and national number of the calling party.
Use NOCLI value of 9.

6. SS7 IMTs Originations: Record the following information in this order of importance: 1) charge number) 2) calling party number, 3) OSD/OTG from generic digits.
Use NOCLI value of 2) 3, or 8.

7. SS7 Reseller Originations: The CLI
field will be filled with TBCD Nulls.

8. SS7 Private Network Originations: The CLI field will be filled with TBCD Nulls.

9. PRI Originations:. Record the calling party number received in the 1SDN setup message.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) -Word ~) Bit ~ Description The format:

1-15 digit ANI/CSI

( 13 digit Incoming example) OSID/OTG Int'1 Word I2, bits 0-3 CLI1 X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 4-7 CLI2 X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word I2) bits 8-11 CLI3_ X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word I2, bits 12-15 CLI4 X X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13) bits 0-3 CLIS X X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13) bits 4-7 CLI6 X X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 8-11 CLI7 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word I3, bits 12-15 GLIB X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14) bits 0-3 CLI9 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14) bits 4-7 CLI10 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 8-11 CLI11 X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 14) bits 12-15 CLII2 X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15, bits 0-3 CLI13 X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15, bits 4-7 CLI14 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null X(NN) Word i5) bits 8-11 CLI15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null X(NN) CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number OSID = Originating Switch ID (000-999) OTG = Originating Trunk Group (0000-g 191 ) Word 15, bits 12-I5 Authorization Code (Auth Code): Same as CDR/PNR fo A

rmat Word 16, bits 0-15 uth Code, but represents 45 digits.

Word 17, bits 0-1S

Word 18) bits 0-15 1. Authorization Codes:

Word 19, bits 0-15 Word 20, bits 0-15 5 digit 6 digit 7 digit Word 21, bits 0-15 Word 15 bits 12-15 A 1 AUTH 1 A

) Word 22, bits 0-15 UTH 1 AUTH 1 Word 16 bits 0-3 A2 AUTH2 , Word 23, bits 0-15 AUTH2 AUTH2 Word 16 bits 4-7 A3 AUTH3 ) Word 24, bits 0-15 AUTH3 AUTH3 Word 16) bits 8-11 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4 Word 25, bits 0-15 Word 16) bits 12-15 AS AUTHS AUTHS

AUTHS
Word 26) bits 0-15 Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 SEC1 AUTH6 Word 17) bits 4-7 A7 SEC2 SEC1 AUTH7 Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 SEC3 SEC2 SECI

Word 17, bits 12-!5 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 Word 18) bits 0-3 A 10 T-Null SEC4 SEC3 Word 18, bits 4-7 ~ A11 SUPPl T-Null SEC4 Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP2 SUPP1 T-Null Word 18) bits 12-15 A13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPPI

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 28) Word a, Bit a Description Word 19, bits SUPP3 SUPP2 Word 19, bits SUPPS SUPP4 SUPP3 Word 19) bits SUPP6 SUPPS SUFP4 Word 19, bits SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPPS

Word 20, bits SUPP8 SUPP7 SUPP6 0-:3 A18 Word 20) bits SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 4-'7 A19 Word 20) bits SUPP10SUPP9 SUPP8 8-l l A20 Word 20) bits SUPP11SUPP10SUPP9 Word 21, bits SUPP12SUPP11SUPP10 Word 21) bits SUPP13SUPP12SUPP11 4-'i A23 Word 21, bits SUPP14SUPP13SUPP12 Word 21, bits SUPP15SUPP14SUPP13 Word 22, bits SUPP16SUPP15SUPP14 0-:f A26 Word 22, bits SUPP17SUPP16SUPP15 Word 22) bits SUPP18SUPPI7SUPP16 Word 22, bits SUPP19SUPP18SUPP11 Word 23) bits SUPP20SUPPI9SUPP18 Word 23, bits SUPP21SUPP20SUPP19 4-'; A31 Word 23, bits SUPP22SUPP21SUPP20 Word 23, bits SUPP23SUPP22SUPP21 12..15 A33 Word 24) bits SUPP24SUPP23SUPP22 0-3~ A34 Word 24, bits SUPP25SUPP24SUPP23 Word 24, bits SUPP26SUPP25SUPP24 Word 24, bits SUPP27SUPP26SUPP25 Word 25, bits SUPP28SUPP27SUPP26 Word 25) bits SUPP29SUPP28SUPP27 Word 25) bits SUPP30SUPP29SUPP28 Word 25, bits T-NullSUPP30SUPP29 Word 26) bits T-NullT-NullSUPP30 Word 26, bits T-NullT-Nul1T-Null Word 26) bits T-NullT-NullT-Null Word 26, bits T-NullT-NullT-Nutl T-Null = TBCD-Null 2. Calling Station ID (CSI):

7 digit 1-IO digit Word 15) bits A1- X X

Word 16) bits A2 X X

Word 16, bits A3 X X

Word 16, bits A4 X X

Word 16) bits AS X X

Word 17, bits A6 X X
0-3 ~

Word 17, bits A7 X X

Word 17, bits A8 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits A9 SUPPl X

Word 18, bits A10 SUPP2 X

Word 18, bits A11 SUPP3 TBCD-Null Word 18) bits A12 SUPP4 SUPP1 Word 18) bits AI3 SUPPS SUPP2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word A~) Bit 1! Description Word 19) bits A14 SUPP6 ~ SUPP3 Word 19) bits AIS SUPP7 SUPP4 Word 19, bits A16 SUPP8 SUPPS

Word 19, bits A17 SUPP9 SUPP6 Word 20) bits A18 SUPP10 SUPP7 Word 20) bits A19 SUPP11 SUPP8 Word 20) bits A20 SUPP12 SUPP9 Word 20, bits A21 SUPP13 ;SUPP10 12-15 ~

Word 21, bits A22 SUPPI4 SUPPI l Word 21, bits A23 SUPP15 SUPPI2 Word 21, bits A24 SUPP16 SUPP13 Word 21, bits A25 SUPP17 SUPP14 Word 22) bits A26 SUPP18 SUPP15 Word 22, bits A27 SUPP19 SUPP16 Word 22, bits A28 SUPP20 SUPPI7 Word 22, bits A29 SUPP2I SUPP18 Word 23) bits A30 SUPPZ2 SUPP19 Word 23, bits A31 SUPP23 SUPP20 Word 23, bits A32 SUPP24 SUPP21 Word 23, bits A33 SUPP25 SUPPZZ

Word 24) bits A34 SUPP26 SUPP23 Word 24) bits A35 SUPP27 SUPP24 Word 24) bits A36 SUPP28 SUPP25 g-11 Word 24) bits A37 SUPP29 SUPP26 Word 25, bits A38 SUPP30 SUPP27 Word 25, bits A39 TBCD-Null SUPP28 Word 25) bits A40 TBCD-Null SUPP29 Word 25) bits A41 TBCD-Null SUPP30 Word 26) bits A42 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A43 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A44 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A45 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null l2-15 3. Suppiemental Codes:

WoM 15, bits A1 SUPPI

Word 16, bits A2 SUPP2 Word 16, bits A3 SUPP3.

Word 16) bits A4 SUPP4 Word 16, bits AS SUPPS

Word 17, bits A6 SUPP6 Word 17) bits A7 SUPP7 Word 17, bits A8 SUPP8 Word 17, bits A9 SUPP9 _- Word 18, bits A10 SUPP10 Word 18, bits A11 SUPPI 1 Word 18, bits A12 SUPP12 Word 18) bits A13 SUPP13 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) wo 9sr~oso pc~r~s97r~m74 Word A~, Bit ~ Description Word 19, bits A14 SUPP14 Word 19, bits A15 SUPP15 Word 19, bits A16 SUPP16 Word 19, bits A17 SUPP17 Word 20) bits AI8 SUPPl8 0-:3 Word 20, bits A19 SUPP19 4=7 Word 20, bits A20 SUPP2Q

Word 20, bits A21 SUPP21 Word 21) bits A22 SUPP22 Word 21, bits A23 SUPP23 4=.7 Word 21) bits A24 SUPP24 8-:l 1 Word 21) bits A25 SUPP25 Word 22) bits A26 SUPP26 0-:1 Word 22) bits A27 SUPP27 Word 22) bits A28 SUPP28 8-1.:1 Word 22) bits A29 SUPP29 12~-15 Word 23) bits A30 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits A31 TBCD-Null 4-i' Word 23, bits A32 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits A33 TBCD-Null 12..15 Word 24, bits A34 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits A35 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits A39 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A45 TBCD-Null 4. VNet Remotcand Access Calling Party Number:

Word 15, bits A1 N

Word 16) bits A2 X

Word 16, bits A3 X

Word 16, bits A4 N
8-1 l Word 16, bits AS X

Word 17) bits A6 X

Word 17, bits A7 X

Word 17) bits A8 X

Word 17) bits A9 X

Word 18) bits A 10 X

Word 18, bits A11 TBCD-Null Word 18) bits A12 SUPP1 Word 18) bits AI3 SUPP2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98!23080 PCT/US97/21174 Word II) Bit ~ Description Word 19, bits A14 SUPP3' Word 19, bits A15 SUPP4 Word 19, bits A16 SUPPS

Word 19, bits A17 SUPP6 Word 20) bits A18 SUPP7 Word 20, bits A19 SUPP8 Word 20, bits A20 SUPP9 Word 20, bits A21 SUPPIO

Word 21, bits A22 SUPPI 1 Word 21, bits A23 SUPPI2 4-7 _ Word 21, bits A24 SUPPI3 Word 21) bits A25 SUPP14 Word 22, bits A26 SUPPIS

Word 22) bits A27 SUPP16 Word 22, bits A28 SUPPt7 Word 22, bits A29 SUPPI8 Word 23) bits A30 SUPP19 Word 23, bits A31 SUPP20 Word 23) bits A32 SUPP21 Word 23, bits A33 SUPP22 Word 24) bits A34 SUPP23 Word 24, bits A35 SUPP24 Word 24,bits A36 SUPP25 Word 24, bits A37 SUPP26 Word 25, bits A38 SUPP27 Word 25) bits A39 SUPP28 Word 25, bits A40 SUPP29 Word 25, bits A41 SUPP30 Word 26, bits A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A44 TBCD-Null I Word 26, bits A45 TBCD-Null I
5. Credit Card:

Word I5) bits AI X

Word 16, bits A2 X

Word 16, bits A3 X

Word 16, bits A4 X

Word 16) bits AS X

Word 17, bits A6 X

Word 17) bits A7 X

Word 17) bits A8 X

Word 17, bits A9 X

_- Word 18, bits A10 X

Word 18) bits A 11 X

Word 18, bits A12 X

Word 18) bits A13 X

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word ~, Bit t~ Description Word 19) bits A 14 X

Word 19, bits A 15 X

Word 19, bits A16 X

Word 19, bits A17 X

Word 20, bits A 18 X

Word 20, bits A 19 X

Word 20, bits A20 TBCD-Null Word 20) bits A21 SUPPI

Word 21, bits A22 SUPP2 Wool 21, bits A23 SUPP3 Word 21) bits A24 SUPP4 8-i I

Word 21) bits A25 SUPPS

Word 22) bits A26 SUPP6 Word 22, bits A2'7 SUPP7 Word 22) bits A28 SUPPS

Word 22, bits A29 SUPP9 Word 23) bits A30 SUPPIO

Word 23, bits A31 SUPP11 Word 23) bits A32 SUPP12 Word 23, bits A33 SUPPI3 Word 24) bits A34 SUPP14 Word 24) bits A35 SUPP15 Word 24, bits A36 SUPP16 Word 24, bits A37 SUPP17 Word 25) bits A38 SUPP18 Word 25) bits A39 SUPP19 Word 25, bits A40 SUPP20 Word 25) bits A4I SUPP21 Word 26, bits A42 SUPP22 Word 26, bits A43 SUPP23 Word 26, bits A44 SUPP24 Word 26) bits A45 SUPP25 6. 14 Digit MC VNet Calling Card:

Word 15, bits Al X

Word 16) bits A2 X

Word 16, bits A3 X

Word 16) bits A4 X
8-l I

Word 16, bits p5 X

Word i7, bits A6 X

Word 17, bits A7 X

Word 17, bits A8 X

Word 17, bits A9 X

Word .18, bitsA10 X

Word 18, bits A11 TBCD-A

Word 18) bits A12 TBCD-A

Word 18, bits A13 TBCD-A

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word l~) Bit A~ Description Word I9, bits A14 TBCD-A

Word 19, bits A15 TBCD-Null Word 19) bits A16 SUPPI

Word 19) bits A17 SUPP2 Word 20, bits A18 SUPP3 Word 20, bits A 19 SUPP4 Word 20) bits A20 SUPPS

Word 20, bits A21 SUPP6 Word 21, bits A22 SUPP7 Word 21) bits A23 SUPP8 Word 21, bits A24 SUPP9 Word 21, bits A25 SUPP10 Word 22) bits A26 SUPP11 Word 22, bits A27 SUPP12 Word 22, bits A28 SUPPt3 Word 22, bits A29 SUPP14 Word 23, bits A30 SUPP1S

Word 23, bits A31 SUPP 16 Word 23, bits A32 SUPP 17 Word 23) bits A33 SUPP18 Word 24, bits A34 SUPP19 Word 24,bits A35 SUPP20 Word 24, bits A36 SUPP21 Word 24) bits A37 SUPP22 Word 25, bits A38 SUPP23 Word 25) bits A39 SUPP24 Word 2S) bits A40 SUPP25 Word 2S) bits A41 SUPP26 _ _ Word 26) bits A42 SUPP27 Word 26, bits A43 SUPP28 Word 26) bits A44 SUPP29 Word 26, bits A45 SUPP30 7. OSD/OTG:

Word 15, bits A1 X (OSID) Word 16) bits A2 X (OSID) Word 16) bits A3 X (OSID) Word 16) bits A4 X (OTG) Word 16) bits AS X (OTG) i Word 17, bits A6 X (OTG) Word 17, bits A7 X (OTG) Word 17, bits A8 TBCD-Nuli Word 17) bits A9 TBCD-Nuil Word 18) bits A10 TBCD-Null Word 18) bits A11 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits A12 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits A13 TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 28) WO 98/23080 _ p~~~~7121174 I~ Word k) Bit JJ ~ Description Word 19) bits A14 TBCD-Null Word 19) bits A15 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits A16 TBCD-Nul1 g-11 Word 19) bits A17 TBCD-Null Word 20) bits A18 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits A 19 TBCD-Null ' Word 20, bits A20 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits A21 TBCD-Null Ward 21; bits A22 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits A23 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits A24 TBCD-Null g-11 Word 21, bits A25 TBCD-Null Word 22) bits A26 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits A27 TBCD-Null Word 22) bits A28 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits A29 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits A30 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits A31 TBCD-Null Word 23) bits A32 TBCD-Null Word 23) bits A33 TBCD-Null Word 24) bits A34 TBCD-Null Word 24) bits A35 THCD-Null 4-?

Word 24, bits A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits A37 TBCD-Null Word 25) bits A38 TBCD-Null Word 2S, bits A39 TBCD-Null Word 25) bits A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits A41 TBCD-Null Word 26) bits A42 TBCD-Null Word 26) bits A43 TBCD-Null Word 26) bits A44 TBCD-Null 8-l l Word 26) bits A45 TBCD-Null OSID = Originating Switch ID
OTG = Originating Trunk ID
8. Telecommunication/1?TT Cards:
Word 15) bits A1 X

Word 16) bits A2 X

Word 16, bits A3 X

Word 16) bits A4 X

Word 16, bits AS X

Word 17) bits A6 X

Word I7, bits A7 X

Word 17, bits A8 X

Word 17, bits A9 X

Word 18, bits A 10 X

Word 18) bits A I 1 X

Word 18, bits A12 X

Word 18) bits A13 X

' 527 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) wo 9sn3oso rc-r~rs9~nma Word ~, lilt k Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A 14 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 X

Word 19) bits 8-11 A16 X

Word 19) bits 12-15 Ai7 X

Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 X

Word 20) bits 4-7 A19 X

Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 X

Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 X

Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 X

Word 21) bits 4-7 A23 X

Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 TBCD-Null Word 21) bits 12-15 A25 SUPP1 Word 22) bits 0-3 A26 SUPP2 Word 22) bits 4-7 A27 SUPP3 Word 22) bits 8-11 A28 SUPP4 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPPS

Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPPS

- Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP7 Word 23) bits 8-11 A32 SUPP8 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP9 Word 24) bits 0-3 A34 SUPP10 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP11 Word 24) bits 8-11 A36 SUPP12 Word 24) bits 12-IS A37 SUPP13 Word 25, bits 0-3 A35 SUPP14 Word 25) bits 4-7 A39 SUPPIS

Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPPI6 Word 25) bits 12-15 A41 SUPP17 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 SUPP18 Word 2b) bits 4-7 A43 SUPP 19 Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 SUPP20 Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 SUPP2I

9. Business Group ID:

Word 15, bits 12-15 AI X

Word 16) bits 0-3 A2 X

Word 16) bits 4-7 A3 X

Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X

Word 16, bits 12-IS AS X

Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X

Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 TBCD-Null Word 17) bits 8-11 A8 SUPPI

Word 17) bits 12-15 A9 SUPP2 Word 18, bits 0-3 A10 SUPP3 Word 18, bits 4-7 A11 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPPS

Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP6 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) CA 02279845 ~199~9-05-17 Word ~, Bit ~Y Description Word 19, bits A l4 SUPP7 Word 19) bits A15 SUPP8 Word 19) bits A16 SUPP9 Word I9, bits A17 SUPP10 Word 20, bits A18 SUPPI1 Word 20, bits A19 SUPPI2 Word 20, bits A20 SUPPI3, Word 20) bits A21 SUPP14 Word 21) bits A22 SUPP 15 Word 21) bits A23 SUPP16 Word 21) bits A24 SUPPI7 Word 21, bits A25 SUPPI8 Word 22) bits A26 SUPPI9 Word 22) bits A27 SUPP20 Word 22, bits A28 SUPP21 Word 22, bits A29 SUPP22 Word 23) bits A30 SUPP23 Word 23, bits A31 SUPP24 Word 23, bits A32 SUPP25 Word 23, bits A33 SUPP26 Word 24, bits A34 SUPP27 0.3 Word 24) bits A35 SUPP28 4..7 Word 24) bits A36 SUPP29 Word 24, bits A37 SUPP30 - Word 25, bits A38 TBCD-Null Word 25) bits A39 TBCD-Null 4-.7 Word 25, bits A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits A4I TBCD-Null Word 26) bits A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A43 TBCD-Null Word 26) bits A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits A45 TBCD-Null I1. Network Information:

Word 15, bits A1 X

Word 16, bits A2 X

Word 16) bits A3 X

Word 16) bits A4 X

Word 16) bits A5 TBCD-Null Word 17) bits A6 SUPPI

Word 17) bits A7 SUPP2 Word 17) bits A8 SUPP3 Word 17, bits A9 SUPP4 Word 18; bits A10 SUPPS

Word 18, bits A11 SUPP6 Word 18) bits A12 SUPP7 Word 18) bits A13 SUPP8 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/23p80 - PCT/US97121174 Word ~, Bit ~Y Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP10 Word l9, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP11 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP12 Word 20) bits 0-3 A18 SUPP13 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP14 Word 20) bits 8-l I A20 SUPP15 Word 20) bits I2-IS A21 SUPP16 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP17 Word 2 1) bits 4-7 A23 SUPPl8 Word 21, bits 8-I1 A24 SUPP19 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP20 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP21 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP22 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP23 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP24 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP25 Word 23) bits 4-7 A31 SUPP26 Word 23) bits 8-11 A32 SUPP27 Word 23) bits 12-15 A33 SUPP28 Word 24) bits 0-3 A34 SUPP29 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP30 Word 24) bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 2:5, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25) bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26) bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-IS A45 TBCD-Null 12. Network Call Identifier (NCID) -If the NCID is recorded in the "A" field) it will be recorded in binary beginning with Al.

The Entry Code field will be indicative of the call processing associated with the particular call or "0". If the NCID is recorded in the NCID field of a 64 word call record, the Entry Code will also be indicative of the call processing associated with the particular call or "0". The NCID is comprised of the following:

Originating Switch ID

Originating Trunk Gmup Originating Port Number Timepoint One NCID Sequence Number I

~i Word 27) bits 0-3 Feature Code (FC): Same as CDR/PNR format.

I Word 27) bits 4-7 Terminating Network Code (TNC): Same as CDR/PNR format.

Word 27, bits 8-11 Network Access Type (NAT): Same as CDR/PNR
format.

Word 27, bits 12-15 Timepoint 7 Qualifier (TP&Q): Same as CDR/PNR format.

Word 28, bits 0-6 Entry Code (EC): Same as CDR/PNR format.

Word 28, bits 7-9 Prefix Digits (PD): Same as CDR/PNR format.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/Z3080 PCT/US971~1174 Word-~, Bit ~ Description Word 28) bits !0-12 NCS/DAP ID (NDID): Same as CDR/PNR format.

Word 28, bits 13-IS Division ID (DIVID): Same as CDRIPNR fotittat.

Word 29) bit 0 Distant Overflow (DO): Same as CDR/PNR
format.

Word MCI Network Overflow (MNO): This bit indicates 29, whether bit or not the Cause parameter that initiated overflow was generated due to MCI network detected conditions versus Reseller or Customer Location detected circumstances. This bit is set to 1 if the MNO

subfield of the MBCSI parameter is set to i which indicates that the cause parameter that initiated overflow was generated due to MCI network detected conditions. This bit is set to 0 if the MNO

subfield of the MBCSI parameter is set to 0 which indicates that the cause parameter that initiated overflow was generated due to a LEC) BOC, or Reseller condition.

Word Customer Connect (ce): Same as CDR/PNR
29) format.
bit Word Inter-Network (IN): Same as CDR/PNR format.
29, bit Word Reported Overflow (RO): Same as CDR/PNR
29) format.
bit Word Not Used.
29, bit Word Call Direction (CD): Same as CDR/PNR format.
29, bit Word Destination (DE): Same as CDR/PNR format.
29, bit Word Dedicated Termination (DT): Same as CDR/PN
29, bit R format.

Word Not Used.
29) bits Word Satellite (SA): Same as CDR/PNR format.
29) bit Word Nature of Calling Location ID (NOCLI):
29, Same as CDR/PNR
bits format.

Word Carrier Number (CN): Same as CDR/PNR format.
30, bits Word Authorization Code ID (ACIF): Same as CDR/PNR
31, format.
bits Word Release Code (RC): Same as CDR/PNR format.
31) bits Word NCiD Sequence Number: Same as CDR/PNR format.
31, bits Word NCID Location (NCIDLOC): Same as CDR/PNR
31, bit format.

Word Remote AN1 Screened (RS): Same as CDR/PNR
31, bit format.

Word Not Used.
32, bits Word 33) bits Word Destination Address (DA): Records up to 34, 25 digits of the bits Word destination address in TBCD format in the 35, sequence that the bits a y Word re 36) received or translated to) starting with bits D1. Unused bytes contain Word bits , TBCD-Null.
Word 38) bits Word 39, bits Word 40, bits SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/23080 PCT/US97l21174 -Word !/, Bit A~ Description - i 7-digit DD IDDD
10-digit D

Word 34, bits D1 N N N CC

Word 34) bits D2 X X X CC

Word 34, bits D3 X X X CC

Word 34, bits D4 X N N NN
l2-15 Word 35, bits DS X X X NN

Word 35) bits D6 X X X~ NN

Word 35, bits D7 X X X NN

Word 35, bits D8 X(TS1D)X X NN

Word 36, bits D9 X(TSID)X X NN

Word 36) bits D10X(TSID)X X NN

Word 36, bits D11X(TTG) X(TSID)T-NuilNN

Word 36) bits D12X(TTG) X(TSID)T-NullNN

Word 37, bits D13X('TTG)X(TSID)T-NullNN

Word 37, bits D14X(TTG) X(TTG)T-NullNN

Word 37) bits D15T-Null X(TTG)T-NullNN

Word 37, bits D T-Null X(TTG)T-NuIIT-Null Word 38, bits D T-Null X(TTG)T-NullT-Null Word 38) bits Dl8T-Null T-NullT-NullT-Null Word 38, bits D19T-Null T-NullT-NullT-Null Word 38, bits D20T-Null T-NullT-NullT-Null Word 39, bits D21T-Null T-NullT-NullT-Null Word 39, bits D22T-Null T-NuilT-NullT-Nuli Word 39, bits D23T-Null T-NullT-NullT-Null Word 39) bits D24T-Null T-NullT-NullT-Null Word 40) bits D25T-NuII T-NullT-NullT-Null CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number TSID = Terminating Switch ID

TTG = Terminating ID
Trunk T-Null = TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98n3080 PCT/US97/21174 I~ Word ~, Bit ~ ~ Description 18-digit Word 34, bits-0-3D1 N

Word 34, bitsD2 N

Word 34, bitsD3 N

Word 34, bitsD4 N

Word 35, bitsDS N

Word 3S, bitsD6 N

Word 35) bitsD7 N

Word 35) bitsD8 N

Word 36, bitsD9 N

Word 36, bitsD N

Word 36, bitsD N

Word 36, bitsD12 N

Word 37, bitsD13 N

Word 37) bitsD14 N

Word 37, bitsDIS N

Word 37, bitsD16 N

Word 38, bitsD17 N

Word 38, bitsD18 N

Word 38, bitsD19 X(TSID) Word 38) bitsD20 X(TSID) Word 39, bitsD21 X(TSID) Word 39, bitsD22 X(TTG) Word 39, bitsD23 X(TTG) Word 39, bitsD24 X('ITG) Word 40) bitsD2S X{TTG) TSID = Terminating Switch ID
TTG = Terminating Trunk ID
Word 40, bits 1'retranslated a 4-1S Digits (PTD):
Represents up to 15 digits of Word 41, bits number that ed aller 0-1S is the translation by of a number the dial c .
Word 42, bits Word 43, bits 10 di 0-15 i g VNet/
t VNet, OOY 7 digitIDDD
SAC

DNIS, SAC VNet or or digit Hotline Code SNS
(example) Word 40, bitsPTD 1 0 N N

Word 40, bitsPTD2 X 0 X N

Word 40) bitsPTD3 X Y X N

Word 41, bitsPTD4 N N X N

Word 41, bitsPTDS X X X N

Word 41, bitsP'TD6 X X N

Word 4L, bitsPTD7 X X X N

- Word 42, bitsPTD8 X X T-NullN

Word 42) bitsPTD9 X X T-NullN

Word 42, bitsPTD10 X T-NullN

Word 42, bitsPTD11 T-NullT-NullN
12-1S T-Null Word 43, bitsPTD12 T-NullT-NullN
0-3 T-Null Word 43) bitsPTD13 T-NullT-NullN
4-7 T-Null Word 43, bitsPTDI4 T-NullT-NullN
8-1 I T-Null Word 43) bitsPTD15 T-NullT-NullN
12-1S T-Null il ( T-Null = TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word ~I, Bit ~' Description ~I

Word 44) bits 0-7 Enhanced International Routing (EIR) Call Type: Contains the EIR call type ID as received from the DAP in the NCS billing information parameter or from the operator in the NCS billing information ISUP RLT parameter. Recorded in binary.

Word 44) bits 8-14 Overflow Cause Value (OVFVAL): This field is the binary equivalent of the first cause value received or formatted in-switch.

This value is taken from the cause value subfield in ctit: cause parameter that initiated overflow.

Word 44, bit 15 Counts As Bid (CB): This field is used with the EIR feature. The bit is set to ' 1' or '0' as per the information received from the DAP in the CB field of the NCS billing information parameter or from the operator in the NCS billing information ISUP RLT

parameter.

0 = Does not count as bid (default) I = Counts as bid Word 45) bits 0-3 Overflow Cause Location (OVFCL): This field is the binary equivalent to the value recorded from the first cause location received or formatted in-switch. This information is taken from the cause location subfield in the cause parameter that initiated overflow.

Word 45, bits 4-15 Desired Terminating Address (DTA): These 15 bytes contain the Word 46) bits 0-IS originally intended or "desired" termination before overflow was Word 47, bits 0-IS triggered. They contain either: 1) the desired terminating switch Word 48) bits 0-IS id and trunk group for calls that were sent to a DTC termination) 2) a national number, or 3) international number based on what the action code returned from the DAP
for the desired termination.

DTC

DTSID +

DTTG DDD

Word 45) bits 4-7 DTA 1 0 N

Word 45) bits 8-11 DTA2 X(DTSID1) X

Word 45) bits 12-15 DTA3 X(DTSiD2) .
X

Word 46, bits 0-3 DTA4 X(DTSID3) N

Word 46, bits 4-7 DTAS 0 X

Word 46) bits 8-11 DTA6 X(DTTGI) X

Word 46) bits 12-15 DTA7 X(DTTG2) X

Word 47, bits 0-3 DTAB X(DTTG3) X

Word 47) bits 4-7 DTA9 X(DTTG4) X

Word 47, bits 8-I1 DTA10 TBCD-Null X

Word 47, bits 12-15 DTA1I TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48) bits 0-3 D'fAl2 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null i Word 48, bits 4-7 DTA13 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 8-11 DTA14 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 12-IS DTA15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null DTSID = Desired Termination Switch ID

DTTG = Desired Termination Trunk Group SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 28) w° ° ~ rcrms9~mi7a Word Il, Bit A~ Description IDDD DTC

(example) (future) Word 45, bits 4-7 DTA 1 CC X(DTSID 1 ) Word 45, bits 8-11 DTA2 CC X(DTSID2) Word 45, bits 12-15 DTA3 CC X(DTSID3) Word 46, bits 0-3 DTA4 NN X(DTSID4) Word 46) bits 4-7 DTAS NN X(DTTGI) ~

Word 46, bits 8-11 DTA6 NN
X(DTTG2) Word 46, bits 12-15 DTA7 NN X(DTTG3) Word 47) bits 0-3 DTA8 NN X(DTTG4) Word 47, bits 4-7 DTA9 NN X(DTTGS) Word 47, bits 8-.l l DTA10 NN TBCD-Null Word 47, bits 12-15 DTAI l NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 0-3 DTA12 NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 4-7 DTA13 NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 8-11 DTA14 NN TBCD-Null Word 48) bits 12-15 DTA15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null CC = Customer Connect DTSID = Desired Tetatination Switch ID

DTTG = Desired Termination Trunk Group NN = National Number Word 49, bits 0-6 Overflow Count (OVFC): Indicates the total number of intermediate overflow attempts before successful termination was achieved. This value is incremented each time the DAP is accessed for overflow information.

Word 49) bits 7-12 Desired Termination Action Code (DTAC):
This field represents the action code which was received from the DAP in the first response. This information is used to identify the type of information which is recorded in the DTA
field.

Word 49) bit 13 Not Used.

Word 49) bits 14-15 Network CaII Identifier (NCID): Contains the binary Words 50-54) bits 0-15 representation of the NCID. The NC1D is recorded here at intermediate and terminating switches if the Authcode field is being used to record other information.
The NCID is created at the originating switch and is passed to intermediate and terminating switches. The format of the NCID is:

Originating Switch ID (OSID) Originating Trunk Group (OTG) Originating Port (OP) Timepoint 1 (TPI) NCID Sequence Number Words 55-58) bits 0-15 Not Used.

Word 59, bits 0-10 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2Bj Word II; Bit ~ Description Word 59) bits 11-13 User to User Type (UUS Type): Contains a binary representation used to identify the type of User to User services being utilized.

If this field is set to '0' and the UUIE
Count field is sec to a value other than '0') then non-call associated User to User information is being transferred.

0 = No message or call associated UUS
invoked (default) 1 = MA-UUI only 2 = CA-TSC at call setup only 3 = CA-TSC after gall setup only 4 = CA-TSC at call setup and CA-TSC after call setup 5 = MA-UUI and CA-TSC at call setup 6 = MA-UUI and CA-TSC after call setup 7 = MA-UUI and CA-TSC at call setup and CA-TSC after call setup Word 59) bits 14-15 User to User Information Element Count (UUIE Count): Contains -Word 60, bits 0-13 the binary count of UUIE delivered in either direction per TSC.

Both the originating and terminating switches shall maintain a counter to count the number of UUIE delivered on a per call basis. Each switch shall count all UUIE
in either direction whether delivered or not. The billed parry shall be responsible for paying for the UUIE transport. If the count reaches the maximum value of b5535) it will hold at this value until a new call record is created. The beared channel will be disconnected one the maximum count is reached.

Word 60, bits 14-IS Overflow Case Coding Standard (OVFCS):
Contains the binary equivalent of the first coding standard received or formatted in-switch. This value is taken from the coding standard subfield in the cause parameter that initiated overflow.
It will not be overwritten by subsequent coding standards received or in-switch formatted values. This field is used for enhanced overflow calls only.

Word 61, bits 0-15 Originating NX64 Bitmap: Records the port number that Word 62, bits 0-7 corresponds with the originating control channel of the call in the originating port in the CDR/PNR. This bitmap is used to identify the subsequent channels in the same T1 timespan that are used in the call. A particular bit is set to indicate if this channel was used on the call. The number of bits that are set is used to identify the number N in an NX64 call.

Word 62, bits 8-15 Terminating NX64 Bitmap: Record the port number that Word 63, bits 0-15 corresponds to the terminating control _i channel of the call in the terminating port in the CDR/PNR. This bitmap will be used to identify the subsequent channels is the same T1 span that are used in the call. A particular bit is set to indicate if this channel was used oa the call. The number of bits that are set is used to identify the number N in an NX64 call. In general) each channel transmits at 64 Kbits/second, and if a customer needs more than one channel) this bitmap indicates which channels are used in the call.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/Z3080 PCTlUS97/21174 Word A~) Bit ~ I Description Table 303 OSR/POSR Record Format~
Word O, bits 0-3 Call Record Id (CRID): Identifies the record type.

0 = Default - 1 = CDR

2 = SER

3 = PNR

4 = OSR

5 = POSR

6 = ECDR

? = EPOSR

8 = EOSR

9 = EPOSR

10-15 = Not Used Word 0) bits 4-15 Call Disconnect ID (CDID): Identifies the call record. Each call rscord has a unique ID number. These 12 bits contain the 12 least significant bits of the CDID.

Word 1) bits 0-15 Timepoint 1 (TPl): A binary count of the number of seconds that Word 2) bits 0-15 occurrtd between midnight (UTC) on January l) 1976) and the time that the incoming call was detected by the switch.

Word 3, bits 0-12 Timepoint 4 (TP4): A binary count of the number of seconds between Timepoint 1 and the time the operator position was seized by the switch.

Word 3, bits 13-15 Timepoint 6 (TP6): A binary count of the number of seconds Word 4) bits 0-0 between titnepoint 1 and the time Answer Supervision was detected or received. This is the time that it took for the call to be answered by the person or audio system being called.

Word 4, bits 10-15 Timepoint 7 (TP7): A binary count of the number of seconds Word 5) bits 0-15 between timepoint 1 and the time that the originating or -terminating parry disconnected whichever is first.

Word 6, bits 0-15 Originating Port (OP): The absolute port number of the Word 7, bit 1 originating trunk. Originating trunk is the line on which the call came to the switch.

Word ?) bits 2-IS Terminating Port (TP): The absolute port number of the last Word 8, bits 0-1 terminating trunk seized for an outgoing call attempt. The terminating trunk is the last line on which the call is transmitted.

Word 8, bits 2-14 Originating Trunk Group (OTG): A binary number expressing the Originating Trunk Group number of the originating trunk. An originating trunk group is a group of ports coming from the same location.

Word 8) bit 15 Terminating Tnmk Group (TTG): A binary number expressing the Word 9, bits 0-11 Terminating Trunk Group number of the Terminating trunk. A

terminating trunk group is a group of ports going to the same location. If a call falls because no trunks are available, record the last trunk group number that was attempted.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26~

Word Il, Bit !I Description I
Word 9) bits 12-15 Timepoint 3 qualifier (TP3Q): Contains the outpulsed call disposition qualifier which provides the telephone number of the .

person making the call to the person being called. The person being called needs to have signed up for the "ANI Delivery"

service and have a display device for displaying the caller's telephone number.

0 = Default 1 = ANIICSI was delivered 2 = DNIS was delivered 3 = AN/CSI and DNIS were delivered 4-5 = Not Used 6=NCT

7 = NCT) AN/CSI was delivered 8 = NCT, DNIS was delivered 9 = NCT, ANIICSI and DNIS was delivered 10 = NCT Tandem.

11-15 = Not Used Word 10, bits 0-1 Timepoint 6 qualifier (TP6Q): Contains the answer supervision qualifier indicating the way in which the telephone call was answered.

0 = Hardware detected an Answer 1 = Software detected Voice 2 = Not Used 3 = Operator/NARS detected an Answer I Word 10) bits Action Code (AC): The switch provides 2-7 an action code which indicates the type of destination address, or what type of telephone number was called, or an error code.

0 = Default 1 = 7-digit number without overtlow 2 = 7-digit number with overflow .

3 = DDD number 4 = IDDD number 5 = Switch generated Action Code 6 = Incoming exclusion failure 7 = ID code failure 8 = Unexpected error occurs in the NCS/DAP

9 = Misdialed number and the NCS/DAP
is unable to translate the dialed number 10 = 10-digit number without overflow 11 = 10-digit number with overflow 12 = National with overflow 13 = International with overflow 14 = ANI not found 15 = NPA-NXXX not found 16 = Pilot number not found 17 = Associated partition not found 18 = ADF format error 19 = Switch ID not found 20 = 800 number not found SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word #) Bit~# Description - --. "_._ _ 21 = 800 number out of band 22 = Not Used 23 = Invalid ID code 24 = Range privilege 25 = 7-digit number not in database 26 = 10-digit exclusion feature 27 = 900 number not found 28 = 900 number out of band 29 = Not Used 30 = NCS network management blocked 31 = NCS Gate Denial 32 = FIezSTC) Overflow Not Allowed 33 = FIezSTC) Overflow Allowed 34 = SAC Number Not Found 35 = SAC Number Out of Band 36 = 700 Number Not Found 37 = ?00 Number Out of Band 38 = ICR designated Out of Band 39 = NCT - Reversed call direction 40-48 = Not Used 49 = Infotmatian Call 50 = Flexible Direct Termination Call without overflow 51 = Flexible Direct Termination Call with overflow 52 = Outbound IVNet without overflow 53 = Outbound IVNet with overflow 54 = Global Switch Profile not found 55 = ANI Index Provided by DAP

56-62 = Not Used 63 = International Inbound APP

Word 10, bits 8-11 Originating Trunk Class (OTC): Indicates what type of originating trunk was accessed.

0 = ONAL (FG-A) 1 = ONAT (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D) CAMA) LAMA) _ 2 = DAL, VNET CAMA, FGS-DAL) 3 = IMT (Inband or SS7) 4 = International Circuit (RI) R2) #5) #6, #7) 5 = ISDN PRI

6 = OST

7-15 = Not Used Word 10, bits 12-15 Terminating Trunk Class (TTC): Indicates what type of terminating trunk was accessed.

0 = ONAL (FG-A) 1 = GNAT (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D) CAMA, LAMA) 2 = DAL, VNET CAMA) FGS-DAL) 3 = IMT (Inband or SS7) 4 = International Circuit (R1, R2, #5, #6, #7) 5 = ISDN PRI

6 = OST

7-15 = Not Used FG = Feature Group SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word It, Bit Il Description Word 1 l) bits Information Digits (1D): The switch receives 0-7 these digits from the originating trunk group indicating the type of telephone on which the telephone call oryginated) such as a home telephone, pay telephone) or prison telephone.

FG-B Direct, CAMA FG-D MCI IMT ' I15~ N6 bits 0-3: TBCD Null X X TBCD Null X

bits 4-7: X X X X X

Word 11, bits 8-11 Originating NACC (ONACC): This field contains the Notth American Coding Convention code which is received in the incoming digit stream to the operator switch. This code identifies the type of assistance required for inbound international calls.

0 = default ', 1 = 121 (Assistance without call completion) 2 = 131 (Directory assistance) 3 = 151 (Assistance with call completion) 4 = 160 (Manual transit) 5 = 191 (Call USA) i 6-15 = Not Used ~I Word 11) bits Terminating NACC (TNACC): This field 12-15 contains the North I, American Coding Convention code which is transmitted in the I incoming digit stream to another operator switch. This code identifies the type of assistance required at the next operator switch.

0 = default 1 = 121 (Assistance without call completion) 2 = 131 (Directory assistance) 3 = 151 (Assistance with call completion) I 4 = 160 (Manual transit) 5 = 191 (Call USA) 6-15 = Not Used ~~ Word 12) bits Call Location ID (CLI): Represents the 0-15 10 digits from where the Word 13, bits 0-15 call came. If switch receives more than 10 digits) record them in ~ Word 14, bits the ECDR/EPOSR.

1. VNet CAMA DAL originations: If CSI
is available, prefix the CSI with filed HNPA and HNXX information) if available, and record. Use NOCLI value of 7.

2. FG-C originations: If ANi or CSI information is not available and the number is in the OOY+NXX+XXXX
format, record the OOY in CLI 1-3, and record the OSID/OTG
in CLI4-10. Use NOCLI value of 8.

3. Inband FG-D Otiginations: Record the ANI that was received starting with CLI1. Use NOCLI value of 1.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) PG"T/US9?/Zi174 -Word A~. Bit ~ Description 4. SS? FG-D Originations: Record the charge number) if available. If not available) record the calling parry number. Use NOCLI value of 2 or 3.

S. International originations: Record the country code and the national number of the calling party.
Use NOCL1 of 9.

6. SS7 IMTs Originations: Record the following information in this order of importance: 1) charge number, 2) calling party number) 3) OSID/OTG from genetic digits.
Use NOCLI of 2, 3, or 8.

7. SS? Reseller Originations: The CLI
field is f lied with THCD-Nulls.

8. SS? Private Network Originations: The CLI field is filled with TBCD-Nulls.

9. PRI Organizations: Record the calling party number received in the ISDN setup message.

The format:

1-10 digit Iacotning ANI OSID/OTG Int'1 Word 12, bits 0-3 CLI1 TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12) bits 4-? CLI2 TBCD Nuil X(CC) Word 12, bits 8-11 CLI3 TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 12-15 CLI4 X(OSID) X(N

Word 13) bits 0-3 CLIS X(OSID) X(NN) _ Word 13, bits 4-7 CLI6 X(OSID) X(N

Word 13, bits-8-II CLI? X(OTG) X(NN) Word 13) bits 12-15 CLI8 X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 0-3 CLI9 X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 4-? CLIIO X(OTG) X(NN) CC = CuStOIIICr COIIIlect NN = National Number OSID = Originating Switch NSC ID (000-999) OTG = Originating Trunk Group (0000-8191 ) SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word A', Bit !f Description Word 14, bits 8-15 Authorization Codes: Represents billed 22 digits of who gets for Word 15, bits 0-15 the call which includes one or more of the following and/or an Word 16, bits 0-15 optional Supplementary Code:

Word 17, bits 0-15 Word 18, bits 0-15 1. Authorization Code - Contains the authorization code digits.

Word 19, bits 0-l5 AUTHI-AUTHS records the dialed or filed authorization codes, afterwhich is recorded an optional variable 1-4 digit security code, SECI-SEC4, comprised of TBCD After digits 0-9 and A-D. the last digit, record a TBCD-Null, afterwhich record any supplementary code digits, SUPP1-SUPP12.
Record TBCD-Nuli in any unused byte. Authorization Code format:

5 digit 6 digit 7 digit Auth Code Auth Code Auth Code Word 14, bits 8-11 Ai AUTH 1 AUTH I

Word 14) bits 12-IS A2 AUTH2 AUTH2 Word 15) bits 0-3 A3 AUTH3 AUTH3AUTH3 Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4AUTH4 Word 15) bits 8-11 AS AUTHS AUTHSAUTHS

Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 SEC1 AUTH6AUTH6 Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 SEC2 SECI AUTH7 Word 16) bits 4-7 A8 SEC3 SEC2 SECT

Word 16) bits 8-11 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 Word 16) bits 12-15 A10 TBCD-NullSEC3 Word 17, bits 0-3 A11 SUPP1 TBCD-NullSEC4 Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP2 SUPP1TBCD-Null Word 17) bits 8-11 A13 SUPP3 SUPP1 Word 17) bits 12-15 A14 SUPP4 SUPP2 Word 18) bits 0-3 A15 SUPPS SUPP4SUPP3 Word 18) bits 4-7 A16 SUPP6 SUPPSSUPP4 Word 18) bits 8-11 A17 SUPP7 SUPPS

Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP8 SUPP6 Word 19, bits 0-3 A 19 SUPP9 SUPP7 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP10 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP11 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP12 SUPP10 SUBSTfTUTE SHEET (RULE 26) wo 9sn3o8o rcrnrs9~rnit>«4 Word ~, Bit ~ Description 2. Calling Station ID (CSI) - Contains the digits of the calling station identifier. The CSI digits will be recorded starting at Al. A
TBCD-Null is recorded after the last CSI digit, followed by Supplemental Code digits. Unused bytes contain a TBCD-Null.
Calling Station ID format:
7 digit 10 digit CSI ~Sl Word 14) bits Al X X

Word 14, bits A2 X X

Word 15) bits A3 X X

Word 15) bits A4 X X

Word 15, bits AS X X

Word 15, bits A6 X X

Word 16, bits A7 X X

Word 16) bits A8 TBCD-Null X

Word 16) bits A9 SUPPI X

Word 16) bits A10 SUPP2 X

Word 17, bits A11 SUPP3 TBCD-Null Word I7, bits A12 SUPP4 SUPP1 Word 17) bits A13 SUPPS SUPP2 Word 17, bits A14 SUPP6 SUPP3 Word 18, bits A15 SUPP7 SUPP4 Word 18) bits A16 SUPP8 SUPPS

Word 18, bits A17 SUPP9 SUPP6 Word 18, bits AI8 SUPP10 SUPP7 Word I9, bits A19 SUPP11 SUPP8 Word 19, bits A20 SUPP12 SUPP9 Word 19, bits A21 SUPP13 SUPP10 Word 19, bits A22 SUPP14 SUPPI
12-IS l SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word A~) Bit fl Description 3. Supplementary Codes - Supplemental Codes are recorded starting in contain TBCD-Null. Supplementary A1. Unused bytes Code format:

800/900 VNet Supp. Codes Word 14, bitsA1 SUPP1 Word 14) bitsA2 SUPP2 Word 15) bitsA3 SUPP3 Word 15) bitsA4 SUPP4 Word 15, bitsAS SUPPS

Word 15) bitsA6 SUPP6 Word 16, bitsA7 SUPP7 Word 16, bitsA8 SUPP8 Word 16, bitsA9 SUPP9 Word 16, bitsA10 SUPP10 Word 17, bitsA11 SUPPI 1 Word 17, bitsA12 SUPPI2 Word 17, bitsA13 SUPP13 Word 17) bitsA14 SUPP14 Word 18) bitsA15 SUPP15 Word 18) bitsA16 SUPP16 Word 18) bitsA17 SUPP17 Word 18, bitsA18 SUPP18 Word 19, bitsA19 SUPP19 Word 19, bitsA20 SUPP20 Word 19, bitsA21 SUPP21 Word l9, bitsA22 SUPP22 SU9STlTUTE SHEET (RULE 26) wo 9sr~o pcr~rs9~nm~4 Word A~. Bit ~ Description 4. VNet Remote the caller accesses Access - VNet services If through the Remote Access Service) the access number is recorded starting at A1. A
TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit followed by any Supplemental Codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null.
VNet Remote Access format:

Word 14) bitsA N

Word 14, bitsA2 X

Word 15) bitsA3 X

Word 15) bitsA4 N
4-?

Word 15) bitsAS X

Word 15, bitsA6 X

Word 16) bitsA7 X

Word 16) bitsA8 X

Word 16, bitsA9 X

Word 16, bitsA10 X

Word 17) bitsA TBCD-Null Word 17) bitsA12 SUPP1 Word 17, bitsA13 SUPP2 Word 17, bitsA14 SUPP3 Word 18) bitsA15 SUPP4 Word 18, bitsA SUPPS

Word 18, bitsAI7 SUPP6 Word 18) bitsA18 SUPP7 Word 19, bitsA19 SUPP8 Word 19) bitsA20 SUPP9 Word 19) bitsA21 SUPPIO

Word 19, bitsA22 SUPPI1 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word ~I) Bit A~ Il~scription 5. Calling Party Number - The calling parry number is recorded for SS7 FGD received with a charge call originations number and a calling party number.
Record the SS7 coiling party number in A1-10. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit) followed by supplementaryUnusedbytes contain TBCD-Null.
codes. Calling parry number format:

Word 14, bitsAl N
8-ll Word 14, bitsA2 X

I Word 15, bitsA3 X

Word 15, bitsA4 N.

Word 15, bitsAS X

Word 15, bitsA6 X

Word 16) bitsA7 X

Word 16) bitsA8 X

- Word 16, bitsA9 X
8-11 .

Word 16, bitsA10 X

Word 17, bitsA11 TBCD-Null Word 17, bitsA12 SUPP1 Word 17, bitsA13 SUPP2 Word 17, bitsA14 SUPP3 Word 18) bitsA15 SUPP4 Word 18, bitsA16 SUPPS

Word 18, bitsA17 SUPP6 Word 18) bitsA18 SUPP7 Word 19, bitsA19 SUPP8 Word 19, bitsA,20 SUPP9 Word 19, bitsA21 SUPP10 Word 19, bitsA22 SUPPI l SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word ry, Bit A~ Description 6. Credit Card Number - Record the cotamercial credit card or presubscribed credit card number starting in A1. The PIN digits of a valid presubscribed credit card number are masked out by writing TBCD-A over the 4 PIN digits.
A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit, followed by supplementary codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Credit card number format:

Word 14, bits 8-11 A 1 X

Word 14, bits 12-IS A2 X

Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X

Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X

Word 15) bits 8-11 A5 X

Word 15) bits 12-15 A6 X

Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X

Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X

Word 16) bits 8-11 A9 X

Word 16) bits 12-15 A10 X

Word 17, bits 0-3 A11 X

Word 17, bits 4-7 A 12 X

Word 17) bits 8-11 AI3 X

Word 17, bits I2-15 A 14 X

Word 18) bits 0-3 A 15 X

Word 1 S, bits 4-7 A l6 X

Word 18, bits 8-I1 A17 X

Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 X

Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 X

Word 19) bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP1 Word 19) bits 12-15 A22 SUPP2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word II, Blt !I Description 7. 14 Digit et - The 14 digit calling MCI/VN Cardscard/VNet card number is recorded starting in A1 with the last 4 PIN digits masked out by writing TBCD-A for those digits.
A TBCD-Null is written afterdigit,llowed by supplemental the last fo codes.

Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null.
Calling card/VNet card format:

Word 14) bitsA1 X

Word l4) bitsA2 X

Word 15, bitsA3 X

Word 15) bitsA4 X

Word 15, bitsAS X

Word 15, bitsA6 X

Word 16) bitsA7 X

Word 16, bitsA8 X

Word 16, bitsA9 X

Word 16) bitsA10 X

Word 17, bitsA11 TBCD-A

Word 17, bitsA12 TBCD-A

Word 17) bitsA13 TBCD-A

Word 17, bitsA14 TBCD-A

Word 18) bitsA15 TBCD-Nuil Word 18) bitsA16 SUPPl Word 18, bitsA17 SUPP2 Word 18) bitsA18 SUPP3 Word 19, bitsA SUPP4 Word 19, bitsA20 SUPPS

Word 19, bitsA21 SUPP6 Word 19, bitsA22 SUPP7 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) d PCT/US97/211~4 Word 1Y) Bit A~ Description 8. Telecotnmunications/1'TT
Cards - The 23 digits) or less, of the telecommunications card is recorded starting in A 1. A
TBCD-Null is recorded last , followed by supplemental after the digitcodes.

Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null.
Telecommunications card format:

Word 14) bitsA1 X

Word 14, bitsA2 X

Word 15, bitsA3 X

Word 15, bitsA4 X
4-?

Word 15, bitsAS X

Word 15, bitsA6 X

Word I6) bitsA7 X

Word 16) bitsA8 X
4-?

Word 16, bitsA9 X

Word 16, bitsA10 X

Word 17, bitsAi X
0-3 l Word 17) bitsA12 X

Word 17) bitsA13 X
8-I i Word I?, bitsA14 X

Word 18, bitsAIS X

Word 18, bitsA16 X
4-?

Word 18, bitsA17 X

Word 18) bitsAIS X

Word 19, bitsA19 X

I Word 19, bitsA20 X

Word 19) bitsA21 X

Word 19) bitsA22 X

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word If, Blt tl Description 9. OSID and For OTG - international inbound VNet or SAC
calls;

the OSID and OTG are recorded as received from the Generic Digits parameter.
After the parameters are recorded, the remaining D-Null. OSID and OTG
bytes contain format:
TBC

Word 14, bitsA1 X (OSID) Word 14, bitsA2 X (OSID) Word 15, bitsA3 X (OSID) Word 15, bitsA4 X (OTG) Word 15, bitsAS X (OTG) Word 15, bitsA6 X (OTG) Word 16, bitsA7 X (OTG) Word 16) bitsA8 TBCD-Null Word 16, bitsA9 TBCD-Null Word 16) bitsA10 TBCD-Null Word 17) bitsA11 TBCD-Null -Word 17) bitsA TBCD-Null Word 17, bitsA13 TBCD-Null Word 17, bitsA14 TBCD-Null Word 18, bitsA TBCD-Null Word 18, bitsA16 TBCD-Null Word 18) bitsA17 TBCD-Null Word 18, bitsA18 TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsA19 TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsA20 TBCD-Null Word 19) bitsA21 TBCD-Null i Word 19, bitsA22 TBCD-Null I OSID = OriginatingSwitch Group (000-999) OTG = Originating Trunk Group (0000-8191) SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word II, Bit ~ Description 10. Business Group 1D
- For some SS7 trunk groups) a business group ID is in SS7 parameter and is recorded roceived a in A1-A6. After TBCD-Nuil is recorded the last followed by any digit, a supplemental Unused codes. bytes contain TBCD-Null.

Word 14, bitsA1 X

Word 14, bitsA2 X

Word 15) bitsA3 X

Word 15, bitsA4 X

Word 15) bitsAS X

Word 15) bitsA6 X

Word 16, bitsA7 TBCD-Null Word 16) bitsA8 SUPPI

Word 16) bitsA9 SUPP2 Word 16, bitsA10SUPP3 Word 17, bitsAl SUPP4 0-3 l Word 17, bitsA SUPPS

Word 17, bitsA13SUPP6 Word 17) bitsA14SUPP7 Word 18, bitsA15SUPP8 Word 18, bitsA16SUPP9 Word 18, bitsA17SUPPIO

Word 18) bitsA18SUPPI1 Word 19) bitsA19SUPP12 Word 19, bitsA20SUPPI3 Word 19, bitsA21SUPP14 Word 19, bitsA22SUPP15 11. Network For some SS7 trunk groups, information a network -information in a SS7 parameter and ID is received is recorded in AI-A4. After digit) a TBCD-Nuli is recorded the last followed by any supplemental nused bytes contain TBCD-Null.
codes. U

Word 14) bitsA1 N

Word 14, bitsA2 X _ Word 15) bitsA3 X

Word 15) bitsA4 N

Word I5) bitsAS TBCD-Null Word I5) bitsA6 SUPP1 Word 16) bitsA7 SUPP2 Word 16, bitsA8 SUPP3 Word 16) bitsA9 SUPP4 Word 16, bitsA10SUPPS

Word 17) bitsAl SUPP6 0-3 l Word 17, bitsA SUPP7 Word 17, bitsA13SUPP8 Word I7) bitsA14SUPP9 Word 18) bitsA15SUPP10 Word 18, bitsA16SUPP11 Word 18, bitsA17SUPPI2 Wocd 18, bitsA18SUPP13 Word 19, bitsA19SUPP14 Word 19) bitsA20SUPP15 Word 19) bitsA21SUPP16 Word 19, bitsA22SUPP17 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word 11, Bit A~ Description 12. BOC Card:
The BOC/LEC
Card Number is recorded in A1-A10 with the remaining bytes containing TBCD-Null.

Word 14, bitsA1 N

Word 14, bitsA2 X

Word 15, bitsA3 X

Word 15, bitsA4 N

Word 15, bitsAS X

Word 15) bitsA6 X

Word 16) bitsA7 X

Word 16) bitsA8 X

Word 16) bitsA9 X

Word 16, bitsA10 X

Word 17) bitsA11 TBCD-Null Word 17) bitsA12 TBCD-Null Word 17) bitsA13 TBCD-Null Word 17) bitsA14 TBCD-Null Word 18) bitsA15 TBCD-Null Word 18, bitsA16 TBCD-Null Word 18, bitsA17 TBCD-Null 8-11~

Word 18, bitsA18 TBCD-Null Word 19) bitsA19 TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsA20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsA21 TBCD-Null Word 19) bitsA22 TBCD-Null 13. Third a call is billed to Parry Numbers: a third parry NANP
If number, record the number in AI-A10 with the remaining bytes containing TBCD-Null.

Word 14, bitsA1 N

Word 14, bitsA2 X
l2-15 Word l5) bitsA3 X

Word 15, bitsA4 N

Word 15, bitsAS X

Word 15, bitsA6 X

Word 16, bitsA7 X

Word 16) bitsA8 X

Word 16) bitsA9 X

Word 16, bitsA10 X

Word 17) bitsAl TBCD-Null 0-3 l Word 17) bitsA12 TBCD-Nuil Word 17, bitsA13 TBCD-Null Word 1T) bitsA14 TBCD-Null Word 18, bitsA15 TBCD-Null Word 18) bitsA16 TBCD-Null Word 18) bitsA17 TBCD-Null Word 18, bitsA TBCD-Null Word 19) bitsA TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsA20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsA21 TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsA22 TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) PCT/US97n1174 -_ Word ~J) BIt ~l Description 14. Imernational f a call is billed to Numbers: an international I

number, record the starting number in A1. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null.

Word 14, bitsA X (CC) ( Word 14, bitsA2 X (CC) Word 15, bitsA3 X (CC) Word 15, bitsA4 X (NN) Word I5) bitsAS X (NN) ' Word 15, bitsA6 X (NN) 12-i5 Word 16, bitsA7 X (NN) Word 16) bitsA8 X (NN) Word 16) bitsA9 X (NN) WoM 16, bits A10 X (NN) Word 17, bitsAl X (NN) 0-3 l Word 17) bitsA12 X (NN) Word 17, bitsA13 X (NN) Word I7) bitsA14 X (NN) Word 18) bitsA15 X (NN) Word 18) bitsA16 TBCD-Null Word 18, bitsA17 TBCD-Nult Word 18) bitsA18 TBCD-Nul!

Word I9, bitsA TBCD-Null Word 19) bitsA20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsA21 TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsAZZ TBCD-Null CC = Customer Cotmect NN = National Number SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 28) Word A~, Bit ~ Description ', 15. LAN Sequence : If a call is handled Numbers by a LAN, and billable information cannot be transported back to the billing switch) then the LAN records all of the billable information in a Billing Detail and sends back a LAN
Record (BDR) sequence number to the switch.
The LAN sequence number is recorded in AI-A16 with the remaining bytes containing TBCD-Null.

Word 14, bitsAI X

Word 14) bitsA2 X

Word 15, bitsA3 X

Word 15, bitsA4 X

Word 15) bitsAS X

Word 15, bitsA6 X

Word 16) bitsA7 X

Word 16, bitsA8 X

Word 16) bitsA9 X

Word 16, bitsA10 X

Word 17) bitsA X

I

Word 17, bitsA12 X

Word I7) bitsA13 X

Word 1T, bitsA14 X

Word 18, bitsA15 X

Word 18, bitsA16 X

Word 18, bitsA TBCD-Null Word 18) bitsA18 TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsA TBCD-Null Word 19) bitsA20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bitsA21 TBCD-Null Word 19) bitsA22 TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) w0 98/23080 PCT/US97/21174 Word ll) Bit IJ Description 16. DNIS: The DNIS may be recorded as received from the SS7 generic address , such as with EVS/NARS
parameter processed calls.

Word 14, bits N

Word 14) bits X

Word 15) bits X

Word 15, bits N

Word 15) bits X

Word 15, bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word I6, bits X

Word 17, bits TBCD-Null Word 17) bits TBCD-Null Word 17) bits TBCD-Nuil Word 17, bits TBCD-Null Word 18, bits TBCD-Null Word 18, bits TBCD-Null Word 18, bits TBCD-Null Word 18) bits TBCD-Null -Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null 17. Network Call Identifier (NCID):
If the NCID
is recorded i n the "A" field, it is recorded in binary beginning with A 1. The entry code will call processing associated indicate the with the particular call or '0.' If the NCID is recorded in the NCID
field of a 64-wot~call record, the entry code will also indicate the call processing associated with the particular call or '0.' The NC1D

comprises the following:

Originating Switch ID

Originating Trunk Group Originating Port Number Timepoint I

NCID Sequence Number SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word !l, Bit J! Description Word 20, bits 0-15 Destination This Address: is the seventeen digits of the destination Word 21, bits 0-15 address whichdomestic is the or international number being Word 22) bits 0-IS called, or an operator number format.
In the POSR, if the dialed Word 23, bits 0-15 number was d translate by the NCS/DAP
or LAN) the translated Word 24) bits 0-3 number will be recorded.
If more than 17 digits is required, use EOSR/EPOSR
format. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null.

7-digit 10-digit DDD IDDD

Word 20, bitsD N N ~ N CC

Word 20) bitsD2 X X. X CC

Word 20, bitsD3 X X X CC

Word 20, bitsD4 X N N NN

Word 21) bitsDS X X X NN

Word 21, bitsD6 X X X NN

Word 21, bitsD7 X X X NN

Word 21, bitsD8 X(TS1D) X X NN

Word 22, bitsD9 X(TSID) X X NN

Word 22) bitsD10X(TSID) X X NN

Word 22) bitsD11X('I"fG) X(TSID) T-Null Word 22, bitsD12X('ITG) X(TSID) T-Null Word 23, bitsD13X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null Word 23) bitsD14X(TTG) X('T'TG) T-Null Word 23, bitsD15T-Null X('TTG) T-Null Word 23, bitsD16T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null Word 24) bitsD17T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number TSID = TerminatingSwitch ID

TTG = Terminating Ttztnk Group BOC Op-to-Op Op-to-Op Inward Domestic/ Manual Dialing Int'I Transit Word 20, bitsD N X(CC) X(CC) Word 20, bitsD2 O/I X(CC) X(CC) Word 20, bitsD3 X X(CC) X(CC) Word 20, bitsD4 X(ATC) TBCD-Null 1 - Word 21, bitsDS X(ATC) TBCD-Null b Word 21, bitsDb X(ATC) TBCD-Null 0 Word 21, bitsD7 X(S11) TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 21) bitsD8 X(S12) TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 22, bitsD9 X(S13) TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 22, bitsDIOX(S14) TBCD-Null TBCD-Null I Word 22, bitsD11X(S15) TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 22, bitsD12TBCD-Null TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 23, bitsD13TBCD-Null TBCD-Null TBCD-Nuil Word 23, bitsD14TBCD-Null THCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 23) bitsD15TBCD-Null TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 23, bitsD16TBCD-NuII TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 24, bitsD17TBCD-Null TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 24) bits 4-15 Operator ID (OPIN):
Nutaber Contains the operator id number of Word 25, bits 0-1 the operator that handled the call.

SU9ST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26) wo 9sn3oso pc~r~rs9~nm7a Word A~, Bit ~Y Description Word 25, bit 2 Not Used.

Word 25, bits 3-IS Timepoint 5 (TPS): A binary count of the number of seconds between the time TPi occurred and the time that the operator stopped handling the call and releases the position. If the call is transferred to other operators) the value contained in this field shall express the release time of the last operator providing the service.

Word 26) bits 0-15 Room Number (RN): Contains the last four digits of the Callin g Station ID (CSI) when a call originates from a hotel) a university, or any other community identified by only a main telephone number. The CSI shall be obtained from the originating signalling information, or verbally by the operator who enters the information manually into the OSR.

Word 27, bits 0-3 Feature Code (FC): The switch determines a feature code far the call which indicates whether a specific type of data line is required for the call such as a higher quality line for facsimile transmissions.

0 = Default 1 = FAX

2 = NABS

3 = Data Call 4 = Switched DS1 (HSCS) 5 = Switched DS3 (HSCS) 6-8 = Not Used 9 = NXt54 10 = Offnet Routing 11 = AAP Call (Used in Gateway Toll Ticket Conversion) 12 = Card Gate Denial 13 = Forum Dial out audio/video conference 14 = Concert Freephone 15 = Not Used Word 27, bits 4-7 Terminating Network Code (TNC): Indicates the terminating facilities to be used for the remainder of the path of the call. For example, an indicator for no satellite transmission.

0 = Default 1 = No Routing Restrictions 2 = Avoid Satellite 3 = Route via DS1 4 = Route via DS 1 and avoid satellite _- 5 = Rotite via Protected Facilities Required 6 = Route via Protected Facilities Preferred 7-15 = Not Used SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word, Blt ~I Description I
I

Word 27, bits 8-11 Network Access Type (NAT): Indicates which type of network access was used as defined at the originating switch on the network; that is, how the caller gained access to the network. The types of access are:

0 = Default 1 = 800 call 2 = Credit Card Access 3 = Operator Assistance Access 4 = VNET Remote Access 5 = Billed party preference (BPP) Access 6 = FGD Cut-Through Access 7-15 = Not Used Word 27) bits 12-15 Timepoint 7 Qualifier (TP7Q): Contains the call's first disconnect qualifier; that is) how the call was terminated. The types of disconnection are:

0 = Calling party disconnects 1 = Called party disconnects 2 = Calling parry reorigination 3 = Switch initiated (ex. switch error cut off the call) 4 = All Routes Busy 5 = Disconnected due to a long ring;
ring timer exceeded 6-15 = Not Used Word 28) bits 0-6 Entry Code (EC): Indicates the type of call processing that took place and what type of infot~ttation is recorded in the Authorization Code field. If more than one entry code is received, record the last one. The following codes are valid:

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO ~ PCT/US97/21174 Ili Word b, Bit ~ ~ Description 0 = Default 1 = Person-to-Person (P-P) 2 = Station-to-Station (S-S) 3 = Third Party Billing (3rd party number recorded) 4 = P-P collect (bill to called party) = S-S collect (bill to caked parry) 6 = MCI card or VNet card (S-S) 7 = BOC inward dialing without call completiotl 8 = general assistance 9 = BOC/LEC card = Presubscribed credit card i l = PTT card 12 = Directory Assistance 13 = Commercial Credit Card 14 = BOC inward dialing with call completion = MCI card or VNet card (P-P) 16-19 = Not Uscd -= ANI.validation (screened pass/fail) 21 = Auth Validation (filed or dialed) 22 = Not Used 23 = 700 Service Access Code (overrides A~20) 24 = 500, 800 Service Access Code (overrides x20) = 900 Service Access Code (overrides X20) 26-28 = Not Used 29 = Operator Release Timer Expired = EVS/NARS - Disconnect message referral (DMR) without referral 31 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral to MCI number 32 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral to non-MCI number 33 = EVS/NARS - DMR with refemat and call extension (CE) to MCI number 34 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral and CE to non-MCI
number --- EVS/NARS - Custotniud Message Announcement (CMA) with CE

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/23080 PCTiUS97/21174 Word ~) Bit A~ Description 36 = EVS/NARS - CMA without CE

37 = EVS/NARS - Enhanced Call Routing (ECR) 38-41 = EVS/NARS - Reserved 42-47 = Not Used 48 = GETS card 49 = Not Used 50 = Billed to international number 51 = Calling station ID information recorded 52 = Supplemental code only recorded 53 = VNet remote access number recorded 54 = SS7 calling parry number recorded 55 = OSID and OTG recorded 56 = DNIS recorded 57 = Business group ID recorded 58 = Network information recorded 59 = BG + Nuli + OSID/OTG

60 = Card Number + Null + OSID/OTG

61 = VNet RA + Null + OSID/OTG

62 = VNet RA + Null + OSID/OTG

63 = Network Call Transfer (NCT) 64-79 = Reserved 80-89 = Reserved 90-99 = Reserved 100 = 18C lt's Me PIN S/S

101 = i8C It's Me Global S/S

102 = 18C It's Me ANI S/S

103 = 18C It's Me NPA S/S

104 = 18C Messenger SlS

105 = 18C Messenger PIN SIS

106 = 18C Messenger Global S/S

107 = 18C BOC Card SIS

108 = 18C MCI Card S/S

109 = Aos Messenger S/S

I 10 = International Messenger I 11 = International Speed Dial l I2-127 = Not Used Word 28, bits 7-9 Prefix Digits (PD): Represents the prefix digits of the called number. These digits tell the switch how to process the call.

0 = No prefix digits received 1 = 0- (operator assisted) 2 = 0+ (domestic CDOS) 3 = Ol + (international CDOS) 4 = OZ 1 +IDDD

5 = 1 +DDD

6 = 0+operator assisted, subscriber address 7 = *XX where XX = 0-9, Star Card SUBSTITUTE SHEET {RULE 26) Word N) Bit /! .- Description Word 28, bits 10-12 NDID (NCS/DAP ID): Indicates whether the switch processed the call or if one of the databases) such as NCS/DAP, was queried for information for services, including but not limited to) VNET, Calling Card, $00) and 900 calls. The NDID further indicates the ID of the NCS/DAP that was involved in the last transaction attempt.

0 = Switch call processing 1 = NCS/DAP 1 2 = NCSIDAP 2 3 = NCS/DAP 3 4-5 = Not Used 6 = Received from operator platform via RLT

7 = TCAP to NCS/DAP

Word 28, bits 13-15 Division ID (DIVID): Contains the division ID for credit card calls, including the telecommunication system's card. The DIVID

is received from the NCS/DAP for the card number validation. If no information is received by the switch) record the default value of '0.' 0 = No division ID specified 1 = Division ID1 2 = Division ID2 3 = Division 1D3 4 = Division ID4 5 = Division IDS

6 = Division ID6 7 = Division ID'7 ---Word 29, bit 0 Distant Overtiow (DO): When set to 1 in the originating switch's call trcord) indicates that a direct termination overflow (DTO) transaction was attempted at an intermediate or terminating switch in order to get the f nat destination address digits for this call.

Word 29) bit 1 Not Used.

Word 29) bit 2 Customer Cortrtect (CC): Indicates whether to use timepoint 6 or timepoint 3 to calculate the call duration.

0 = Use Time Point 6) *F to calculate the call duration 1 = Use Time Point 3) *C to calculate the call duration Word 29, bit 3 Inter-Network (IN): Indicates whether or not a call is o i i i r g nat ng from one customer/network and is terminating to a different customer/network. The default setting = 0; bit set to l if a business group or Netinfo parameter is received from the NCS/DAP.

Word 29, bit 4 Not Used ' Word 29, bit 5 SAC Bit (SC): This bit is used for the Flexible SAC feature. This bit will be sec to " 1 " whenever the received number which i s collected during the address digit collection phase) is identified as a SAC number in the FlezSac Index associated with the originating trunk group. This bit will ._ be set to "0" in all other ~.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word A~) Bit A~ Description Word 29, bit 6 Call Direction (CD): Indicates whether the call originated in the -domestic or international network.

0 = Call origination occurred in the Domestic Network I = Call origination occurred in the International Network Word 29, bit 7 Destination (DE): Indicates when a call is expected to terminate to an international destination.

0 = Default, NANP) Domestic VNet) or any ocher calls which are not expected to tertttinate to an international destination 1 = Calls expected to terminate to an international destination Word 29, bit 8 Dedicated Termination (DT): Indicates that a 10-digit shared network number was completed to a dedicated destination. If the terminating trunk class (TTC) in the call record is equai to 3 or 7) _ then it is considered to be a direct termination trunk.

Word 29) bit 9 Person-to-Person (PP): This bit is set to 1 if the operator authorizes a person-to-person call. This bit is used in combination with the entry codes to determine the nature of the call.

Word 29, bit 10 Transferred Bit (XB): This bit is set to 1 if the call has been transferred from one operator position or ARU to another.

Word 29, bit 11 Satellite (SA): Indicates that a satellite circuit was involved in the call. The default setting is 0; hit set to 1 indicates that a satellite was involved in the call. The bit is set when the incoming trunk group is classmarked as satellite equipped) when the SAT digit on an incoming inband IMT call shows that a satellite circuit is involved in the connection) or when the SS7 Nature of Connection parameter indicates that a satellite trunk was previously used. This is used for trouble-shooting purposes, and not for billing.

j Word 29, bits 12-15 Nature Of Calling Location ID (NOCLI):
A binary value that i dentifies what data is recorded in the Call Location ID. The Calling Location ID field will contain the information that is referenced in the NOCLI.

0 = Not Used 1 = ANI from Inbound trunk 2 = SS7 charge number 3 = SS7 calling parry number 4 = original called number 5 = Pseudo ANI created at this switch 6 = CSI from originating trunk 7 = Filed NPA-NXX trunk group information plus CSI

8 = NNN+OSID+OTG or OOY+OSID+OTG (N =
TBCD-Null) 9 = Country Code + national number 10 = No CLI record 11 = Redirecting Number 12 = CLI received from Operator platform via RLT

13 = ANI of NCT Originator 14-15 = Not Used SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word lt, Bit A~ Description i -Word 30) bits 0-IS Carrier Number (CN): Represents the carrier number provided on FG-B or FG-D originations, or the carrier number received over an SS7 IMT. If only three digits are used) then they are recorded in CN2-CN4 and CN 1 will contain a TBCD-Null.
This field also contains the last four digits of the specific 800 number assigned to VISA cards (9595). It will also contain the last four digits of the MCI card access number regardless of the access facility.

Examples of carrier numbers are: MCI =
222, ATT = 288, and Friends = 333.

FGB/FGD FGB/D

3 digit 4 digit visa CIC CIC card Word 30, bits 0-3 CNI Null X 9 Word 30, bits 4-7 CN2 X X S

Word 30, bits 8-1 I CN3 X X 9 Word 30, bits 12-15 CN4 X X S

SS7 MCI VNet TNS card card Word 30, bits 0-3 CN 1 X I 1 Word 30, bits 4-7 CN2 X 0 1 Word 30, bits 8-11 CN3 X 2 1 Word 30) bits 12-15 CN4 X 2 1 Word Authorization Code ID Field (ACIF): Contains 31, the Authori bits i zat on Code Identification Field for recording a card number status. This field indicates whether the card number (calling card or credit card) is good or bad.

0 = Seven digit authcode file 1 = 1st or only five digit authcode file 2 = 2nd five digit file 3 = 3rd five digit file 4 = 4th five digit file S = Sth five digit file 6 = Six digit authcode file 7 = Range restriction failure (invalid address digits) 8 = Positive Commercial Credit Cardl89 Card/M Card Validation 9 = Not Used 10 = MCI CardlVisa Card invalid or not assigned. Disallowed .
11 = BOC billing number assigned but blocked 12 = BOC billing number usage exceeded 13 = Not Used I4 = Default authorization of MCI Card/VISA
Card if response timeout from NCS/DAP

1S = MCI Card/VISA Card authorized by NCSIDAP

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word #, Bit # Description Word 31, bits 4-10 Release Code: Used with timepoint 7 qualifier to determine from which direction the release message came.
The code indicates why one of the parties hung up) for example, normal release = 16, and no circuit available = 34.

1 = Unallocated number 2 = No route to specified network 3 = No route to destination 4 = Send special information tone 5 = Misdialed trunk prefix 16 = Normal clearing 17 = User Busy 18 = No user responding 19 = No user responding (user alerted) 21 = Call rejected 22 = Number changed 27 = Destination out of service 28 = Address incomplete 29 = Facility rejected 31 = Normal - unspecified 34 = No circuit available 38 = Network out of order 41 = Temporary failure 42 = Switching equipment congestion 44 = Requested channel not available 47 = Resource unavailable - mtspecified i 50 = Requested facility not subscribed 55 = Incoming calls barred within CUG

57 = Bearer capability not authorized 58 = Bearer capability not available 63 = Service or option not available 65 = Bearer capability not implemented 69 = Requested facility not implemented 70 = Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available 79 = Service or option not implemented 87 = Called user not member of CUG

88 = Incompatible destination 91 = Invalid transit network selector ' 95 = Invalid message - unspecified i 97 = Message type non-existent or not implemented ' 99 = Parameter non-existent or not implemented - discarded 102 = Recovery on timer expired 103 = Parameter non-existent or not implemented - passed on I 11 = Protocol error - unspecified 127 = Interworking - unspecified Word 31, bits 11-13 NCID Sequence Number: Represents the number of calls which have occurred on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 value. The first call will have the sequence number set to '0'.

This value will increase incrementally for each successive call which originates on the same port number which has the same Timepoint 1 value. Range = 0-7.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word ~, Bit ~Y Description Word 31 ( bit l4 NCID Location (NCIDLOC): This bit identifies when the NCID i s recorded in the Authcode field of the call record. The NCID is recorded in the Authcode field of the call record at intermediate and terminating switches if the Authcode field is not being used to record other information. If the Authcode field is being used to record other information, the NCID is recorded in the "NCID"

field of the 64 word call record.

0 = NCID is not recorded in the Authcode field (default) 1 = NC1D is recorded in the Authcode field Word 31, bit 15 Remote AN1 Screened (RS): This bit is set to '1' if the NPA of the ANl is not listed in the switch's Local-Service-Area table. and the ANI was sent to the DAP for ANl index screening purposes.

This bit is set to '0' if the switch sent the ANI to the DAP for ANI index screening purposes and no response is received from the DAP or if normal switch ANI screening occurs.

0 = ANI was not screened by the DAP (default) 1 = ANI was screened by the DAP

Words 0-11) bits Same as OSR/POSR format.

Word 12) bits 0-15 Calling Location ID: Contains 1-IS digits of the originatin station Word 13, bits 0-IS g line. This is the ANI number of the calling party If 1 to 15 ANI

Word 14, bits 0-15 .
or CSI digits are received, they are recorded in order starting with Word 15, bits 0-11 CLII. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null.
If no ANI or CSI is available, record the OSID/OTG in CL14-10) except where noted.

If nothing is recorded in the CLI field) use a NOCLI value of Z0.

This field contains 1 of the following nine formats:

1. VNet CAMA DAL originations: If CSI
is available, prefix the CSI with filed HNPA and HNXX information) if available) and record. Use NOCLI value of 7.

2. FG-C Originations: If ANI or CSI information is not available and the numbtr is in the 00Y+NXX-XXXX
format) record the OOY code that was received in CLI1-3, and record the OSID/OTG

in CLI4-10. Use NOCLI value of 8.

3. Inband FG-D Originations: Record the ANI that was received - staring with CL1. Use NOCLI value of 1.

4. SS7 FG-D Originations: Record the charge number) if available. If the charge number is not available, record the calling parry number. Use NOCLI value of 2 or 3.

5. International Originations: Record the country code and national number of the calling patty.
Use NOCLI value of 9.

6: SS7 IMTs Originations: Record the following information in this order of importance: I) charge number) 2) calling parry number, 3) OSID/OTG from generic digits.
Use NOCLI value of 2, 3, or 8.

7. SS7 Reseller Originations: The CLI
field will be filled with TBCD Nulls.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word U) Bit ~ Description , _, 8. SS7 Private Network Originations:
The CLI field will be filled with TBCD Nulls.

9. PRI Originations: Record the calling parry. number received in the ISDN setup message.

The format:

I-LS digit ANI/CSI

- (13 digit Incoming example) OSmlOTG Int'1 Word 12, bits 0-3 CLI1 X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 4-7 CLI2 X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 8-11 CLI3 X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 12-15 CLI4 X X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 0-3 CLIS X X(OS1D) X(NN) - Word 13, bits 4-7 CLI6 X X(OS1D) X(NN) Word I3, bits 8-11 CLI7 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word I3) bits 12-15 CLIB X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 0-3 CL19 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 4-7 CLI10 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 8-I1 CLII l X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 14) bits 12-15 CLI12 X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15, bits 0-3 CLII3 X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15, bits 4-7 CLI14 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15) bits 8-11 CLI15 TBCD-NuH TBCD-Null X(NN) CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number OSID = Originating Switch ID

OTG = Originating Trunk Group Word 15, bits 12-15 Authorization Code (Auth Code): Same as OSR/POSR format Word 16) bits 0-IS Auth Code) but represents 45 digits.

Word 17, bits 0-15 _ Word 18) bits 0-15 1. Authorization Codes:

Word 19, bits 0-15 Word 20, bits 0-l5 5 digit 6 digit 7 digit Word 21) bits 0-IS

Word 22, bits 0-15 Word 15, bits 12-15 A 1 AUTH 1 AUTH 1 Word 23, bits 0-IS Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 AUTH2 AUTH2 AUTH2 Word 24, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 AUTH3 AUTH3 AUTH3 Word 25, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4 AUTH4 Word 26, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits I2-15 AS AUTHS AUTHS AUTHS

Word 17) bits 0-3 A6 SEC1 AUTH6 AUTH6 Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 SEC2 SEC1 AUTH7 Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 SEC3 SEC2 SECT

Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 Word 18, bits 0-3 A10 T-Null SEC4 SEC3 Word 18) bits 4-7 A11 SUPP1 T-Null SEC4 Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP2 SUPP1 T-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPP1 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word fl, Bit tl Description --Word 19) bits SUPP4 SUPP3 SUPP2 Word I9, bits SUPPS SUPP4 SUPP3 Word 19, bits SUPP6 SUPPS SUPP4 8-i l AI6 Word 19, bits SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPPS

Word 20, bits SUPP8 SUPP7 SUPP6 Word 20, bits SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 Word 20) bits SUPPIOSUPP9, SUPP8 8-11 A20 ~

Word 20, bits SUPPI1SUPP10 SUPP9 Word 21) bits SUPP12SUPP1! SUPP10 Word 21) bits SUPP13SUPP12 SUPP11 Word 21, bits SUPP14SUPP13 SUPP12 Word 21) bits SUPP15SUPP14 SUPP13 Word 22) bits SUPP16SUPP15 SUPP14 Word 22, bits SUPP17SUPP16 SUPP15 Word 22, bits SUPP18SUPP17 SUPP16 Word 22; bits SUFP19SUPPI8 SUPPi7 Word 23) bits SUPP20SUPP19 SUPP18 Word 23, bits SUPP21SUPP20 SUPP19 Word 23, bits SUPP22SUPP21 SUPP20 Word 23, bits SUPP23SUPP22 SUPP21 Word 24) bits SUPP24SUPP23 SUPP22 Word 24) bits SUPP25SUPP24 SUPP23 Word 24) bits SUPP26SUPP25 SUPP24 Word 24, bits SUPP27SUPP26 SUPP25 Word 25, bits SUPP28SUPP27 SUPP26 Word 25, bits SUPP29SUPP28 SUPP27 Word 25) bits SUFP30SUPP29 SUPPZ8 Word 25, bits T-NullSUPP30 SUPP29 Word 26, bits T-NullT-Null SUPP30 Word 26, bits T-NuilT-Null T-Null Word 26, bits T-NullT-Null T-Null Word 26) bits T-NuilT-Null T-Null T-Null = TBCD-Null 2. Calling Station ID (CSI):

7 digit!-10 digit Word 15) bits X X

Word 16) bits X X

Word 16, bits X X

Word 16, bits X X

Word 16) bits X X

Word 17, bits X X
0-3 ~ A6 Word 17, bits X X

Word 17, bits TBCD-Null Word 17, bits SUPPI X

Word 18, bits SUPP2 X

Word 18, bits SUPP3 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits SUPP4 SUPP1 Word 18, bits SUPPS SUPP2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 25) Word ~, Bit k Description i Word 19, bits SUPP6 SUPP3 Word 19, bits SUPP7 SUPP4 Word 19) bits SUPP8 SUPPS

Word 19, bits SUPP9 SUPP6 Word 20, bits SUPP10 SUPP7 Word 20) bits SUPP11 SUPP8 Word 20, bits SUPP12 SUPP9 Word 20, bits SUPP13 SUPI'10 Word 21 ) bits SUPPI4 SUPPI l Word 21, bits SUPP15 SUPPI2 Word 21) bits SUPP16 SUPP13 Word 21) bits SUPP17 SUPP14 Word 22) bits SUPP18 SUPPIS

Word 22, bits SUPP19 SUPP16 Word 22, bits SUPP20 SUPP17 Word 22, bits SUPP21 SUPPI8 Word 23, bits SUPP22 SUPP19 Word 23, bits SUPP23 SUPP20 Word 23) bits SUPP24 SUPP21 Word 23) bits SUPP25 SUPP22 Word 24, bits SUPP26 SUPP23 Word 24, bits SUPP27 SUPP24 Word 24) bits SUPP28 SUPP25 Word 24, bits SUPP29 SUPP26 Word 25) bits SUPP30 SUPP27 Word 25) bits TBCD-NullSUPP28 Word 25, bits TBCD-NullSUPP29 Word 25, bits TBCD-NullSUPP30 Word 26) bits TBCD-NullTBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-NutlTBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-NullTBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null I2-15 A45 TBCD-NuII

3. Supplemental Codes:

Word 15) bits SUPP1 Word 16, bits SUPP2 Word 16) bits SUPP3 4-7 . A3 Word 16, bits SUPP4 Word 16) bits SUPPS

- Word 17, bits SUPP6 Word 17, bits SUPP7 Word 17, bits SUPP8 Word 17, bits SUPP9 Word 18, bits SUPP10 Word 18) bits SUPPl 4=7 A11 l Word 18, bits SUPP12 8-i l A 12 Word 18, bits SUPP13 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2B) Word A~, Bit ~ Description Word 19) bits SUPP14 Word 19) bits SUPP15 Word 19) bits SUPP16 Word 19) bits SUPP17 Word 20, bits SUPP18 Word 20) bits SUPP19 Word 20) bits SUPP20 8-i l A20 Word 20, bits SUPP21 Word 21, bits SUPP22 Word 21, bits SUPP23 Word 21) bits SUPP24 Word 21) bits SUPP25 Word 22, bits SUPP26 Word 22, bits SUPP27 Word 22) bits SUPP28 Word 22, bits SUPP29 i 2-15 A29 Word 23) bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null Word 24) bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Ward 24) bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 25) bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Wotd 25, bits TBCD-NutI

Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Nuli Word 26, bits TBCD-Null 4. VNet Remote Access and Calling Party Number:

Word 15, bits N

Word 16, bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 16) bits N

Word 16, bits X

Word I7) bits X

Word 17) bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17, bits X

__ Word I$, bits X

WoM I8, bits TBCD-Null 4-7 Al l Word 18, bits SUPP1 Word 18, bits SUPP2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2B) WO 98/23(180 PCT/US97/21174 ~i~ord A~, Bit ~ Description Word 19, bits SUPP3 Word 19) bits SUPP4 Word 19, bits SUPPS

Word 19, bits SUPP6 Word 20) bits SUPP7 Word 20) bits SUPP8 Word 20, bits SUPP9 Word 20) bits SUPP10 Word 21, bits SUPP11 Word 21, bits SUPPI2 Word 21) bits SUPP13 Word 21, bits SUPP14 Word 22) bits SUPP15 Word 22, bits SUPP16 Word 22) bits SUPP17 Word 22, bits SUPP18 Word 23, bits SUPP19 Word 23) bits SUPP20 Word 23, bits SUPP21 Word 23) bits SUPP22 Word 24) bits SUPP23 Word 24, bits SUPP24 Word 24) bits SUPP25 _ Word 24, bits SUPP26 Word 25, bits SUPP27 Word 25, bits SUPP28 Word 25) bits SUPP29 Word 25, bits SUPP30 WoM 26, bits 0-3 TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null 5. Calling Party Number:

Word 15, bits N

Word 16) bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16, bits N

Wotd 16, bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17) bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 18, hits X

Word 18, bits TBCD-Null Word 18) bits SUPP1 Word 18) bits SUPP2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/23t~0 ' PCT/US97I21174 Word k) Blt At I>~scription ._.~ ~
~

r~
Word 19) bits SUPP3 Word 19, bits SUPP4 Word 19) bits SUPPS

Word 19, bits SUPP6 Word 20) bits SUPP7 Word 20, bits SUPP8 Word 20, bits SUPP9 Word 20, bits SUPP10 Word 21) bits SUPP11 Word 21, bits SUPPI2 Word 21, bits SUPP13 Word 21, bits SUPP14 Word 22) bits SUPP15 Word 22, bits SUPP16 Word 22) bits SUPP17 Word 22) bits SUPP18 Word 23, bits SUPP19 Word 23) bits SUPP20 Word 23) bits SUPP21 Word 23) bits SUPP22 Word 24, bits SUPP23 Word 24, bits SUPP24 Word 24, bits SUPP'?.5 Word 24, bits SUPP26 Word 25) bits SUPP27 Word 25, bits SUPP28 WoM 25, bits SUPP29 Word 25) bits SUPP30 12-IS A4l Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null 6. Credit Catd:

Word 15, bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word I7) bits X

__ Word 17; bits X

Word 18) bits X

Word 18, bits X
4-? A11 Word 18, bits X

Word 18, bits X

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26~

Word A~, Bit ~ Description Word 19, bits X

Word 19, bits X

Word 19, bits X

Word 19, bits X

Word 20, bits X

Word 20, bits X
4-7 A l9 Word 20, bits TBCD-Null -Word 20, bits SUPP1 Word 21) bits SUPP2 Word 21) bits SUPP3 Word 21) bits SUPP4 Word 21) bits SUPPS

Word 22) bits SUPP6 Word 22) bits SUPP7 Word 22) bits SUPP8 Word 22) bits SUPP9 Word 23, bits SUPPIO

Word 23, bits SUPPI1 Word 23) bits SUPPl2 Word 23) bits SUPPl3 Word 24, bits SUPP14 Word 24, bits SUPP15 Word 24) bits SUPP16 Word 24) bits SUPP17 Word 25, bits SUPP18 Word 25) bits SUPP19 Word 25, bits SUPP20 Word 25, bits SUPP21 Word 26, bits SUPP22 Word 26) bits SUPP23 Word 26, bits SUPP24 Word 26, bits SUPP25 7. 14 Digit MCI/VNet Calling Card:

Word 15, bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16) bits X

' Word 16, bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 17) bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17, bits Word 17, bits X I

Word 18, bits X

Word 18, bits TBCD-A -Word 18, bits TBCD-A

Word 18, bits TBCD-A

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word ~, Bit ~ Description Word 19, bits TBCD-A

Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits SUPPI

Word i9) bits SUPP2 Word 20, bits SUPP3 Word 20) bits SUPP4 Word 20, bits SUPPS

Word 20, bits SUPP6 Word 21, bits SUPP7 0~-3 A22 Word 21, bits SUPP8 Word 21, bits SUPP9 Word 21, hits SUPP10 Word 22, bits SUPPI l Word 22, bits SUPP12 Word 22) bits SUPP13 Word 22) bits SUPPI4 Word 23) bits SUPP15 Word 23) bits SUPP16 Word 23) bits SUPP17 Word 23, bits SUPPl8 Word 24) bits SUPP19 Word 24, bits SUPP20 Word 24, bits SUPP21 Word 24, bits SUPP22 Word 25, bits SUPP23 Word 25, bits SUPP24 Word 25) bits SUPP25 Word 25, bits SUPP26 Word 26) bits SUPP27 Word 26, bits SUPP28 Word 26) bits SUPP29 Word 26, bits SUPP30 8. OSID/OTG:

Word 15) bits X (OSID) Word 16, bits X (OSID) Word I6, bit:4-7 X (OSID) Word 16, bits X (OTG) Word 16, bits X (OTG) Word 17, bits X (OTG) Word 17) bits X (OTG) Word I?, bits TBCD-Null Word 17) bits TBCD-Null Word 18) bits TBCD-Null Word 18, bits TBCD-Null Word 18, bits TBCD-Null WoM 18, bits I2-15TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98123080 ' PGT/US97/21174 Word A', Bit ~ Description Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19) bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19) bits TBCD-Null Word 20, bits TBCD-Null Word 20) bits TBCD-Null Word 20, bits TBCD-Null Word 20, bits TBCD-Null Word 21) bits TBCD-Null Word 21) bits TBCD-Null Word 21) bits TBCD-Null Word 21, bits TBCD-Null Word 22, bits TBCD-Null Word 22, bits TBCD-Null Word 22) bits TBCD-Null Word 22, bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null -Word 23) bits TBCD-Null Word 23) bits TBCD-Null Word 23) bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 24) bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 25) bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Nuli Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Null OSID = Originating Switch ID (000-999) OTG = Originating Trunk ID (0000-8191) 9. Telecotnmunication/PTT
Cards:

Word 15, bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 17) bits X

Word 17) bits X

Word 17) bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 18) bits X

Word 18, bits X

Word 18, bits X

Word 18) bits X

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98!23080 PGT/US97/21174 - ~~
Word ~, Bit ~ Description Word 19, bits X

Word 19) bits X

Word 19, bits X

Word 19, bits X

Word 20) bits X

Word 20) bits X

Word 20) bits X

Word 20, bits X

Word 21, bits X

Word 21) bits X

Word 21) bits TBCD-Nuil Word 21) bits SUPPI
la-15 A25 Word 22, bits SUPP2 4-~3 A26 Word 22, bits SUPP3 4-.7 A27 Word 22, bits SUPP4 8-~11 A28 Word 22, bits SUPPS

Word 23) bits SUPP6 Word 23) bits SUPP7 4-.7 A31 Word 23, bits SUPP8 8-~11 A32 Word 23, bits SUPP9 1:>.-15 A33 Word 24) bits SUPP10 Word 24, bits SUPPI 1 Word 24, bits SUPP12 Word 24) bits SUPP13 Word 25, bits SUPP14 Word 25) bits SUPP15 Word 25) bits SUPP16 Word 25) bits SUPP17 Word 26, bits SUPP18 Word 26) bits SUPP19 Word 26, bits SUPP20 Word 26) bits SUPP21 10. Business Group ID:

Word 15) bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 15, bits X

Word 15) bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word I7) bits TBCD-Null Word 17) bits SUPP!

Word 17, bits SUPP2 12.-15 A9 Word 18) bits SUPP3 Word 18, bits SUPP4 4=7 Ai l Word 18) bits SUPPS

Word 18, bits SUPP6 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 28) Word 11, Bit ~ Description i Word 19) bits SUPP7 Word 19) bits SUPP8 Word l9, bits SUPP9 Word 19, bits SUPP10 Word 20, bits SUPP11 Word 20, bits SUPP12 Word 20) bits SUPP13 Word 20) bits SUPP14 Word 21) bits SUPPIS

Word 21) bits SUPP16 Word 21) bits SUPP17 Word 21, bits SUPP18 Word 22) bits SUPP19 Word 22) bits SUPP20 Word 22, bits SUPP21 Word 22) bits SUPP22 Word 23) bits SUPP23 Word 23, bits SUPP24 4-? A31 Word 23) bits SUPP25 Word 23, bits SUPP26 Word 24) bits SUPP27 Word 24, bits SUPP28 Word 24) bits SUPP29 Word 24, bits SUPP30 Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null --Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null 11. Network Information:

Word I5, bits X
12-15 Al Word 16, bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16, hits X

Word 16) bits TBCD-Null Word 17, bits SUPP1 Word 17, bits SUPP2 Word 17, bits SUPP3 Word 17, bits SUPP4 Word 18, bits SUPPS

Word 18) bits SUPP6 Word 18, bits SUPP7 Word 18, bits SUPP8 Word 19) bits SUPP9 Word 19, bits SUPP10 Word 19) biu SUPP11 Word 19) bits SUPP12 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) wo 9sn3a~o rc~rrtrs9~nma Word b) Bit ~ Description Word 20, bits SUPP13 Word 20, bits SUPP14 4-.7 A19 Word 20, bits SUPP15 Word 20, bits SUPPl6 Word 21, bits SUPP17 Word 21, bits SUPP18 Word 21) bits SUPPI9 Word 21, bits SUPP20 Word 22, bits SUPP21 Word 22, bits SUPP22 Word 22) bits SUPP23 Word 22, bits SUPP24 12:-15 A29 Word 23) bits SUPP25 0-:3 A30 Word 23) bits SUPP26 4=7 A31 Word 23) bits SUPP27 Word 23, bits SUPP28 Word 24, bits SUPP29 0-:3 A34 Word 24, bits SUPP30 4=I A35 Word 24) bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null 0-:3 A38 Word 25, bits TBCD-Null 4= 7 A39 Word 25) bits TBCD-Null Word 25) bits TBCD-Nuil Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null 12. BOC/LBC Card:

Word 15, bits N

Word 16, bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 16, bits N

Word 16, bits X
12-~IS AS

Word 17) bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17, bits X
$-11 AR

Word I7) bits X

- Word 18, bits X

Word 18) bits TBCD-Null Word 18) bits TBCD-Null Word l8) bits TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2fi) Word b) Bit li Description I
Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null 8-I l A16 Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 20) bits TBCD-Null Word 20) bits TBCD-Null Word 20, bits TBCD-Null Word 20, bits TBCD-Null Word 21, bits TBCD-Null Word Z1) bits TBCD-Null Word 21, bits TBCD-Null Word 21) bits TBCD-Null Word 22) bits TBCD-Null Word 22, bits TBCD-Null Word 22, bits TBCD-Null Word 22, bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null Word 23) bits TBCD-Null Word 23) bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null i2-15 A33 Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 24) bits TBCD-Null Word 24) bits TBCD-Null Word 25) bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 25) bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Nuil Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null 13. Third Party Numbcr:

Word 15, bits N

Word 16) bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16, bits N

Word 16, bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17) bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 18, bits X

Word 18, bits TBCD-Null Word 18, bits TBCD-Null Word 18) bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19) bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bias TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/23880 PtCT/US97/21174 -~ ~~.~
Word A~, Bit A~ Description Word 20, bits TBCD-Null Word 20, bits TBCD-Null Word 20, bits TBCD-Null Word 20) bit:; TBCD-Null Word 21, bits TBCD-Null Word 21, bits TBCD-Null Word 21) bits TBCD-Null Word 21, bits TBCD-Null Word 22) bits TBCD-Null _ TBCD-Null Word 22) bits 4-? A27 Word 22, bits TBCD-Null Word 22) bits TBCD-Null Word 23) bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null Word 23) bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null Word 24) bits TBCD-Null Word Z4, bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 25) bits TBCD-Null Word 25) bits TBCD-Null Word Z5) bits TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null :l2-15 A45 14. International Number:

Word 15, bits X(CC) I2-15 Ai Word 16, bits X(CC) (I-3 A2 Word 16, bits X(CC) Word 16, bits X(NN) Word 16, bits X(NN) Word 17) bits X(NN) Word 17, bits X(NN) Word 17) bits X(NN) Word 17) bits X(NN) Word 18) bits X(NN) Word 18, bits X(NN) Word 18) bits X(NN) Word I8, bits X(NN) 1'2-IS A13 Word 19, bits X(NN) Word 19, bits X(NN) 4.-7 A15 Word 19) bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null I'?-IS A17 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 28) Word II, Bit I! Description Word 20) bits TBCD-Null Word 20, bits TBCD-Null 4-? A19 Word 20) bits TBCD-Null Word 20, bits TBCD-Null Word 21, bits TBCD-Null Word 21, bits TBCD-Null Word 21, bits TBCD-Null Word 21, bits TBCD-Null Word 22, bits TBCD-Null Word 22, bits TBCD-Null Word 22) bits TBCD-Null 8-11 A?.8 Word 22, bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null Word 23, bits TBCD-Null Word 23) bits TBCD-Null Word 24) bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 24) bits TBCD-Null Word 24, bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 25) bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits TBCD-Null Word 25, bits THCD-Null Ward 26) bits TBCD-Null Word 26) bits TBCD-Null Word 26, bits TBCD-Null Word 25) bits TBCD-Null !2-15 A45 CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number 15. LAN Sequence Number:

Word 15) bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 16, bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word l7) bits X

Word 17) bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 18) bits X
0-3 . A10 Word 18, bits X

Word 18, bits X

Word 18, bits TBCD-Null Word 19) bits TBCD-Null I

Word 19) bits TBCD-Null Word 19) bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) II~ Wont ~, Bit ~ I Dest.Mptfon Word 20) A18 TBCD-Null bits 0-3 Word 20) AI9 TBCD-Null bits 4..7 Word 20, A20 TBCD-Null bits 8..11 Word 20, TBCD-Null bits 12-15 Word 21, A2Z TBCD-Null bits 0-3 Word 21, A23 TBCD-Null bits 4-.7 Word 21, A24 TBCD-Null bits 8-I
I

Word 21, TBCD-Null bits 12 -15 A''S

Word 22) A26 TBCD-Null bits 0-3 Word 22, A27 TBCD-Null bits 4-7 Word 22, A28 TBCD-Nutl bits 8-I
I

Word 22) TBCD-Null bits 12:-15 Word 23, A30 TBCD-Null bits 0-3 Ward 23, A31 TBCD-Null bits 4-7 Word 23) A32 TBCD-Null bits 8-11 Word 23) TBCD-Null bits 12-15 Word 24) A34 TBCD-Null bits 0-:3 Word 24) A35 TBCD-Null bits 4-7 Word 24, A36 TBCD-Null bits 8-l l Word 24, A37 TBCD-Null bits 12-15 Word 25, A38 TBCD-Null bits 0-'.3 Word 25, A39 TBCD-Null bits 4-'1 Word 25) A40 TBCD-Null bits 8-I

Word 25) A41 TBCD-Null bits 12-I5 Word 26, A42 TBCD-Null hits 0-3 Word 26) A43 TBCD-Null bits 4-7 Word 26) A44 TBCD-Null bits 8-11 Word 26) A45 TBCD-Null bits 12.-15 16. DNIS:
Word 15) bits N

Word 16) bits X

Word 16) bits X

Word 16) bits N

Word 16) bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17, bits X

Word 17) bits X

Word 17, bits X
i2-15 A9 Word 18) bits X

Word 18, bits TBCD-Nuil 4-7 Al 1 Word 18) bits TBCD-Null Word 18) bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null Word 19, bits TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word A~, Bit A~ Description Word 20, bits 0-3 Ai8 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 8-~11 A20 TBCD-Nuil Word 20, bits 1'~-15 A21 TBCD-NuII

Word 21, bits 0-~3 A22 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 4..7 A23 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 8-~11 A24 TBCD-Null Word 21) bits 12-15 A25 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 _ TBCD-Null Word 22) bits 4-7 A27 TBCD-Null Word 22) bits 8-11 A28 TBCD-Null Word 22) bits 12-15 A29 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits Q-3 A30 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 TBCD-Null Word 23) bits 8-11 A32 TBCD-Null Word 23) bits 12-15 A33 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 TBCD-Null Word 24) bits 4-7 A35 TBCD-Null Word 24) bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25) bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 25) bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26) bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26) bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Wotd 26) bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Ward 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 17. Network Call Identifier (NCID): If the NCID is recorded in the "A" field) it is recorded in binary beginning with A1. The entry code wih indicate the call processing associated with the particular call ar '0.' If the NCID is recorded in the NCID field of a 64-word call record, the entry code will also indicate the call processing associated with the particular call or '0.' The NCID

comprises the following:

Originating Switch 1D

Originating Trunk Group Originating Port Number Timepoint 1 NCID Sequence Number Word 27) bits 0-3 Feature Code (FC): Same as OSR/POSR format.

Word 27) bits 4-7 Terminating Network Code (TNC): Same as OSR/POSR format.

Word 27, bits 8-11 Network Access Type (NAT): Same as OSR/POSR
fortnat.

Word 27, bits 12-15 Timepoint 7 Qualifier (TP&Q): Same as OSR/POSR format.

Word 28, bits 0-6 Entry Code (EC): Same as OSR/POSR format.

Word 28, bits 7-9 Prefix Digits (PD): Same as OSR/POSR format Word 28, bits 10-12 NCS/DAP ID (NDID): Same as OSRIPOSR format.

Word 28, bits 13-15 Division ID (DIVID): Same as OSR/POSR
format.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word ~Y, Bit A~ Description Word 29) bits 0 Distant Overflow (DO): Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 29) bit 1 MCI Network Overflow (MNO): Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 29, bit 2 Customer Connect (CC): Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 29) bit 3 Inter-Network (IN): Same as OSR/POSR format.

Word 29) bit 4 Not Used Word 29, bit S SAC Bit (SC): This bit is used for the Flexible SAC feature. This bit will be set to "I" whenever the received number which is collected during the address digit collection phase, is identified as a SAC number in the FlexSac Index associated with the originating trunk group. This bit will be sec to "0" in all other cases.

Word 29, bit 6 CaII Direction (CD): Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 29, bit ? Destination (DE): Same as OSRIPOSR format.

Word 29, bit 8 Dedicated Termination (DT): Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 29, bit 9 Person-to-Person (PO): Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 29, bit 10 Transferred Bit (XB): Same as OSRIPOSR
format.

Word 29, bit 11 Satellite (SA): Same as OSR/POSR format.

Word 29) bits 12-15 Nature of Calling Locarion ID (NOCLI):
Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 30) bits 0-15 Carrier Number (CN): Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 31) bits 0-3 Authorization Code ID (ACIF): Same as OSR/POSR format.

Word 31, bits 4-ZO Release Code (RC): Same as OSR/POSR format.

Word 31, bits 11-13 NCID Sequence Number: Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 31, bit 14 NCID Location (NCIDLOC): Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 31, hit 15 Remote ANI Screened (RS): Same as OSR/POSR
format.

Word 32) bits 0-15 Time & Changes Guest Name (T&C Guest):
Word 33) bits 0-15 Records the Time and Charges guest name that will be passed back to the switch from the operator service platform for the time and charges feature. The inforrnation is recorded as ASCII characters starting with the first character in word 32) bits 0-7.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 28) Word ~Y, Bit A~ Description Word 34, bits 0-15 Destination Address (DA): Records up to 25 digits of the Word 35, bits 0-I5 destination address in TBCD format in the sequence that they are Word 36, bits 0-15 received or translated to) starting with D 1. Unused bytes contain Word 37, bits 0-15 TBCD-Null.

Word 38) bits 0-15 Word 39, bits 0-15 7-digit 10-digitDDD IDDD

Word 40, bits 0-3 Word 34, bits 0-3 D N N CC

Word 34, bits 4-7 D2 X X ' CC
X

Word 34, bits 8-11 X X CC

Word 34) bits 12-15 N N NN
.D4 X

Word 35) bits 0-3 D5 X X NN
X

Word 35) bits 4-7 D6 X X NN
X

Word 35, bits 8-I I X X NN

Word 35, bits 12-15 X X NN
D8 X(TSID) Word 36, bits 0-3 D9 X X NN
X(TSID) Word 36, bits 4-7 D10 X X NN
X(TSID) Word 36, bits 8-I1 X(TSID)T-NullNN
D1I X(TTG) Word 36) bits 12-15 X(TSID)T-NullNN
D12 X(TTG) Word 37, bits 0-3 D X(TSID)T-NullNN
13 X(TTG) Word 37, bits 4-7 D14 X(TTG) T-NullNN
X(TTG) Word 37) bits 8-l l X(TTG) T-NullNN
D15 T- Null Word 37, bits 12-IS X(TTG) T-NullT-Null D16 T-Nuli Word 38, bits 0-3 D17 X(TTG) T-NullT-Null T-Nuli Word 38) bits 4-7 D T-NuIi T-NullT-Null 18 T-Null Word 38, bits 8-I1 T-Null T-NullT-Null D19 T-Nuli Word 38, bits I2-15 T-Null T-NutlT-Null D20 T-Null Word 39, bits 0-3 D21 T-Null T-NullT-Null T-Null Word 39) bits 4-7 D22 T-Null T-NullT-Null T-Null Word 39, bits 8-11 T-Null T-NullT-Null D23 T-Null Word 39) bits 12-15 T-Null T-NullT-Null D24 T-Null Word 40, bits 0-3 D25 T-Null T-NullT-Null T-Null CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number TSID = Terminating Switch ID

TTG = Terminating Trunk ID

T-Null = TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) I~ Word 1l, Bit ~ I Description 18-digit Word 34) D N
bits (1-3 1 Word 34) D2 N
bits 4-7 Word 34, D3 N
bits 8-11 Word 34) N
bits 12-IS

Word 35) DS N
bits 0-3 Word 35, D6 N
bits 4-7 Word 35, D7 N
bits 8-11 Word 35, N
bits 12-15 Word 36, D9 N
bits 0-3 Word 36, D N
bits 4-7 10 Word 36) D11N
bits 8-11 Word 36) N
bits 12-15 Word 37, D N
bits 0-3 13 Word 37) D N
bits 4.-7 14 Word 37, D15N
bits 8-11 Word 37) D N
bits 12-15 l6 Word 38) D17N
bits 0-3 Word 38, D18N
bits 4-.7 Word 38) D19X (TSID) bits 8-~11 Word 38) D20X (TSID) bits 12-IS

Word 39) D21X (TSID) bits 0-3 Word 39) D22X (TTG) bits 4-7 Word 39, D23X (TTG) bits 8-11 Word 39) D24X (TTG) bits 12-15 Word 40, D25X (T'TG) bits 0-3 TSID = Terminating Switch ID

TTG = Terminating Trunk Group Word 40, bits Pretranslated Digits 4-15 (PTD): Represents u to 15 di i f p g Word 41) bits number that is the translation ts 0-15 of a number dia o a led b h y e caller.
Word 42) bits t Word 43) bits 10 digit VNed VNet,SAC OOY 7 IDDD
digit DNIS, or SAC VNet l5 or digit Hotline CodeSNS (example) Word 40 bits 4-7 PTDI N

, 0 N N
Word 40) bits 8-I 1 0 N

N
Word 40, bits I2-IS Y X N

Word 41, bits 0-3 PTD4 N X N
N

Word 41, bits 4-7 PTDS X X N
X

Word 41) bits 8-11 PTD6X X N
X

Word 41, bits 12-IS X X N

Word 42) bits 0-3 PTD8 X T-NullN
X

Word 42) bits 4-7 PTD9 X T-NullN
X

Word 42, bits 8-11 PTDIOX T-NullN
X

Word 42) bits 12-IS T-NullT-NullN
PTD11 T-Null Word 43) bits 0-3 PTD12T-NullT-NullN
T-Null Word 43, bits 4-7 PTD13T-NullT-NullN
T-Null Word 43, bits 8-11 PTD14T-NullT-NullN
T-Null Word 43) bits 12-1S T-NullT-Nul!N
PTD15 T-NuEI

T-Null = TBCD-Null SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26j Word k, Bit ~ Description Word 44) bits 0-7 Enhanced international Routing (EIR) Call Type: Contains the EIR -call type ID as received from the DAP in the NCS billing information parameter or from the operator in the NCS billine information ISUP RLT parameter. It is recorded in binary) the default = '0.' Word 44, bits 8-14 Overflow Cause Value (OVFVAL): This field is the bi nary equivalent of the first cause value received or fotinatted in-switch .
This value is taken from the cause value subfieid in the cause parameter that initiated overflow.

Word 44) Counts As Bid (CB): Used with the EiR feature.
bit This bit is set to 'I' or '0' as per the information received from the DAP in the CB

field of the NCS billing information parameter or from the operator in the NCS billing information ISUP RLT parameter.

0 = Does not count as bid (default) 1 = Counts as bid Word Overflow Cause Location (OVFCL): This field 45) is the binary bits equivalent of the value recorded from the first cause location received or formatted in-switch. This information is taken from the cause location subfield in the cause parameter that initiated overflow.

Word Desired Tet~ninating Address (DTA): These 45) 15 bytes contain the bits Word originally intended or "desired" termination 46, before overflow was bits Word ttyggered. They contain either: 1) the 47, desired terminating switch id bits Word and trunk group for calls that were sent 48) to a DTC termination, 2) bits a national number) or 3) international number based on what the action code returned from the DAP for the desired termination.

DTC

DTSID +

DTTG DDD

Word 45) bits 4-7 DTA L 0 N

Word 45) bits 8-11 DTAZ X (DTSID 1 ) X

Word 45) bits 12-15 DTA3 X (DTSID2) X

Word 46, bits 0-3 DTA4 X (DTSID3) N

Word 46, bits 4-7 DTAS 0 X

Word 46, bits 8-lI DTA6 X (DTTGI) X

Word 46) bits 12-IS DTA7 X (DTTG2) X

Word 47, bits 0-3 DTA8 X (DTTG3) X

Word 47) bits 4-7 DTA9 X (DTTG4) X

Word 47) bits 8-11 DTA10 TBCD-Null X

Word 47) bits I2-IS DTA11 TBCD-Null TBCD-Nul!

Word 48) bits 0-3 DTA12 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 4-7 DTA13 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 4-11 DTA14 TBCD-Nuil TBCD-Null Word 4$, bits 12-15 DTA15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null DTSID = Desired Terminating Switch ID

DTTG = Desired Terminating Trunk Group SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word ~) Bit ~ Description ' IDDD DTC

(example) (future) Word 45) bits 4-7 DTA 1 CC X (DTSID I
) Word 45, bits 8-11 DTA2 CC X (DTSID2) Word 45, bits 12-15 DTA3 CC X (DTSID3) Word 46, bits 0-3 DTA4 NN X;(DTSID4) Word 46) bits 4-7 DTAS NN X (DTTG I ) ~

Word 46) bits 8-11 DTA6 NN X (DTTG2) Word 4b) bits I2-15 DTA7 NN X (DTTG3) Word 47, bits 0-3 DTA8 NN X (DTTG4) Word 47, bits 4-7 DTA9 NN X (DTTGS) Word 47, bits 8-11 DTA10 NN TBCD-Null Word 47, bits 12-15 DTA11 NN TBCD-Null Word 48) bits 0-3 DTA12 NN TBCD-Null Word 48) bits 4-7 DTA13 NN TBCD-Null Word 48) bits 8-11 DTA14 NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 12-15 DTA15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number DTSID = Desired Terminating Switch ID

DTTG = Desired Terminating Trunk Group Word 49, bits 0-6 Overflow Count (OVFC): Indicates the total number of intermediate overflow attempts before successful termination was achieved. This value is incremented each time the DAP is accessed for overflow information.

Word 49) bits 7-12 Desired Termination Action Code (DTAC):
This field represents the action code which was received from the DAP in the first response. This information is used to identify the type of information which is recorded in the DTA
field.

Word 49) bit 13 Not Used Word 49, bits 14-15 Network Call Identifier (NC1D): Contains the binary Words 50-54, bits 0-15 representation of the NCID. The NCID is recorded here at iacermediste and terminating switches if the Authcode field is being used to rexord other information.
The NCID is created at the originating switch and is passed to intermediate and terminating switches. The format of the NCID is:

Originating Switch ID (OSID) Originating Trunk Group (OTG) Originating Port (OP) Timepoint 1 (TPI) NCID Sequence Number Word 55, bits 0-15 Time and Charges Room Number (T&C Room):
This field Word 56, bits 0-15 records the time; and charges room number that will be passed Word 57, bits 0-15 back to the switch from the operator service platform for the time and charges feature. The information is recorded as ASCII

characters starting with the first character in word 53, bits 0-7.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RUL.E 26) Word i'I, Bit ~Y Description Word 58) bits 0-15 EVS Application Counter (EAC-i): This Word 59 field records the EVS
bits 0-15 ) application counter values if an ARU
Word 60 is used in the call. The field bits 0-156 , contains the digits that were dialed by the customer in response to audio menu options.

Word 61, bits 0-13 Operator ID Number (OPIN): This field contains th e operator ID
number of the operator that handled the call.

Word 61, bits 14-15 Overflow Cause Coding Standard (OVFCS):
Contains the binary equivalent of the first coding standard received or formatted in-switch. This value is taken from the coding standard subfieid in the cause parameter that initiated overflow.
It will not be overwritten by subsequent coding standards received or in-switch formatted values. This field is used for enhanced overflow calls only.

Word 62, bits 0-12 Timepoint 5 (TPS): A binary count of the number of seconds between the time timepoint 1 occurred and the time that the operator stopped handling the call and releases the position. If the call is transferred to other operators, the value contained in this field shall express the release time of the last operator providing the service.

Word 62, bits 13-15 Not Used.

Word 63, bits 0-15 Room Number (RN): Contains the last four digits of the Callin g Station ID (CSI) when a call originates from a hotel a i i , un vers ty, or any other community identified by only a main telephone number. The CSI shall be obtained from the originating signalling information) or verbally by the operator who enters the information manually into the OSR.

Word 0) bits 0-3 ~ Call Record Id (CRID): Identifies the record type.
0 = Default 1 = CDR
2 = SER
3 = PNR
4 = OSR
= POSR
6 = ECDR
7 = EPOSR
8 = EOSR
9 = EPOSR
10-15 = Not Used Word 0, bits 4-15 Sync word: This word contains a minus two (77768).
Word 1, bits 0-15 Call Disconnect 1D (CDID): Identifies the cal . Each call Word 2) bits 0-15 record has a unique number. When a switch cold restart of reload occurs) the CDID is set to 0 and a Switch Event Record with an event code of 3 is written. When the CDID count rolls over, an event code of i0 SER is recorded.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2B) Word #, Bit # Description Word 3, bits 0-IS Switch ID (SWID): Contains the unique identifier of the current switch. the SWID consists of three (3) packed alphanumeric characters. The lead character may be any hex digit (0-F). The next two (2) characters are any number in a base 36 system. Base 36 symbols are 0-9, A-Z. The maximum octal number in the base 36 is 438 which represents the letter Z. Values 44a through 77s are unused.

Word 3, bits 0-3 SWIDI (0-9) A-F) Word 3) bits 4-9 SWID2 (0-9) A-Z) Word 3, bits 10-15 SWID3 (0-9, A-Z) Word 4, bits 0-7 Switch Type (ST): Indicates the type of switch.

0 = default 1 = 580L SCX

2 = DEX-400 3 = CTSS-1006 4 = CTSS-4000 5 = DMS-250 6 = AXE-10 7 = DEX-600 8 = DMS-300 9 = DMS-TOPS

10 = DEX-600E

11 = AS20 12 = AS27 13 = EVS ARU

14-255 = Not Used SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 98/23080 PC'T/US97/21174 Word ~) Bit A~ Description Word 4) bits 8-15 Event Qualifier (EQ): Identifies the event causing the record.

0 = default 1 = Input command or automatic system update that changed date - 2 = Input command or automatic system update that changed time 3 = System restart 4 = Hourly log (HH:00:00) 5 = Recovery Action 6 = End of billing data (End of File) 7 = Stan of billing data (Start of File) 8 = NEMAS SRB blocking record (end of billing block) 9 = Daylight savings time changed (time and offset time changed) IO = CDID LOG (CDID roiled over to 0) 11 = Not Used I2 = Blank SER (filler record for billing block) 13-255 = Not Used An event code 7 SER will always be the first record in the call history data set.

An event code 8 SER will always be the last record in the call block and will be immediately proceeded by event code 6.

An event code 9 SER will be invoked by a rnan-machine command that invokes a Daylight Saving 'Time change.

An event code 10 SER will be written each time the Call Disconnect ID (CDID) rolls over from a maximum count to '0' .
This event code will not be written for CDID rollovers due to system restarts.

Word 5, bits 0-15 SER Event Time (SERET): Contains the epoch Word 6 time of this SER
bits 0-IS

) and is used for event codes.

Word 7, bits 0-3 Not Used Word 7, bits 4-15 First CDID (FCD1D): Contains the last 12 bits of the CDID that was recorded in the first call record or SER in this billing block .
This field is used in SER event code 8.

Word 8) bits 0-3 Not Used Word 8, bits 4-15 Last CDID (LCDID): Contains the CDID th t a was recorded in the last call record or SER in this billing block. This field is used in SER 8.

Word 9, bits 0-3 Not Used Word 9, bits 4-15 Next CDID (NCDID): Contains the CDID in the next call record or SER. This field is used in SER 8.

Word 10) bits 0-IS NEMAS Blocking Sequence Number (NBSN):
Contains the NEMAS blocking sequence number in event code 8 SERs The .
first event code 8 SER within a call history tile is set to a NBSN

value of 0. The NBSN value is sequentially incremented in following event code 8 SERB.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) Word A~) Bit A~ Description Word 11) bits 0-IS Previous Time (PT): Contains the epoch tithe of the time before a ~

Word 12) bits 0-IS system time change was made. Used in SER
1) 2) and 9.

Word 13, bit 0 Sign Bit (SB): Indicates whether the time offset is a negative or positive number. This field is used in all SERB.

0 = positive offset 1 = negative offset Word 13, bits I-10 Time Offset (TOI: Used to record the time offset from universal time (UTC) in one minute increments. This field is used in all SERB.

Word 13) bits 11-15 Not Used.

Word 14, bits 0-15 Word 15) bits 0-15 Word !6, bits 0-15 Software Load ID1-6: Contains 6 bytes of the software load Word 17, bits 0-15 identifier of the switch recording the billing. This field is written Word 18) bits 0-15 in EBCDIC format and contains the same data as the software load identifier that is recorded in the call history tape label Word 19, bits 0-1 S Last Patch A~ 1, I12: These 2 bytes contain the latest patch . _ number/point release of the switch recording the billing. This field is written in EBCDIC format and contains the same data as the latest patch numberlpoint reiesse that is recorded in the coil history tape label. The point release identifies the upgrade level of the current software load. Used in SER
7.

Word 20) bits 0-5 Quantity CDR (QCDR): Contains the quantity of CDRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for eveat code 8 SERB.

Word 20) bits 6-i l Quantity ECDR (QECDR): Contains the quantity of expanded CDRs that wsre recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs.

Word 20, bits 12-15 Not Used Word 21, bits 0-5 Quantity PNR (QPNR): Contains the quantity of PNRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERB.

Word 21, bits 6-11 Quantity EPNR (QEPNR): Contains the quantity of expanded PNRs that were t~ecorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERB.

Word 21, bits 12-15 Not Used Word 22, bits 0-5 Quantity_OSR (QOSR): Contains the quantity of OSRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERB.

Word 22) bits 6-11 Quantity EOSR (QEOSR): Contains the quantity of expanded OSRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs.

Word 22) bits 12-15 Not Used Word 23) bits 0-5 Quantity POSR (QPOSR): Contains the quantity of POSRs that.

were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2B) Word k) Blt ~ Description -------~.
Word Z3, bits 6-11 - Quantity EPOSR (QEPOSR): Contains the quantity of expanded POSRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used oNy for event code 8 SERs) Word 23, bits i2-15 Not Used Word 24) bits 0-S Quantity SER (QSER): Contains the quantity of SERB that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code g SERB.

Word 24, bits 6-12 Call History File Number ( Contains the call history file number as assigned whey a call history file is opened at the switch. Used in all SERB. The first opened file contains a CHFN

value of 0. Each new file opened in that same day shall increment the CHFN by one. When the Julian date changes (at midnight), the next file opened shall cause the CHFN
to be reset back to zero.

Word 24, bits I3-14 Not Used.

Word 24, bit 15 SER 12 Used (SU): This bit is set in an SER 8 if the previous call record was a SER I2.

Word 25, bits 0-15 CDR Throttle Start Time: Records the epoch time whe CDR

Word 26, bits 0-15 n throttling started. Used in SER 8.

Word 27) bits 0-15 CDR Throttle Stop Time: Records the epoch time when CDR

Word 28, bits 0-15 throriling stopped. Used in SER 8.

Word 29, bits 0-11 Not Used.

Word 29, bits 12-IS Fotmat Version: This field is filled with 1's to identify the 32/64 word format. The billing system must then look to Word 0 bits 0-, 3 to determine the type of call record used.

Word 30, bits 0-15 Throttle Count: Used to record the number Word 31 of CDRs that were not bits 0-15 ) written during the time that CDR throttling was invoked. Used in SER 8.

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) DEMANDES OU BREVETS VOLUMiNEUX
LJ4 PRESENTS PARTIE DE CETTE DEMAnJDE OU CE BREVET
COMPREND PLUS D'UN TOME.
CECI EST LE TOME ~ DE z-NOTE: Pour les tomes additionels, veuiitez cantacter ie Bureau canadien des brevets JUMBO APPLICATIONS/PATENTS
Tl~liS SECTION OF THE APPLlCATION/PATENT CONTAINS MORE
THAN ONE VOLUME
~ THIS IS VOLUME .~ OF
NOTE: .For additional volumes please contact'the iCanadian .Patent Office

Claims (388)

What is claimed is:

1. A method for routing media transmissions on a hybrid network including a directory service, comprising of the steps of:
(a) transmitting media information to the hybrid network;
(b) receiving the media information to the hybrid network;
(c) parsing call information from the media information and querying said directory service based on the call information;
(d) receiving the query from the hybrid network at the directory service;
and (e) identifying an action based on the call information and the directory service information.

2. The method as recited in claim 1, wherein the call information includes delivery preference information.

3. The method as recited in claim 2, including the step of retrieving stored message information based on the preference information.

4. The method as recited in claim 1, wherein the media information includes support for text, audio, multimedia, video and data.

5. The method as recited in claim 1, wherein the actions based on the call information comprise document delivery.

6. The method as recited in claim 5, wherein the document delivery includes paging, e-mail, faxing and voicemail delivery.

7. The method as recited in claim 1, wherein the actions based on the call information comprise outbound calling.

8. A system for routing media transmissions on a hybrid network, including a directory service, comprising:
(a) control software that transmits media information to the hybrid network;
(b) control software that receives the media information at the hybrid network;
(c) control software that parses call information from the media information and queries a directory service based on the call information;
(d) control software that receives the query from the hybrid network at the directory service; and (e) control software that identifies an action based on the call information and information from the directory service.

9. The system as recited in claim 8, wherein the call information includes delivery preference information

10. The system as recited in claim 9, including control software that retrieves stored message information based on the preference information.

11. The system as recited in claim 8, wherein the stored message information includes support for text, audio, multimedia, video and data.

12. The system as recited in claim 8, wherein actions based on the call information include document delivery.

13. The system as recited in claim 12, wherein the document delivery includes paging, e-mail, faxing and voicemail delivery.

14. The system as recited in claim 8, wherein the actions based on the call information include outbound calling.

15. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for routing media transmissions on a hybrid network, including a directory service, comprising:
(a) control software that identifies an action based on the call information and information from the directory service.
(b) first software that transmits media information to the hybrid network;
(c) second software that receives the media information at the hybrid network;
(d) third software that parses call information from the media information and queries a directory service based on the call information;
(e) fourth software that receives the query from the hybrid network at the directory service; and (f) fifth software that identifies an action based on the call information and information from the directory service.

16. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 15, wherein the call information includes delivery preference information.

17. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 16, including software that retrieves stored message information based on the preference information.

18. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 15, wherein the stored message information includes support for text, audio, multimedia, video and data.

19. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 15, wherein actions based on the call information include document delivery.

20. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 19, wherein the document delivery includes paging, e-mail, faxing and voicemail delivery.

21. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 15, wherein the actions based on the call information include outbound calling.

22. A method for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising the steps of:
(a) establishing a multicast communication among two or more consumers via the switched network and the internet for Transmitting video, audio and/or data communication in Real-time Transmission Protocol (RTP) format;
(b) transmitting the video information from each consumer to all other consumers participating in the communication simultaneously; and (c) transmitting the mixed audio information from all other consumers participating in the communication to each participating consumer such that each participating consumer hears all other participating consumers simultaneously.

23. A method for media communications over a hybrid network as recited in claim 22, further comprising the steps of searching a directory of consumers available to participate in video, audio, and/or data communication at a user interface.

24. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 22, wherein a consumer establishes the communication among two or more consumers by choosing other participating consumers according to their Internet Protocol addresses.

25. A method for communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 23, wherein a consumer establishes the communication among two or more consumers by choosing other participating consumers from the user interface.

26. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 22, wherein a consumer establishes the communication among two or more consumers by communicating with a human or automated operator or agent.

27. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 22, further comprising the steps of:
(a) creating a virtual reality environment in which each consumer participating in the communication is represented by a separate image; and (b) communicating media among the participants by manipulating virtual objects among the representative images.

28. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising:
(a) a processor with control software that establishes a multicast communication between a consumer and the Internet for transmitting media communication in Real-time Transmission Protocol (RTP) format;
(b) a processor with control software that transmits the media communication via the Internet to one or more other consumers;
(c) a processor with control software that receives media communication via the Internet from one or more consumers; and (d) a processor with control software that controls the transmission and reception to Main designated qualities of service for the media communication.

29. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 28, wherein the media communication comprises a combination of video information, audio information and data.

30. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 29, further comprising a user interface for searching to determine whether the intended recipient of the media communication is available to receive the media communication by searching a directory of available video telephony consumers.

31. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 29, wherein the media communication is transmitted through a human or automated operator or agent.

32. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 29, wherein the transmission and reception are controlled by a resource reservation protocol that reserves network resources along the communication path to obtain designated qualities of service for the media communication.

33. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 29, further comprising:
(a) a processor with control software that transmits the media communication through a human or automated operator or agent if a human or automated agent is available;
(b) a storage that stores recorded media information;
(c) a processor with control software that transmits the recorded media information from the storage location to the consumer if no human or automated operator or agent is available; and (d) a processor with control software that terminates the recorded media information transmission when a human or automated operator or agent becomes available.

34. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising:
(a) first software that establishes a multicast communication between a consumer and the Internet for transmitting media communication in Real-time Transmission Protocol (RTP) format;
(b) second software that transmits the media communication via the internet to one or more other consumers;
(c) third software that receives media communication via the internet from one or more other consumers; and (d) fourth software that controls the transmission and reception to obtain designated qualities of service for the media communication.

35. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 34, wherein the media communication comprises a combination of video information, audio information and data.

36. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 34, further comprising a fifth software of a directory of available video telephony consumers wherein a consumer determines whether the intended recipient of the media communication is available to receive the media communication by searching the directory.

37. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 34, wherein the media communication is transmitted through a human or automated operator or agent.

38. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 34, wherein the transmission and reception are controlled by a resource reservation protocol that reserves network resources along the communication path to obtain designated qualities of service for the media communication.

39. A computer program embodied in a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network are recited in claim 34, further comprising:
(a) fifth software that transmits the media communication through a human or automated operator or agent if a human or automated agent is available;
(b) sixth software that stores recorded media information in a storage location;
(c) seventh software that transmits the recorded media information from the storage location to the consumer if no human or automated operator or agent is available; and (d) eighth software that terminates the recorded media information transmission when a human or automated operator or agent becomes available.

40. A method for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising the steps of:
(a) establishing a multicast communication among a plurality of users for media communication in a Real-time Transmission Protocol (RTP) format utilizing the hybrid network;
(b) transmitting the audio communication from a first user to all other users participating in the communication simultaneously;
(c) transmitting the video information from a fist user participating in the multicast communication to each user such that each participating user hears all other participating users; and (d) storing a billing record based on the user participants and media features utilized for routing the media communication over the hybrid network.

41. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 40, further comprising the step of searching a directory of users available to participate in video, audio, and/or data communication, and reflecting use of the search feature in the billing record.

42. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 40, wherein a user establishes the communication among two or more users by choosing other participating users according to their Internet Protocol addresses.

43. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 41, wherein a user establishes the communication among two or more users by choosing other participating users from the user interface.

44. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 40, wherein a user establishes the communication among a plurality of users by communicating with an operator.

45. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 40, further comprising the steps of:
(a) creating a virtual reality environment in which each a ser participating in the communication is represented by a separate image; and (b) communicating media among the participants by manipulating a virtual object associated with the separate image.

46. A system for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising;
(a) control software that established a multicast communication among a plurality of users for media communication in a Real-time Transmission Protocol (RTP) format utilizing the hybrid network;
(b) communication software which transmits the audio communication from a first user to all other users participating in the communication simultaneously;
(c) communication software which transmits the video information from a first user participating in the multicast communication to each user such that each participating user hears all other participating users;
and (d) control software that store a billing record based on the user participants and media features utilized for routing the media communication over the hybrid network.

47. The system as recited in claim 46, further comprising a user interface for searching a directory of users available to participate in video, audio, and/or data communication, and reflecting use of the search feature in the billing record.

48. The system as recited in claim 46, wherein a user established the communication among two or more users by choosing other participating users according to their Internet Protocol addresses.

49. The system as recited in claim 47, wherein a user established the communication among two or more users by selecting participating users from the user interface.

50. The system as recited in claim 46, wherein a user establishes the communication among a plurality of users by communicating with an operator.

51. The system as recited in claim 46, further comprising;
(a) control software utilized to create a virtual reality environment in which each user participating in the communication is represented by a separate image; and (b) control software utilized to communicate media among the participants by manipulating a virtual object associated with separate image.

52. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for routing media communications over a hybrid network, comprising:

(a) first software that establishes a multicast communication among a plurality of users for media communication in a Real-time Transmission Protocol (RTP) format utilizing the hybrid network;
(c) second software which transmits the audio communication from a first user to all other users participating in the communication simultaneously;
(d) third software which transmits the video information from a first user participating in the multicast communication to each user such that each participating user hears all others- participating users; and (e) fourth software that stores a billing record based on the user participants and media features utilized for routing the media communication over the hybrid network.

53. The computer program as recited in claim 52, further comprising a user interface for searching a directory of users available to participate in video, audio, and/or data communication, and reflecting use of the search feature in the billing record.

54. The computer program as recited in claim 52, wherein a user establishes the communication among two or more users by choosing other participating users according to their Internet Protocol addresses.

55. The computer program as recited in claim 53, wherein a user established the communication among two or more users by selecting participating users from the user interface.

56. The computer program as recited in claim 52, wherein a user establishes the communication among a plurality of users by communicating with an operator.

57. The computer program as recited in claim 52, further comprising:
(a) fifth software utilized to create a virtual reality environment in which each user participating in the communication is represented by a separate image; and (b) sixth software utilized to communicate media among the participants by manipulating a virtual object associated with the separate image.

58. A method for connecting a first telephony capable device with a second telephony capable device for media transmissions on a hybrid network including an authenticating mechanism, comprising the steps of:
(a) dialing a card access number from the first telephony capable device;
(b) determining if the first telephony capable device is authorized to place the desired call by prompting for a card number;
(c) receiving a card number entry from the first telephony device;
(d) prompting for a phone number (e) receiving a phone number entry from the first telephony device;
(f) identifying the destination for the call by accessing the directory service and translating the phone number entry into a destination number; and (g) completing the call to the destination number of the second telephony capable device.

59. The method as recited in claim 58, wherein the card information, includes an unique card number.

60. The method as recited in claim 59, wherein the card information, includes an access number.

61. The method as recited in claim 58, wherein the calling card is a debit card.

62. The method as recited in claim 58, wherein the calling card includes access to operator information.

63. The method as recited in claim 58, wherein the calling card includes speed-dial features.

64. The method as recited in claim 58, wherein the calling card provides access to conference call support.

65. The method as recited in claim 58, wherein the calling card provides access to voicemail

66. The method as recited in claim 58, wherein the calling card provides access to electronic mail.

67. The method as recited in claim 58, wherein the calling card provides access to a news service.

68. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for routing media transmissions on a hybrid network from a first telephony capable device to a second telephony capable device, comprising:
(a) first software that dials a card access number from the first telephony capable device;
(b) second software that determines if the first telephony capable device is authorized to place the desired call by prompting for a card number;
(c) third software that receives a card number entry from the first telephony device;
(d) fourth software that prompts for a phone number;
(e) fifth software that receives a phone number entry from the first telephony device;

(f) sixth software that identifies the destination for the call by accessing the directory service and translating the phone number entry into a destination number; and (g) seventh software that completes the call to the destination number of a second telephony capable device.

69. The computer program as recited in claim 68, wherein the card information, includes an unique card number.

70. The computer program as recited in claim 68, wherein the card information, includes an access number.

71. The computer program as recited in claim 68, wherein the calling card is a debit card.

72. The computer program as recited in claim 68, wherein the calling card includes access to operator information.

73. The computer program as recited in claim 68, wherein the calling card includes speed-dial features.

74. The computer program as recited in claim 68, wherein the calling card provides access to conference call support.

75. The computer program as recited in claim 68, wherein the calling card provides access to voicemail.

76. The computer program as recited in claim 68, wherein the calling card provides access to electronic mail.

77. The computer program as recited in claim 68, wherein the calling card provides access to a news service.

78. A method for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising the steps of:
(a) creating profile information pertaining to a caller; and (b) utilizing the profile information to provide media features over the hybrid network based on the profile information pertaining to the caller.

79. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 78, wherein the profile information is stored in a database accessible from the hybrid network.

80. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 78, wherein the profile information is stored in a distributed database that facilitates high availability processing.

81. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 78, wherein the profile information is stored in a database located in a host processor attached to the switch network.

82. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 78, wherein the profile information is created in a data base located in a host processor when a new user is processed.

83. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 78, wherein the profile information is dynamically alterable by the user associated with the profile information to reflect current information.

84. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network coupled with an Internet, comprising:
(a) a storage attached to the hybrid network in which profile information pertaining to a user is stored; and (b) a processor with control software that utilizes the profile information to provide features over the hybrid network based on the profile information pertaining to the user.

85. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 84, wherein the profile information is stored in a database accessible from the hybrid network.

86. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 84, wherein the profile information is stored in a database that facilitates high availability processing.

87. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 84, wherein the profile information is stored in a database located in a host processor attached to the hybrid network.

88. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 84, wherein the profile information is stored in a database located in host processor when a new customer is processed.

89. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 84, wherein the profile information is dynamically alterable by the client associated with the profile information to reflect current information.

90. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network coupled with an Internet, comprising:
(a) first software that stores profile information pertaining to a user;
(b) second software that utilizes the profile information to provide features over the hybrid network based on the profile information pertaining to the user.

91. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 90, wherein the profile information is stored in a database accessible from the hybrid network.

92. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 90, wherein the profile information is stored in a distributed database that facilitates high availability processing.

93. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 90, wherein the profile information is stored in a database located in a host processor attached to the hybrid network.

94. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 90, wherein the profile information is created in a database located in host processor when a new customer is processed.

95. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 90, wherein the profile information is dynamically alterable by the client associated with the profile information to reflect current information.

96. A method for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising the steps of:
(a) creating profile information pertaining to a caller; and (b) utilizing the profile information to provide fine-me-follow-me processing over the hybrid network based on the profile information pertaining to the caller.

97. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 96, wherein the profile information is stored in a database accessible from the hybrid network.

98. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 96, wherein the profile information is stored in a distributed database that facilitates high availability processing.

99. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 96, wherein the profile information is stored in a database located in a host processor attached to the switch network.

100. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 96, wherein the profile information is created in a database located in a host processor when a new user is processed.

101. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 96, wherein the profile information is dynamically alterable by the user associated with the profile information to reflect current information.

102. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising:
(a) a storage attached to the hybrid network in which profile information pertaining to a user is stored; and (b) a processor with control software that utilizes the profile information to provide find-me-follow-me processing over the hybrid network based on the profile information pertaining to the user.

103. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 102, wherein the profile information is stored in a database accessible from the hybrid network.

104. An apparatus far media communications over a hybrid network as recited in claim 102, wherein the profile information is stored in a distributed database that facilitates high availability processing.

105. An apparatus for media communications over a hybrid network as recited in claim 102, wherein the profile information is stored in a database located in a host processor attached to the hybrid network.

106. An apparatus for media communications over a hybrid network as recited in claim 102, wherein the profile information is created in a database located in host processor when a new customer is processed.

107. An apparatus for media communications over a hybrid network as recited in claim 102, wherein the profile information is dynamically alterable by the client associated with the profile information to reflect current information.

108. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising:
(a) first software that stores profile information pertaining to a user;
(b) second software that utilizes the profile information to provide find-me-follow-me processing over the hybrid network based on the profile information pertaining to the user.

109. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 108, wherein the profile information is stored in a database accessible from the hybrid network.

110. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 108, wherein the profile information is stored in a distributed database that facilitates high availability processing.

111. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 108, wherein the profile information is stored in a database located in a host processor attached to the switch network.

112. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 108, wherein the profile information is created in a database located in host processor when a new customer is processed.

113. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 108, wherein the profile information is dynamically alterable by the client associated with the profile information to reflect current information.

114. A method for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising the steps of:
(a) creating profile information pertaining to a caller; and (b) utilizing the profile information to restrict features over the hybrid network based on the profile information pertaining to the caller.

115. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 114, wherein the profile information is stored in a database accessible from the hybrid network.

116. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 114, wherein the profile information is stored in a distributed database that facilitates high availability processing.

117. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 114, wherein the profile information is stored in a database located in a host processor attached to the switched network.

118. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 114, wherein the profile information is created in a database located in a host processor when a new user is processed.

119. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 114, wherein the profile information is dynamically alterable by the user associated with the profile information to reflect current information.

120. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network coupled with an internet, comprising:
(a)~a storage attached to the hybrid network in which profile information pertaining to a user is stored; and (b)~a processor with control software that utilizes the profile information to restrict features over a the hybrid network based on the profile information pertaining to the user.

121.~An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 120, wherein the profile information is stored in a database accessible from the hybrid network.

122.~An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 120, wherein the profile information is stored in a distributed database that facilitates high availability processing.

123.~An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 120, wherein the profile information is stored in a database located in a host processor attached to the hybrid network.

124. ~An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 120, wherein the profile information is created in a database located in a host processor when a new customer is processed.

125.~An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 120, wherein the profile information is dynamically alterable by the client associated with the profile information to reflect current information.

126. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network coupled to an internet, comprising:
(a) first software that stores profile information pertaining to a user;
(b) second software that utilizes the profile information to restrict features over the hybrid network based on the profile information pertaining to the user.

127. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 126, wherein the profile information is stored in a database accessible from the hybrid network.

128. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 126) wherein the profile information is stored in a distributed database that facilitates high availability processing.

129. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 126, wherein the profile information is a database located in a host processor attached to the switch network.

130. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 126, wherein the profile information is created in a database located in host processor when a customer is processed.

131. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 126, wherein the profile information is dynamically alterable by the client associated with the profile information to reflect current information.

132. A method for facsimile communication over a hybrid network, including a source and a destination facsimile gateway comprising a hybrid network interface, comprising the steps of:
(a) establishing a V.29 modem session with a source facsimile gateway;
(b) establishing a T.30 facsimile protocol session with a source facsimile gateway;
(c) establishing a packet T.30 protocol session with a destination facsimile gateway;
(d) contacting a destination facsimile capable device from the destination facsimile gateway;
(e) establishing a V.29 modem session with the destination facsimile capable device by the destination facsimile gateway;
(f) establishing a T.30 facsimile protocol session with a destination facsimile capable device;
(g) negotiating T.30 facsimile parameters from end-to-end between two facsimile capable devices via source and destination facsimile gateway;
(h) transmitting facsimile from end-to-end between two facsimile capable devices by receiving a scanline of data, creating a packet and transmitting the packet to the destination facsimile capable device;
and (i) detecting completion of facsimile and relinquishing the communication path.

133. The method as recited in claim 132, wherein call information for determining routing is provided when the facsimile is originated.

134. The method as recited in claim 133, wherein the call information, comprises a called party's number.

135. The method as recited in claim 133, wherein the call information, comprises a calling party number.

136. The method as recited in claim 133, wherein the call information, comprises a carrier identification.

137. The method as recited in claim 133, wherein the call information;
comprises an originating line.

138. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for facsimile communication over a hybrid network including a source and a destination facsimile gateway comprising a hybrid network interface, comprising:
(a) first software that establishes a V.29 modem session with a source facsimile gateway;
(b) second software that establishes a T.30 facsimile protocol session with a source facsimile gateway;
(c) third software that establishes a packet T.30 protocol session with a destination facsimile gateway;
(d) fourth software that contacts a destination facsimile capable device from the destination facsimile gateway;
(e) fifth software that establishes a V.29 modem session with the destination facsimile capable device by the destination facsimile gateway;
sixth software that establishes a T.30 facsimile protocol session with a destination facsimile capable device;

(g) seventh software that negotiates a T.30 facsimile parameters from end-to-end between two facsimile capable devices via source and destination facsimile gateway;
(h) eighth software that transmits facsimile from end-to-end between two facsimile capable devices by receiving a scanline of data, creating a packet and transmitting the packet to the destination facsimile capable device; and (i) ninth software that detects completion of facsimile and relinquishing the communication path.

139. The computer program as recited in claim 138, wherein call information far determining routing is provided when the facsimile is originated.

140. The computer program as recited in claim 139, wherein the call information comprises a called party's number.

141. The computer program as recited in claim 139, wherein the call information comprises a calling party number.

142. The computer program as recited in claim 139, wherein the call information comprises a carrier identification.

143. The computer program as recited in claim 139, wherein the call information comprises an originating line.

144. A hybrid telecommunications system, which comprises:
(a) a switched communications network;
(b) a packet transmission network coupled to the switched communications network;
(c) a call routes coupled to the switched communications network and the packet transmission network;
(d) a memory coupled to the call routes and having stored therein a call parameter database;
the call routes being configured to route a call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter from the call parameter database, the call routes further being configured to provide an intelligent service platform, the intelligent service platform including a plurality of service engines each configured to execute desired service logic, and a service select component coupled to the service engines to select a service instance running on one of the service engines to process transactions offered by the networks comprising the hybrid telecommunications system.

145. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 144 in which the service logic identifies at least some of what service features are used, the order in which the service features are invoked, source of input service data, destination for output service data, error values and error handling, invocation of other services, and interaction with other services.

146. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 145 in which the service features include at least one of time-based routing, authentication and automatic user interaction.

147. A method for directing calls and selecting services in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) storing a call parameter database in a memory;
(b) receiving a call on the system;
(c) accessing the call parameter database to determine at least one call parameter;
(d) routing the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter;
(e) providing a plurality of service engines each configured to execute desired service logic; and selecting a service instance running on one of the service engines to process transactions offered by the networks comprising the hybrid telecommunications system.

148. The method of claim 147 in which the service logic identifies at least some of what service features are used, the order in which the service features are invoked, source of input service data, destination for output service data, error values and error handling, invocation of other services, and interaction with other services.

149. The method of claim 148 in which the service features include at least one of time-based routing, authentication and automatic user interaction.

150. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for directing calls and managing resources in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) first software that stores a call parameter database in a memory;
(b) second software that accesses the call parameter database when the system receives a call to determine at least one call parameter;
(c) third software that routes the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on the at least one call parameter and the system configuration; and (d) fourth software that provides a plurality of service engines each configured to execute desired service logic; and (e) fifth software that selects a service instance running on one of the service engines to process transactions offered by the networks comprising the hybrid telecommunications system.

151. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 150 in which the service logic identifies at least some of what service features are used, the order in which the service features are invoked, source of input service data, destination for output service data, error values and error handling, invocation of other services, and interaction with other services.

152. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 151 in which the service features include at least one of time-based routing, authentication and automatic user interaction.

153. A hybrid network, which comprises:
(a) a switched communications network;
(b) a packet transmission network coupled to the switched communications network;
(c) a call router coupled to the switched communications network and the packet transmission network;
(d) a memory coupled to the call router and having stored therein a call parameter database;
the call router being configured to route a call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter from the call parameter database, the call router further being configured to provide an intelligent service platform, the intelligent service platform including a plurality of media clients;
(e) a media server coupled between the plurality of media clients and the memory, the media server having resident thereon logic that couples a first and a second of the media clients in a collaborative session; and the media server including logic that manages the dynamic adjustment of video, audio, voice and other media based on a media clients capabilities to handle various forms of media.
154. The hybrid network of claim 153 in which the intelligent service platform is configured to use the call parameter database to provide data for a plurality of services.

154. The hybrid network of claim 153 in which the intelligent service platform includes a service engine and the data client is configured to cache data obtained from the call parameter database through the data server for customers serviced by the service engine.

155. The hybrid network of claim 153 in which the media server includes a service engine that determines how to route media through the hybrid network between the first media client and the second.

156. The hybrid network of claim 153 in which all of the plurality of media clients exchange media over the hybrid network.

157. A method for directing calls and providing services in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) storing a call parameter database in a memory;
(b) receiving a call on the system;
(c) accessing the call parameter database to determine at least one call parameter;
(d) routing the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter;
(e) coupling a media server between a plurality of media clients and the memory, the media server having resident thereon logic that couples a first and a second of the media clients in a collaborative session; and (f) adjusting media output based on a media clients capabilities to handle various forms of media.

158. The method of claim 157 in which the call parameter database is used to provide data for a plurality of services during the call.

159. The method of claim 157 additionally comprising:

(g) caching data from the call parameter database for routing the call and providing the service during the call.

160. The method of claim 157 in which the media server includes a service engine that determines how to route media through the hybrid network between the first media client and the second.

161. The method of claim 157 in which all of the plurality of media clients exchange media over the hybrid network.

162. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for directing calls and providing services in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) first software that stores a call parameter database in a memory;
(b) second software that accesses the call parameter database when the system receives a call to determine at least one call parameter;
(c) third software that routes the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on the at least one call parameter;
(d) fourth software that uses the call parameter database to provide data for a service that is provided during the call; and (e) fifth software that couples a media server between a plurality of media clients and the memory, the media server having resident thereon logic that couples a first and a second of the media clients in a collaborative session; and (i) sixth software that adjusts media output based on a media clients capabilities to handle various forms of media

163. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 162 in which the fourth software uses the call parameter database to provide data for a plurality of services during the call.

164. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 162 additionally comprising:
(g) seventh software that caches data from the call parameter database for routing the call and providing the service during the call.

165. The computer program of claim 162 in which the media server includes a service engine that determines how to route media through the hybrid network between the first media client and the second.

166. The computer program of claim 162 in which all of the plurality of media clients exchange media over the hybrid network.

167. A telecommunications system, which comprises:
(a) a switched telephone network;
(b) a packet transmission network coupled to the switched telephone network;
(c) a call router coupled to the switched telephone network and the packet transmission network; and (d) a memory coupled to the call router and having stored therein a call parameter database; the call router being configured to route a telephone call over the switched telephone network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter from the call parameter database, the call router further being configured to provide an intelligent service platform, the intelligent service platform having a central domain including a master database server configured to control and protect integrity of the database and at least one satellite domain including a database client configured to provide user access and update capabilities and being coupled to the master database server.

168. The telecommunications system of claim 167 in which at least one of the master database server and the database client are partitioned into physical subsets, so that not all data items are at one site, while maintaining a logical view of a single database.

169. The telecommunications system of claim 167 in which the database server and the database client are further configured so that the database client can subscribe to data stored in the master database.

170. A method for directing calls in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) storing a call parameter database in a memory;
(b) receiving a call on the system;
(c) accessing the call parameter database to determine at least one call parameter;
{d) routing the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter;
(e) providing a central domain including a master database server configured to control and protect integrity of the database; and providing at least one satellite domain including a database client configured to provide user access and update capabilities and being coupled to the master database server.

171. The method of claim 170 additionally comprising:
(g) partitioning at least one of the master database server and the database client into physical subsets, so that not all data items are at one site, while maintaining a logical view of a single database.

172. The method of claim 170 additionally comprising:
(g) using the database client to subscribe to data stored in the master database.

173. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for directing calls and managing resources in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) first software that stores a call parameter database in a memory;

(b) second software that accesses the call parameter database when the system receives a call to determine at least one call parameter;
(c) third software that routes the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on the at least one call parameter and the system configuration; and (d) fourth software that provides a central domain including a master database server configured to control and protect integrity of the database; and (e) fifth software that provides at least one satellite domain including a database client configured to provide user access and update capabilities and being coupled to the master database server.

174. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 173 additionally comprising:
(f) sixth software that partitions at least one of the master database server and the database client into physical subsets, so that not all data items are at one site, while maintaining a logical view of a single database.

175. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 173 additionally comprising:
sixth software that uses the database client to subscribe to data stored in the master database.

176. A telecommunications system, which comprises:
{a) a switched communications network;
(b) a packet transmission network coupled to the switched communications network;
(c) a call router coupled to the switched communications network and the packet transmission network; and (d) a memory coupled to the call router and having stored therein a call parameter database;
the call router being configured to route a call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter from the call parameter database, the call router further being configured to provide an intelligent service platform, the call parameter database further comprising a common information base, the intelligent service platform having at least one service engine and a database client coupled between the at least one service engine and the call parameter database to obtain configuration data for customers supported by the at least one service engine.

177. The telecommunications system of claim 176 in which the at least one service engine is configured to allow data to be cached at the service engine.

178. The telecommunications system of claim 176 in which the at least one service engine is configured to hand-off control to another service engine during execution of a service for a customer supported by the at least one service engine.

179. A method for directing calls and selecting services in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) storing a call parameter database comprising a common information base in a memory;
(b) receiving a call on the system;
(c) accessing the call parameter database to determine at least one call parameter;
(d) routing the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter;
(e) providing at least one service engine; and (f) obtaining configuration data for customers supported by the at least one service engine from the call parameter database.

180. The method of claim 179 in which data is cached at the service engine.

181. The method of claim 179 in which the at least one service engine hands-off control to another service engine during execution of a service for a customer supported by the at least one service engine.

182. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for directing calls and managing resources in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) first software that stores a call parameter database in a memory;
(b) second software that accesses the call parameter database when the system receives a call to determine at least one call parameter;

(c) third software that routes the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on the at least one call parameter and the system configuration; and (d) fourth software that provides at least one service engine; and (e) fifth software that obtains configuration data for customers supported by the at least one service engine from the call parameter database.

183. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 182 in which data is cached at the service engine.

184. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 182 in which the at least one service engine hands-off control to another service-engine during execution of a service for a customer supported by the at least one service engine.

185. A method for routing media transmissions on a hybrid network including a directory service, comprising the steps of:
(a) transmitting media information to the hybrid network;
(b) receiving the media information at the hybrid network;
(c) parsing call information form the media information and querying a directory service based on the call information; and (d) receiving the query form the hybrid network at the directory service;
and (e) performing a page based on the call information and the directory service information.

186. The method as recited in claim 185, wherein the call information includes delivery preference information.

187. The method as recited in claim 185, including the step of retrieving stored message information based on the preference information.

188. The method as recited in claim 185, wherein the stored message information includes support for text, audio, multimedia, video and data.

189. The method as recited in claim 185, wherein the actions based on the call information comprise document delivery.

190. The method as recited in claim 189, wherein the document delivery includes the step of creating a billing record based on the actions.

191. The method as recited in claim 185, wherein the actions based on the call information comprise outbound calling.

192. A system for routing media transmissions on a hybrid network, including a directory service, comprising:
(a) control software that transmits media information to the hybrid network;
(b) control software that receives the media information at the hybrid network;
(c) control software that parses call information form the media information and queries a directory service based on the call information;
(d) control software that receives the query from the hybrid network at the directory service; and (e) control software that performs a page based on the call information and the directory service information.

193. The system as recited in claim 192, wherein the call information includes delivery preference information.

194. The system as recited in claim 192 including control software that retrieves stored message information based on the preference information.

195. The system as recited in claim 192, wherein the stored message information includes support for text, audio, multimedia, video and data.

196. The system as recited in claim 192, wherein actions based on the call information include document delivery.

197. The system as recited in claim 196, wherein the document delivery includes creation of a billing record based on the actions.

198. The system as recited in claim 192, wherein the actions based on the call information include outbound calling.

199. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for routing media transmissions on a hybrid network, including a directory service, comprising:
(a) first software that transmits media information to the hybrid network;
(b) second software that receives the media information a the hybrid network;
(c) third software that parses call information from the media information and queries a directory service based on the call information;
(d) fourth software that receives the query form the hybrid network at the directory service; and (e) fifth software that performs a page based on the call information and information form the directory service.

200. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 199, wherein the call information includes delivery preference information.

201. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 199, including software that retrieves stored message information based on the preference information.

202. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 199, wherein the stored message information includes support for text, audio, multimedia, video and data.

203. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 199, wherein actions based on the call information include document delivery.

204. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 203, wherein the document delivery includes the creation of a billing record based on the actions.

205. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium as recited in claim 199, wherein the actions based on the call information include outbound calling.

206. A method for connecting a first telephony capable device with a second telephony capable device for media transmissions on a hybrid network, comprising the steps of:
(a) dialing a collect service from the first telephony capable device;
(b) responding to a prompt from the collect service and entering a destination phone number;
(c) responding to a prompt from the collect service and entering a caller name;
(d) placing a call to the destination phone number by the collect service;
and (e) connecting the call to the second telephony capable device in response to a query for acceptance of charges.

207. The method as recited in claim 206, wherein a negative response to any prompt from the calling service results in termination of the call.

208. The method as recited in claim 206, wherein the destination phone number is translated into an Internet protocol address utilizing a directory service.

209. The method as recited in claim 206, wherein the collect service is automated utilizing an audio response unit.

210. The method as recited in claim 206, wherein the collect service is completely or partially automated utilizing a video response unit.

211. The method as recited in claim 206, wherein the collect service is performed manually by an operator.

212. The method as recited in claim 206, wherein the collect service is automated through the use of a multimedia response unit.

213. The method as recited in claim 206, wherein the collect service provides access to an internet.

214. The method as recited in claim 206 , wherein the collect service bills a third party for services.

215. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for connecting a first telephony capable device with a second telephony capable device for media transmissions on a hybrid network, comprising:
(a) first software that dials a collect service from the first telephony capable device;
(b) second software that responds to a prompt from the collect service and entering a destination phone number;
(c) third software that responds to a prompt from the collect service and entering a caller name;
(d) fourth software that places a call to the destination phone number by the collect service; and (e) fifth software that connects the call to the second telephony capable device in response to a query for acceptance of charges.

216. The program as recited in claim 215, wherein a negative response to any prompt from the calling service results in termination of the call.

217. The program as recited in claim 215, wherein the destination phone number is translated into an internet protocol address utilizing a directory service.

218. The program as recited in claim 215, wherein the collect service is automated utilizing an audio response unit.

219. The program as recited in claim 215, wherein the collect service is completely or partially automated utilizing a video response unit.

220. The program as recited in claim 215, wherein the collect service is performed manually by an operator.

221. The program as recited in claim 215, wherein the collect service is automated through the use of a multimedia response unit.

222. The program as recited in claim 215, wherein the collect service provides access to an internet.

223. The program as recited in claim 215, wherein the collect service bills a third party for services.

224. A hybrid telecommunications system, which comprises:
(a) a switched communications network;
(b) a packet transmission network coupled to the switched communications network;
(c) a call router coupled to the switched communications network and the packet transmission network;
(d) a memory coupled to the call router and having stored therein a call parameter database comprising profile information pertaining to a subscriber to the hybrid telecommunications system;
the call router being configured to route a call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter from the call parameter database;
(e) at least one service engine coupled to the call router, the service engine being configured to execute logic defined by the profile information to provide service features customized for the subscriber for whom the profile information pertains.

225. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 224 in which the at least one service engine includes a service select service engine, the service select engine being configured to choose one or more services of the hybrid telecommunications system to execute.

226. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 224 in which the at least one service engine includes an analysis service engine, the analysis service engine being configured to perform a defined function based upon at least one of network statistics or call context information.

227. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 226 in which the defined function includes at least one of fraud detection or customer traffic statistics.

228. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 224 in which the at least one service engine includes a special service engine, the special service engine being configured to provide computing resources or lower-level functional capabilities for at least one of system service delivery, monitoring or management.

229. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 224 additionally comprising:
specialized resources coupled to the call router and to the at least one service engine and configured to provide network-based capabilities including at least one of internet to voice conversion, DTMF detection, facsimile recognition or voice recognition.

230. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 224 additionally comprising:
a call context server coupled to the call router and to the at least one service engine, the call context server being configured to accept network event records and service events in real time and to accept queries against data accepted by the call context server.

231. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 230 additionally comprising:
a revenue manager coupled to the call context server;
the call context server further being configured to provide combined event information for a call or other network transaction to the revenue manager.

232. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 224 additionally comprising:
a statistics server coupled to the at least one service engine, the statistics server being configured to accept statistics events from the at least one service engine and allow queries against data accepted by the statistics server.

233. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 232 in which the statistics server is further configured to compile the statistics events for a given interval of time from statistics events for increments of time comprising the interval of time.

234. A method for directing calls and providing services in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) storing a call parameter database comprising profile information pertaining to a subscriber to the hybrid telecommunications system in a memory;
(b) receiving a call on the system;
(c) accessing the call parameter database to determine at least one call parameter;
(d) routing the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on the at least one call parameter; and (e) executing logic defined by the profile information to provide service features customized for the subscriber for whom the profile information pertains.

235. The method of claim 234 in which the logic chooses one or more services of the hybrid telecommunications system to execute.

236. The method of claim 234 in which the logic additionally performs a defined function based upon at least one of network statistics or call context information.

237. The method of claim 236 in which the defined function includes at least one of fraud detection or customer traffic statistics.

238. The method of claim 234 in which the logic additionally provides computing resources or lower-level functional capabilities for at least one of system service delivery, monitoring or management.

239. The method of claim 234 additionally comprising:
providing a network-based capability including at least one of Internet to voice conversion, DTMF detection, facsimile recognition or voice recognition.

240. The method of claim 234 additionally comprising:
accepting network event records and service events in real time with a call context server; and accepting queries against data accepted by the call context server.

241. The method of claim 240 additionally comprising:
providing combined event information for a call or other network transaction from the call context server to a revenue manager.

242. The method of claim 234 additionally comprising:
accepting statistics events; and allowing queries against the accepted statistics events.

243. The method of claim 242 additionally comprising compiling the statistics events for a given interval of time from statistics events for increments of time comprising the interval of time.

244. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for directing calls and providing services in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) first software that stores a call parameter database comprising profile information pertaining to a subscriber to the hybrid telecommunications system in a memory;
(b) second software that accesses the call parameter database when the system receives a call to determine at least one call parameter;
(c) third software that routes the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on the at least one call parameter; and (d) fourth software that executes logic defined by the profile information to provide service features customized for the subscriber for whom the profile information pertains.

245. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 244 in which the logic chooses one or more services of the hybrid telecommunications system to execute.

246. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 21 in which the logic additionally performs a defined function based upon at least one of network statistics or call context information.

247. The computer program embodied an a computer-readable medium of claim 246 in which the defined function includes at least one of fraud detection or customer traffic statistics.

248. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 244 in which the logic additionally provides computing resources or lower-level functional capabilities far at least one of system service delivery, monitoring or management.

249. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 244 additionally comprising:
fifth software that provides a network-based capability including at least one of internet to voice conversion, DTMF detection, facsimile recognition or voice recognition.

250. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 244 additionally comprising:
fifth software that accepts network event records and service events in real time with a call context server; and sixth software that accepts queries against data accepted by the call context server.

251. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 250 additionally comprising:
seventh software that provides combined event information for a call or other network transaction from t:he call context server to a revenue manager.

252 . The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 244 additionally comprising:
fifth software that accepts statistics events; and sixth software that allows queries against the accepted statistics events.

253. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 252 additionally comprising:
seventh software that compiles the statistics events for a given interval of time from statistics events for increments of time comprising the interval of time.

254. A method for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising the steps of:
(a) recording video, audio and/or data communications;
(b) transmitting the video, audio and/or data communications over the hybrid network to one or more storage locations associated with one or more designate recipient consumers;
(c) storing the video, audio and/or data communications in the storage locations(s) associated with the designated recipient consumer(s); and (d) transmitting the video, audio and/or data communications from each storage location over the hybrid network to each designated recipient consumer upon request by each designated recipient consumer.

255. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 254, further comprising the steps of:
(a) enabling a consumer to record a greeting communication, including video, audio and/or data information;
(b) transmitting the greeting communication over the hybrid network to a storage location associated with the: consumer;
(c) storing the greeting communication in the storage location associated with the consumer; and (d) transmitting the greeting communication from the storage location over the hybrid network to other consumers who attempt to communicate with the consumer associated with the greeting.

256. A method for communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 254, wherein a consumer accesses the communications stored in the designated storage location from a user interface system.

257. A method for communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 254, wherein a consumer accesses the communications stored in the designated storage location with the aid of a human or automated operator or agent.

258. A method for communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 254, wherein the communication is automatically transmitted to the storage location associated with a designated recipient consumer if the recipient consumer is not available to participate in a live communication.

259. A method for communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 255, wherein the greeting communication is automatically transmitted to the consumer attempting to communicate with the consumer associated with the greeting if the consumer associated with the greeting is not available to participate in a live communication.

260. A method for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising the steps of:
(a) creating data pertaining to the media communication over a hybrid network;
(b) storing the data in a distributed database;
(c) partitioning data into physical subsets at a plurality of storage sites within a distributed database; and (d) presenting applications accessing or updating data with a logical view of a single, coherent database despite the plurality of storage sites.

261. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 260, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding applications internal to the hybrid network.

262. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 260, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding applications external to the hybrid network.

263. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 260, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises monitoring information regarding the hybrid network.

264. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 260, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information used to control the hybrid network.

265. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 260, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding changes to the data stored in the database.

266. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 260, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding additions to the data stored in the database.

267. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 260, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding deletions to the data stored in the database.

268. A method for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 260, wherein the step of presenting applications accessing or updating data with a logical view of a single, coherent database comprises the steps of:
(a) establishing data locations;
(b) allocating storage and memory;
(c) loading data stores; and (d) optimizing data access and update paths.

269. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising:

(a) a processor with control software that creates data pertaining to the media communication over a hybrid network;
(b) a storage attached to the hybrid network in which data pertaining to the hybrid network is stored;
(c) control software that partitions data into physical subsets at a plurality of storage sites within a distributed database; and (d) control software that presents applications accessing or updating data with a logical view of a single, coherent database despite the plurality of storage sites.

270. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 269, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding applications internal to the hybrid network.

271. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 269, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding applications external to the hybrid network.

272. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 269, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises monitoring information regarding the hybrid network.

273. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 269, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information used to control the hybrid network.

274. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 269, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding changes to the data stored in the database.

275. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 269, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding additions to the data stored in the database.

276. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 269, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding deletions to the data stored in the database.

277. An apparatus for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 269, wherein the control software that presents applications accessing or updating data with a logical view of a single, coherent database despite the plurality of storage sites comprises:
(a) control software that establishes data locations;
(b) control software that allocates storage and memory;
(c) control software that loads data stores; and (d) control software that optimizes data access and update paths.

278. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network, comprising:
(a) first software that creates data pertaining to the media communication over a hybrid network;

(b) second software that stores the data in a distributed database;
(c) third software that partitions data into physical subsets at a plurality of storage sites within a distributed database; and (d) fourth software that presents applications accessing or updating data with a logical view of a single, coherent database despite the plurality of storage sites.

279. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 278, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding applications internal to the hybrid network.

280. A computer program embodied on a. computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 19, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding applications external to the hybrid network.

281. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 278, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises monitoring information regarding the hybrid network.

282. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 278, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information used to control the hybrid network.

283. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 278, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding changes to the data stored in the database.

284. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 278, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding additions to the data stored in the database.

285. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network as recited in claim 278, wherein the data pertaining to the media communication comprises information regarding deletions to the data stored in the database.

286. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for media communication over a hybrid network a.s recited in claim 278, wherein the fourth software that presents applications accessing or updating data with a logical view of a single, coherent comprises:
(a) fifth software that establishes data locations;
(b) sixth software that allocates storage and memory;
(c) seventh software that loads data stores; and (d) eighth software that optimizes data access and update paths.

287. A hybrid telecommunications system, which comprises:
(a) a switched communications network;
(b) a packet transmission network coupled to the switched communications network;
(c) a call router coupled to the switched communications network and the packet transmission network; and (d) a gateway server in communication with the call router, the gateway server being configured to provide file transfer services to a user connected to the switched communications network.

288. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 287, further comprising an authentication server, wherein the identity of a user is authenticated by the authentication server.

289. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 287) further comprising an exterior packet filter coupled to the call router, the gateway server being coupled to the exterior packet filter, wherein the exterior packet filter is configured to accept only communications originating from a predetermined set of addresses.

290. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 287, wherein the gateway server is configured to provide only read-only file transfer services.

291. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 287, further comprising a production token ring network in communication with the gateway server.

292. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 291, further comprising an interior packet filter coupled to the production token ring network, the gateway server being coupled to the interior packet filter, wherein the interior packet filter is configured to accept only communications originating from a predetermined set of addresses.

293. A method for directing calls in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) storing a call parameter database in a memory;
(b) establishing a system configuration of the hybrid telecommunications system;
(c) receiving a call on the system;
(d) accessing the call parameter database to determine at least one call parameter; and (e) routing the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network to a gateway server based on at least one call parameter.

294. The method of claim 293 further comprising:
(f) communicating with an authentication server to authenticate the origin of the call.

295. The method of claim 293 further comprising:
(f) selectively filtering communications through an exterior packet filter, said exterior packet filter being configured to accept only communications originating from a predetermined set of addresses.

296. The method of claim 293 wherein the gateway server is configured to provide only read-only file transfer services.

297. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for directing calls and providing services in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises:
(a) first software that stores a call parameter database in a memory;
(b) second software that establishes a system configuration of the hybrid telecommunications system;
(c) third software that receives a call on the system;
(d) fourth software that accesses the call parameter database when the system receives a call to determine at least one call parameter; and (e) fifth software that routes the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network to a gateway server based on at least one call parameter.

298. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 297 further comprising:
a sixth software that communicates with an authentication server to authenticate the origin of the call.

299. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 297, further comprising:
a sixth software that selectively filters communications through an exterior packet filter, said exterior packet filter being configured to accept only communications originating from a predetermined set of addresses.

300. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 297 in which the gateway server is configured to provide only read-only file transfer services.

301. A hybrid switch for a telecommunications systems, comprising:
(a) at least one switched network interface;
(b) at least one internet interface;
(c) a bus coupling the at least one switched network interface and the at least one internet interface; and (d) a host processor coupled to the bus.

302. The hybrid switch of claim 301 in which at least one of the interfaces is configured to transfer a call processing command received at the at least one of the interfaces to the host processor for selecting one of the at least one interfaces as an outgoing interface for a call received at one of the at least one interfaces and associated with the call processing command.

303. The hybrid switch of claim 302 in which the host processor is further configured to query an internet service control point coupled to the at least one internet interface for routing instructions.

304. The hybrid switch of claim 302 in which the host processor is further configured to derive routing instructions locally.

305. The hybrid switch of claim 301 additionally comprising at least one digital signal processor coupled to the bus.

306. A hybrid telecommunications system, comprising:
(a) A hybrid switch of claim 301;
(b) At least one switched network coupled to the hybrid switch; and (c) At least one Internet coupled to the hybrid switch.

307. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 306 additionally comprising:
(a) at least one echo canceller coupled to the hybrid switch.

308. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 306 additionally comprising:
(a) at least one signal demultiplexer coupled to the hybrid switch.

309. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 306 in which at least one fiber-optic cable is coupled to the hybrid switch.

310. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 306 additionally comprising:
(a) at least one modem coupled to the hybrid switch.

311. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 306 additionally comprising:
(a) at- least one pooled switch matrix coupled to the hybrid switch, the system being configured to establish a connection dynamically through the pooled switched matrix based on a characteristic of a call received at one of the at least one interfaces.

312. The telecommunications system of claim 306 additionally comprising:
(a) a plurality of plug-and-play modules for coupling communications peripherals in a call.

313. A method for processing a communication at a hybrid switch, comprising the steps of:
(a) receiving a call processing command associated with a particular port of a hybrid switch;
(b) receiving a communication at the port of the hybrid switch associated with the call processing command; and (c) coupling an appropriate plug-and-play module specified in the call processing command to the particular port of the hybrid switch to process the communication.

314. The method of claim 313 additionally comprising the steps of:
(a) transferring the call processing command to a host processor for selecting a particular port of the hybrid switch as an outgoing port for a call associated with the call processing command; and (b) routing the call to the outgoing port.

315. The method of claim 314 additionally comprising the step of:
(a) querying an Internet service control point coupled to the hybrid switch with the host processor for routing instructions.

316. The method of claim 314 in which the host processor derives routing instructions locally.

317. The method of claim 314 in which one of the port receiving the call and the outgoing port is coupled to a switched network and the other of the port receiving the call or the outgoing port.

318. The method of claim 314 in which at least one fiber-optic cable is coupled to the port receiving the call or the outgoing port.

319. The method of claim 313 in which the plug-and-play module is a digital signal processor.

320. The method of claim 313 in which the plug-and-lay module is an echo canceller.

321. The method of claim 313 in which the plug-and-play module is a signal demultiplexer.

322. The method of claim 313 in which the plug-and-play module is a modem.

323. The method of claim 313 in which the plug-and-play module is dynamically coupled to the particular port of the hybrid switch by a pooled switch matrix.

324. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for processing a communication at a hybrid switch, comprising:
(a) first software that receives a call processing command associated with a particular port of a hybrid switch;
(b) second software that receives a communication at the port of the hybrid switch associated with the call processing command; and (c) third software that couples an appropriate plug-and-play module specified in the call processing command to the particular port of the hybrid switch to process-the communication.

325. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 324 additionally comprising:

(a) fourth software that transfers the call processing command to a host processor for selecting a particular port of the hybrid switch as an outgoing port for a call associated with the call processing command;
and (b) fifth software that routes the call to the outgoing port.

326. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 325 additionally comprising:
(a) sixth software that queries an internet service control point coupled to the hybrid switch with the host processor for routing instructions.

327. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 325 additionally comprising:
(a) sixth software that derives routing instructions locally with the host processor.

328. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 325 in which the first and fifth software are respectively configure to received the call and route the call from and to either a switched network or an internet.

329. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 325 in which the first and fifth software are respectively configured to received the call and route the call from and to a fiber-optic cable.

330. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 325 in which the third software a is configured to couple a digital signal processor to the particular port.

331. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 325 in which the third software is configured to couple an echo canceller to the particular port

332. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 325 in which the third software is configured to couple a signal demultiplexer to the particular port.

333. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 325 in which the third software is configured to couple a modem to the particular port.

334. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 325 in which the third software is configured to couple the plug-and-play module to the particular port of the hybrid switch dynamically through a pooled switch matrix.

335. A communications system, comprising:
(a) one or more switched communications networks;
(b) one or more packet transmission networks;
(c) a prioritizing access router coupled to the switched communications networks and the packet transmission networks; and (d) a memory coupled to the prioritizing access router and having stored therein a service control parameter database; the prioritizing access router including a plurality of functions, each function configured to route data over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one service control parameter from the service control parameter database, the prioritizing access router further including logic that delivers some data on each network interface earlier than other data, based on at least one service control parameter from the service control parameter database.

336. The communications system of claim 335 wherein the plurality of functions includes the employment of modulation/demodulation (modem) equipment to transmit and receive data over standard telephone lines.

337. The communications system of claim 335 wherein the plurality of functions includes the employment of standard data network interface equipment, including but not limited to 10baseT Ethernet, 100baseT
Ethernet, coaxial Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Isochronous Ethernet, Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI), Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), X.25, Frame Relay, and Switched Multimegabit Data Service.

338. The communications system of claim 335 wherein the plurality of functions includes the use conversion function, capable of converting packets utilizing the Point to Point Protocol (PPP) to packets utilizing the Internet Protocol (IP), or vice versa.

339. The communications system of claim 335 wherein the plurality of functions includes the use of packet classifier function, capable of classifying packets in groups according to criteria.

340. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to destination IP address.

341. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to originating IP address.

342. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to destination User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number.

343. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to originating UDP port number.

344. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to destination Telnet Control Protocol port number.

345. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to originating Telnet Control Protocol port number.

346. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to a flow label.

347. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to a tag.

348. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to a data type.

349. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to originating User ID.

350. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to destination User ID.

351. The communications system of claim 339 wherein the packet classifier function classifies packets according to any defined data field in the packet.

352. The communications system of claim 335 wherein the plurality of functions includes the employment of a packet scheduler.

353. The communications system of claim 352 wherein the packet scheduler is configured to place packets on a priority queue according to packet classification and service control parameters.

354. The communications system of claim 353 wherein the priority queues order packets for transmission on network interfaces.

355. The communications system of claim 353 wherein the priority queues order packets for transmission on modem interfaces.

356. The communications system of claim 335 wherein the plurality of functions includes a controller function.

357. The communications system of claim 356 wherein the controller function accepts control commands through an application programming interface.

358. The communications system of claim 356 wherein the controller function can accept or reject control commands based upon defined policies.

359. The communications system of claim 356 wherein the controller function can accept or reject control commands based upon resource availability.

360. The communications system of claim 356 wherein the controller function can accept or reject control commands based upon the privileges granted to the requesting entity.

361. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for prioritizing and routing media transmissions on a hybrid network, the hybrid network including one or more switched networks coupled to one or more packet transmission networks, comprising:
(a) first software a that prioritizes access and routing between the switched communications network and the packet transmission networks; and (b) storing a service control parameter database in a memory coupled to the first software including a plurality of functions, each function configured to route data over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one service control parameter from the service control parameter database, and logic that delivers some data on each network interface earlier than other data, based on at least one service control parameter from the service control parameter database.

362. A telecommunications system, which comprises:
(a) a switched communications network;
(b) a packet transmission network coupled to the switched communications network;
(c) a user terminal coupled to the switched communications network or the packet transmission network, or both;
(d) one or more call routers coupled to the switched communications network and the packet transmission network;
(e) a memory coupled to each call router and having stored therein a call parameter database; each call router being configured to route a call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter from the call parameter database, the call router further being configured to provide an intelligent service platform, the intelligent service platform having a plurality of functions available from a single connection;
(f) a gateway which couples the packet transmission network with the switched communications network;
(g) a call queue manager coupled to the packet transmission network;
(h) an Automated Call Distributor (ACD) coupled to the switched communications network;
(i) an ACD Controller coupled to the ACD; and (j) an agent workstation coupled to the switched communications network via the ACD, and coupled to the packet transmission network.

363. The telecommunications system of claim 362 in which the plurality of functions include at least on of user profile management, information service profile management, address translation, admission control, resource management, topology tracking, statistics collection, utilization and billing data logging, message retrieval and message distribution.

364. The telecommunications system of claim 362 in which the user terminal is configured to browse the world wide web.

365. The telecommunications system of claim 362 in which the user terminal is configured with software and hardware permitting the launch of an interactive voice or multimedia conversation.

366. The telecommunications system of claim 365 in which a call router routes the interactive voice or multimedia conversation to a gateway.

367. The telecommunications system of claim 366 in which the gateway launches a corresponding interactive voice or multimedia conversation on the switched communications network.

368. The telecommunications system of claim 367 in which a call router routes the corresponding interactive voice or multimedia conversation to an ACD.

369. The telecommunications system of claim 368 in which the gateway signals information to the ACD, including at least one of the following:
identification of the conversation originator, identification of the originating user terminal, identification of the originating gateway, identification of one or more web pages browsed, identification of the intended destination address, identification of the intended destination user, and unique identification of the interactive voice conversation.

370. The telecommunications system of claim 369 in which the ACD
delivers the signaling information to the ACD controller.

371. The telecommunications system of claim 370 in which the ACD
controller, using any available resources on the packet transmission network or the switched communications network, forms display screens.

372. The telecommunications system of claim 371 in which the ACD
controller delivers the display screens to an agent workstation.

373. The telecommunications system of claim 371 in which the ACD
controller transfers the interactive voice or multimedia conversation to the agent workstation.

374. The telecommunications system of claim 373 in which the agent workstation permits voice or multimedia interaction with the originating user terminal, via the packet transmission network and the switched communications network.

375. A telecommunications system, which comprises:
(a) a switched communications network;
(b) a packet transmission network coupled to the switched communications network;
(c) a user terminal coupled to the switched communications network or the packet transmission network, or both;

(d) one or more call routers coupled to the switched communications network and the packet transmission network;
(e) a memory coupled to each call router and having stored therein a call parameter database; each call router being configured to route a call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter from the call parameter database, the call router further being configured to provide an intelligent service platform, the intelligent service platform having a plurality of functions available from a single connection;
(f) a gateway which couples the packet transmission network with the switched communications network;
(g) a call queue manager coupled to the packet transmission network;
(h) an Automated Call Distributor (ACD) coupled to the switched communications network;
(i) an ACD Controller coupled to the ACD;
(j) a Voice Response Unit coupled to the ACD; and (k) an agent workstation coupled to the switched communications network via the ACD, and coupled to the packet transmission network.

376. The telecommunications system of claim 375 in which the plurality of functions include at least on of user profile management, information service profile management, address translation, admission control, resource management, topology tracking, statistics collection, utilization and billing data logging, message retrieval and message distribution.

377. The telecommunications system of claim 375 in which the user terminal is configured to browse the world wide web.

378. The telecommunications system of claim 375 in which the user terminal is configured with software and hardware permitting the launch of an interactive voice or multimedia conversation.

379. The telecommunications system of claim 378 in which a call routes routes the interactive voice or multimedia conversation to a gateway.

380. The telecommunications system of claim 379 in which the gateway launches a corresponding interactive voice or multimedia conversation on the switched communications network.

381. The telecommunications system of claim 380 in which a call routes routes the corresponding interactive voice or multimedia conversation to an ACD.

382. The telecommunications system of claim 381 in which ACD connects the interactive voice or multimedia conversation to a Voice Response Unit (VRU).

383. The telecommunications system of claim 382 in which the gateway signals information to the VRU, including at least one of the following:
identification of the conversation originator, identification of the originating user terminal, identification of the originating gateway, identification of one or more web pages browsed, identification of the intended destination address, identification of the intended destination user, and unique identification of the interactive voice conversation.

384. The telecommunications system of claim 383 in which the VRU
delivers the signaling information to the ACD controller.

385. The telecommunications system of claim 384 in which the ACD
controller, using any available resources on the packet transmission network or the switched communications network, forms display screens.

386. The telecommunications system of claim 385 in which the ACD
controller delivers the display screens to an agent workstation.

387. The telecommunications system of claim 381 in which the ACD
controller transfers the interactive voice or multimedia conversation to the agent workstation.

388. The telecommunications system of claim 387 in which the agent workstation permits voice or multimedia interaction with the originating user terminal, via the packet transmission network and the switched communications network.